This is a modern-English version of Music Notation and Terminology, originally written by Gehrkens, Karl Wilson. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

 

 

Transcriber's Note: This e-text contains Unicode characters representing music symbols (sharp, flat, and natural) that may not display properly in your browser or font. A mouse-hover description of these symbols has been provided, e.g.: A G C.

Transcriber's Note: This e-text contains Unicode characters representing music symbols (sharp, flat, and natural) that might not display correctly in your browser or font. A mouse-hover description of these symbols has been provided, e.g.: A G C.

 


 

 

MUSIC NOTATION
AND TERMINOLOGY

By KARL W. GEHRKENS, A.M.

ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF SCHOOL MUSIC
OBERLIN CONSERVATORY OF MUSIC

logo

logo

THE A. S. BARNES COMPANY
NEW YORK 1914

THE A. S. BARNES COMPANY
NEW YORK 1914

Copyright, 1914, by
THE A. S. BARNES COMPANY

Copyright, 1914, by
THE A. S. BARNES COMPANY


PREFACE

The study of music notation and terminology by classes in conservatories and in music departments of colleges and normal schools is a comparative innovation, one reason for the non-existence of such courses in the past being the lack of a suitable text-book, in which might be found in related groups clear and accurate definitions of the really essential terms. But with the constantly increasing interest in music study (both private and in the public schools), and with the present persistent demand that music teaching shall become more systematic and therefore more efficient in turning out a more intelligent class of pupils, it has become increasingly necessary to establish courses in which the prospective teacher of music (after having had considerable experience with music itself) might acquire a concise and accurate knowledge of a fairly large number of terms, most of which he has probably already encountered as a student, and many of which he knows the general meaning of, but none of which he perhaps knows accurately enough to enable him to impart his knowledge clearly and economically to others.

The study of music notation and terminology in conservatories and music departments at colleges and teacher training schools is a relatively new development. One reason such courses weren't offered in the past was the lack of a suitable textbook that provided clear and accurate definitions of essential terms in related groups. However, with the growing interest in music education (both privately and in public schools) and the ongoing demand for music teaching to be more systematic and effective in producing a more intelligent group of students, it's become crucial to establish courses where future music teachers can gain a concise and accurate understanding of a broad range of terms. Most of these terms they have likely encountered as students and may know generally, but they probably don't have the precise knowledge needed to clearly and efficiently teach this information to others.

To meet the need of a text-book for this purpose in his own classes the author has been for several years gathering material from all available sources, and it is hoped that the arrangement of this material in related groups as here presented will serve to give the student not only some insight into the present meaning of a goodly number of terms, but will also enable him to see more clearly why certain terms have the meaning which at present attaches to them. To this latter end the [Pg iv]derivations of many of the terms are given in connection with their definition.

To provide a textbook for this purpose in his classes, the author has spent several years gathering material from various sources. It’s hoped that organizing this material into related groups, as presented here, will not only give students insight into the current meanings of many terms but also help them understand why certain terms have the meanings they do today. To achieve this, the [Pg iv]derivations of many terms are included along with their definitions.

The aim has not been to present an exhaustive list, and the selection of terms has of course been influenced largely by the author's own individual experience, hence many teachers will probably feel that important terms have been omitted that should have been included. For this state of affairs no apology is offered except that it would probably be impossible to write a book on this subject which would satisfy everyone in either the selection or actual definition of terms.

The goal wasn't to create a complete list, and the choice of terms has definitely been shaped by the author's personal experience. As a result, many teachers might think that important terms have been left out that should have been included. There's no apology for this because it would likely be impossible to write a book on this topic that would satisfy everyone regarding the selection or actual definition of terms.

In formulating the definitions themselves an attempt has been made to use such words as note, tone, et cetera with at least a fair degree of accuracy, and while the attitude of the author on this point may be criticized as being puristic and pedantic, it is nevertheless his opinion that the next generation of music students and teachers will be profited by a more accurate use of certain terms that have been inaccurately used for so long that the present generation has to a large extent lost sight of the fact that the use is inaccurate. The author is well aware of the fact that reform is a matter of growth rather than of edict, but he is also of the belief that before reform can actually begin to come, the need of reform must be felt by a fairly large number of actively interested persons. It is precisely because so few musicians realize the need of any change in music terminology that the changes recommended by committees who have given the matter careful thought are so slow in being adopted. It is hoped that some few points at which reform in the terminology of music is necessary may be brought to the attention of a few additional musicians thru this volume, and that the cause may thus be helped in some slight degree.

In creating the definitions, an effort has been made to use words like note, tone, and so on with a decent level of accuracy. While some might criticize the author's viewpoint as overly rigid or pedantic, he believes that the next generation of music students and teachers will benefit from a more precise use of certain terms that have been misused for so long that the current generation largely overlooks their inaccuracies. The author understands that reform is more about growth than commands, but he also thinks that before any actual reforms can happen, a significant number of engaged individuals must feel the need for change. It’s precisely because so few musicians recognize the necessity for changes in music terminology that the recommendations from thoughtful committees are adopted so slowly. This volume aims to highlight a few areas where reform in music terminology is essential, hoping to bring this issue to the attention of more musicians and contribute, even slightly, to the cause.

It is suggested that in using the book for class-room purposes the teacher emphasize not only the definition and derivation of all terms [Pg v]studied, but the spelling and pronunciation as well. For this latter purpose a pronouncing index has been appended.

It is recommended that when using the book for classroom purposes, the teacher should focus not only on the definition and origin of all terms [Pg v] studied but also on their spelling and pronunciation. To assist with this, a pronunciation index has been included.

It is impossible to give credit to all sources from which ideas have been drawn, but especial mention should be made of the eminently clear and beautifully worded definitions compiled by Professor Waldo S. Pratt or the Century Dictionary, and the exceedingly valuable articles on an almost all-inclusive range of topics found in the new edition of Grove's Dictionary. Especial thanks for valuable suggestions as to the arrangement of the material, etc., are also due to Dr. Raymond H. Stetson, Professor of Psychology, Oberlin College; Arthur E. Heacox, Professor of Theory, Oberlin Conservatory of Music; and Charles I. Rice, Supervisor of Music, Worcester, Mass., as well as to various members of the Music Teachers' National Association who have offered valuable advice along certain specific lines.

It’s impossible to acknowledge every source of ideas, but I want to highlight the clear and well-written definitions compiled by Professor Waldo S. Pratt for the Century Dictionary, and the incredibly valuable articles covering a wide range of topics found in the new edition of Grove's Dictionary. Special thanks also go to Dr. Raymond H. Stetson, Professor of Psychology at Oberlin College; Arthur E. Heacox, Professor of Theory at Oberlin Conservatory of Music; and Charles I. Rice, Supervisor of Music in Worcester, Mass., for their valuable suggestions on organizing the material, along with various members of the Music Teachers' National Association who provided helpful advice on specific aspects.

K.W.G.

K.W.G.

Oberlin Conservatory of Music, June, 1913

Oberlin Conservatory of Music, June 1913


CONTENTS

Chapter I.—Some Principles of Correct Notation 1
1. Note.
2, 3. Rules for turning stems.
4. Use of cross-stroke.
5. Rest.
6. G Clef.
7. F Clef and C Clef.
8. Sharp and double-sharp.
9. Flat, double-flat and natural.
10. Tie.
11. Dot after a note.

Chapter II.—Symbols of Music Defined 5
12. Staff and Great Staff.
13. Leger Lines.
14. Staff degrees.
15. Clef.
16. Treble and bass Clefs.
17. Movable C Clef.
18. Sharp.
19. Flat.
20. Double-sharp and double-flat.

Chapter III.—Symbols of Music Defined (continued) 8
21. Natural
22, 23. Key-signature; how determine whether a major or minor key.
24, 25. Accidentals; with tie across bar.
26. Rules concerning altered staff degrees.
27. Enharmonic.
28. Notes; pitch and length of tones.
29. Rests.
30. Lists of notes and rests.
31. English names for.
32. Less common forms.
33. Whole rest, peculiar use of.
34. Bar.
35. Double-bar.

Chapter IV.—Abbreviations, Signs, etc. 13
36-40. Signs for repetition.
41. Continuation.
42. Rest.
43. Pause.
44. Hold.
45-47. Alteration of Pitch.
48. Octave names.

Chapter V.—Abbreviations, Signs, etc. (continued) 17
49-51. Dots after notes.
52. Dots over or under notes.
53. Dash over note.
54. Tie.
55. Slur.
56. Slur or tie with dots.
57. Dash over note.
58. Dash and dot over note.
59. Accent marks.
60. m.d., m.g., etc.
61. Arpeggio.
62. Messa di voce.
63. Violin bow signs.

Chapter VI.—Embellishments 22
64. Definition and kinds.
65. Trill.
66-68. Mordent.
69-72. Turn.
73, 74. Appoggiatura.
75. Acciaccatura.

Chapter VII.—Scales 27
76. Definition, and old forms.
77. Origin.
78. Key.
79. Three general classes.
80. Diatonic, defined.
81. Major diatonic.
82. Tetrachords.
83. The fifteen positions.

Chapter VIII.—Scales (continued) 33
84. Minor diatonic.
85. Original form.
86. Harmonic minor.
87. Melodic minor.
88. Eleven positions.
89. Relative minor.
90. Tonic minor.
91. Diatonic scale names.
92. Syllable-names.
93. Chromatic scale.
94. Nine positions.
[Pg viii]95. Whole-step scale.

Chapter IX.—Auxiliary Words and Endings 42

Chapter X.—Measure 44
97. Definition.—Two essential characteristics. Rhythm vers measure.
98. Syncopation.
99. Simple and compound measures.
100. Commonest varieties.
101. Other varieties.
102. Rare varieties.
103. The signs, C and cut-time.

Chapter XI.—Tempo 48
104. Misuses of the word "time."
105-107. How to correct these: by substituting "rhythm," "measure,"
and "tempo."
108. Three ways of finding the correct tempo.
109. A convenient grouping of tempo-terms.

Chapter XII.—Tempo (continued) 52
110-119. Tempo-terms.

Chapter XIII.—Dynamics 56
120-131. Terms relating to dynamics.

Chapter XIV.—Terms Relating to Forms and Styles 62
132. Definition of form.
133. Basis of form.
134. Difference between form and style.
135. Introductory.
136. Two styles.
137. Monophonic music.
138. Polyphonic music.
139. Counterpoint.
140. Imitation.
141. Canon.
142. School round.
143. Fugue.

Chapter XV.—Terms Relating to Forms and Styles (continued) 67
144. Phrase-section.
145. Period. Antecedent. Consequent.
146. Primary forms.
147. Theme.
148. Thematic development.
149. Rondo.
150. Suite.
151. Dances in suite.
152. Scherzo.
153. Sonata.
154. Trio. Quartet. Chamber Music.
155. Concerto.
156. Symphony.
157. Sonata-form.
158. Sonatina. Grand Sonata.
159. Program music.
160. Symphonic or tone poem.

Chapter XVI.—Terms Relating to Vocal Music 76
161. Anthem.
162. A capella.
163. Motet.
164. Choral.
165. Mass.
166. Cantata.
167. Oratorio.
168. Opera.
169. Libretto.
170. Recitative.
171. Aria.
172. Lied.
173. Ballad.
174. Folk-song.
175. Madrigal.
176. Glee.
177. Part-song.

Chapter XVII.—Rhythm, Melody, Harmony and Intervals 82
178. The four elements of music.
179. Rhythm.
180. Melody.
181. Harmony.
182. Timbre.
183. Interval—harmonic and melodic.
184. Number name and specific name.
185. Prime.
186. Second.
187. Third.
188. Fourth.
189. Fifth.
190. Sixth.
191. Seventh.
192. Octave.
193. Ninth.
194. Major, minor, perfect, diminished and augmented intervals.
195. Inverted intervals.

Chapter XVIII.—Chords, Cadences, etc. 87
196. Chord. Triad. Root.
197. Major, minor, diminished, augmented triads.
198. The Common chords.
199. Fundamental position. First inversion. Second inversion.
200. Figured bass.
201. Seventh-chord. Ninth chord.
202. Cadence.
203. Authentic cadence.
204. Perfect authentic. Imperfect authentic.
205. Plagal cadence.
206. Half-cadence.
207. Deceptive cadence.
208. Sequence.
209. Modulation, harmonic and melodic: Dominant Seventh.
[Pg ix]210. Suspension.
211. Retardation.
212. Anticipation.
213. Pedal point.
214. Close and open position.
215. Transposition.

Chapter XIX.—Miscellaneous Terms 95

Chapter XX.—Miscellaneous Terms (continued) 98

Appendix A.—The History of Music Notation 101

Appendix B.—Musical Instruments 112
1. Two classes.
2. Piano.
3, 4. Organ, reed and pipe.
5. Instruments used for ensemble playing.
6. Band.
7. Orchestra.
8. The stringed instruments.
9. Wood-wind.
10. Brass.
11. Percussion.
12. Proportion of instruments, in an orchestra.
13. Books recommended.
14. Violin.
15. Viola.
16. Violoncello.
17. Double-bass.
18. Flute.
19. Piccolo.
20. Oboe family.
21. Clarinet and bass clarinet; saxophone.
22. French horn.
23. Trumpet.
24. Cornet.
25. Trombone.
26. Tuba.
27. Kettle-drum.
28. Harp.

Appendix C.—Acoustics 131
1. Definition.
2. Sound, production of.
3. Sound, transmission of.
4. Rate of travel.
5. Intensification of.
6. Classification of.
7. Tones, properties of.
8. Pitch.
9. Intensity.
10. Quality.
11. Overtones.
12. Equal temperament.
13. Standards of pitch.

Appendix D.—Terminology Reform 139

Appendix E.—Analysis of Beethoven Sonata, Op. 31, No. 3 149

Pronouncing Index 159

Chapter 1.—Some Principles of Correct Notation 1
Reminder.
2, 3. Guidelines for changing stems.
4. Cross-stroke usage.
Chill.
G Clef.
7. F Clef and C Clef.
8. Sharp and super sharp.
9. Flat, double flat, and natural.
10. Necktie.
11. Dot after a note.

Chapter 2.—Symbols of Music Defined 5
12. Staff and Grand Staff.
13. Ledger Lines.
14. Staff qualifications.
15. Staff.
Treble and bass clefs.
17. Moveable C Clef.
Sharp.
19. Apartment.
Double sharp and double flat.

Chapter 3.—Symbols of Music Defined (continued) 8
Natural.
22, 23. Key signature; how to tell if it's a major or minor key.
24, 25. Accidentals; with a tie across the measure.
26. Rules regarding changed staff degrees.
27. Enharmonic.
28. Notes; pitch and length of tones.
29. Takes a break.
30. Lists of notes and rests.
English names for
32. Less common types.
33. Uncommon use of whole rest.
34. Pub.
Double-bar.

Chapter 4.—Abbreviations, Signs, etc. 13
Signs for repetition.
41. Ongoing.
42. Take a break.
Hold on.
Hold on.
Pitch Change.
Octave names.

Chapter 5.—Abbreviations, Signs, etc. (continued) 17
Dots after notes.
52. Dots placed above or below notes.
53. Quick note.
54. Necktie.
Slur.
56. Slur or tie with dots.
57. Quick note.
58. A dash and a dot above the note.
Accent marks.
60. M.D., M.G., etc.
Arpeggio.
62. Vocal range.
Violin bow markings.

Chapter 6.—Embellishments 22
64. Definitions and types.
Trill.
66-68. Mordent.
Turn.
73, 74. Appoggiatura.
75. Grace note.

Chapter 7.—Scales 27
76. Definition and previous versions.
77. Source.
78. Key.
79. Three main categories.
Diatonic, defined.
Major scale.
Tetrachords.
The fifteen roles.

Chapter 8.—Scales (continued) 33
Minor scale.
Original form.
Harmonic minor scale.
Melodic minor scale.
88. Eleven roles.
Relative minor.
Tonic minor.
Diatonic scale names.
Syllable names.
Chromatic scale.
9 positions.
[Pg viii]Whole step scale.

Chapter 9.—Auxiliary Words and Endings 42

Chapter X.—Measure 44
97. Definition.—Two key characteristics. Rhythm vs. measure.
Syncopation.
99. Basic and complex measures.
Most common types.
Other types.
Rare species.
103. The signs, C and cut-time.

Chapter 11.—Tempo 48
104. Incorrect uses of the term "time."
105-107. How to fix these by using "rhythm," "measure,"
and "beat."
108. Three ways to find the right tempo.
109. A handy collection of tempo terms.

Chapter 12.—Tempo (continued) 52
Tempo terms.

Chapter 13.—Dynamics 56
120-131. Terms related to dynamics.

Chapter 14.—Terms Relating to Forms and Styles 62
Definition of form.
Basis of the form.
134. Difference between form and style.
135. Introduction.
Two styles.
Solo music.
Multilayered music.
Counterpoint.
Copying.
Canon.
School tour.
Fugue.

Chapter 15.—Terms Relating to Forms and Styles (continued) 67
Phrase section.
145. Period. Antecedent. Consequent.
Main types.
Theme.
Thematic development.
Rondo.
150. Suite.
Suite dances.
152. Scherzo.
Sonata.
Trio. Quartet. Chamber music.
Concert.
Symphony concert.
Sonata form.
Sonatina. Grand Sonata.
Program music.
Symphonic or tone poem.

Chapter 16.—Terms Relating to Vocal Music 76
Song.
A Capella.
Motet.
Choir.
Massachusetts.
Cantata.
167. Oratorio.
Opera.
169. Lyrics.
170. Recitative.
Aria.
172. Song.
173. Song.
Folk song.
Madrigal.
Joy.
Part song.

Chapter 17.—Rhythm, Melody, Harmony and Intervals 82
178. The four elements of music.
Rhythm.
180. Tune.
Balance.
182. Tone.
183. Interval—harmonic and melodic.
184. Number name and specific name.
Prime.
Second.
3rd.
4th.
5th.
6th.
Seventh.
192. Octave.
Ninth.
194. Major, minor, perfect, diminished, and augmented intervals.
Inverted intervals.

Chapter 18.—Chords, Cadences, etc. 87
196. Chord. Triad. Root.
197. Major, minor, diminished, and augmented triads.
Common chords.
199. Root position. First inversion. Second inversion.
Figured bass.
201. Seventh chord. Ninth chord.
Cadence.
Genuine rhythm.
204. Perfect authentic. Imperfect authentic.
Plagal cadence.
Half cadence.
Deceptive cadence.
208. Sequence.
209. Modulation, harmonic and melodic: Dominant Seventh.
[Pg ix]210. Suspension.
211. Delayed development.
Expectation.
Pedal note.
214. Close and open jobs.
215. Transposition.

Chapter 19.—Miscellaneous Terms 95

Chapter XX.—Miscellaneous Terms (continued) 98

Appendix A.—The History of Music Notation 101

Appendix B.—Musical Instruments 112
Two categories.
Piano.
3, 4. Organ, reed, and pipe.
5. Instruments used for playing in a group.
Band.
Orchestra.
8. String instruments.
Woodwind instrument.
10. Brass.
11. Drums.
12. Ratio of instruments in an orchestra.
Book recommendations.
Violin.
15. Got it.
Cello.
Double bass.
Flute.
19. Small.
Oboe family.
21. Clarinet and bass clarinet; saxophone.
French horn.
Trumpet.
Cornet.
Trombone.
Tuba.
Bass drum.
Harp instrument.

Appendix C.—Acoustics 131
Meaning.
2. Audio production.
3. Audio transmission.
Travel speed.
5. Making it stronger.
6. Categorization.
Tone characteristics.
8. Proposal.
9. Intensity.
Quality.
11. Overtones.
Equal temperament.
Pitch standards.

Appendix D.—Terminology Reform 139

Appendix E.—Analysis of Beethoven Sonata, Op. 31, No. 3 149

Pronunciation Guide 159


CHAPTER I

Principles of Proper Notation

1. The note (from nota—Latin—a mark or sign) consists of either one, two, or three parts, (notes) these being referred to respectively as head, stem, and hook. The hook is often called tail or cross-stroke. The stem appears on the right side of the head when turned up, but on the left side when turned down.[1] quarter notes The hook is always on the right side.[2] eighth notes

1. The note (from nota—Latin for a mark or sign) has either one, two, or three parts, (notes) which are known as the head, stem, and hook. The hook is often called the tail or cross-stroke. The stem appears on the right side of the head when it's facing up, but on the left side when it's facing down.[1] quarter notes The hook is always on the right side.[2] eighth notes

In writing music with pen the head and hook are best made with a heavy pressure on the pen point, but in writing at the board they are most easily made by using a piece of chalk about an inch long, turned on its side.

In writing music with a pen, the notes and hooks are best created with strong pressure on the pen tip, but when writing on a board, it's easiest to use a piece of chalk about an inch long, laid on its side.

2. When only one part (or voice) is written on the staff, the following rules for turning stems apply: (1) If the note-head is below the third line, the stem must turn up. (2) If the note-head is above the third line the stem must turn down. (3) If the note-head is on the third line the stem is turned either up or down with due regard to the symmetrical appearance of the measure in which the note occurs. The following examples will illustrate these points.

2. When there's only one part (or voice) written on the staff, the following rules for turning stems apply: (1) If the note head is below the third line, the stem should turn up. (2) If the note head is above the third line, the stem should turn down. (3) If the note head is on the third line, the stem can be turned either up or down, considering the balanced look of the measure where the note appears. The following examples will illustrate these points.

 

Fig. 1

Fig. 1

 

3. When two parts are written on the same staff, the stems of the upper part all turn up, and those of the lower part turn down, in order that the parts may be clearly distinguished. (Fig. 2.) But in music for piano and other instruments on which complete chords can be sounded by one performer and also in simple, four-part vocal music in which all voices have approximately the same rhythm, several notes often have one stem in common as in Fig. 3.

3. When two parts are written on the same staff, the stems of the upper part all point up, and those of the lower part point down, so that the parts can be easily distinguished. (Fig. 2.) However, in music for piano and other instruments where one performer can play complete chords, as well as in simple four-part vocal music where all voices have roughly the same rhythm, several notes often share one stem, as shown in Fig. 3.

 

Fig. 2

Fig. 2

 

Fig. 3

Fig. 3

 

4. Notes of small denomination (eighths and smaller) are often written in groups of two or more, all stems in the group being then connected by one cross-stroke. In such a case all the stems must of course be turned the same way, the direction being determined by the position of the majority of note-heads in the group. Notes thus stroked may be of the same or of different denomination. See Fig. 4.

4. Notes of small value (eighths and smaller) are often written in groups of two or more, with all the stems in the group connected by one cross-stroke. In this case, all the stems must be oriented the same way, with the direction determined by the position of most note-heads in the group. Notes that are stroked can be of the same or different values. See Fig. 4.

 

Fig. 4

Fig. 4

 

In vocal music notes are never thus stroked when a syllable is given to each note. (See p. 19, Sec. 55, C.)

In vocal music, notes are never played this way when each note corresponds to a syllable. (See p. 19, Sec. 55, C.)

5. Rests, like notes, are best made with a heavy pen stroke or by using a piece of chalk on its side. (See note under Sec. 1.) The double-whole rest, whole rest, and half rest occupy the third space unless for the sake of clearness in writing two parts on the same staff they are written higher or lower. The rests of smaller denomination may be placed at any point on the staff, the hooks being always placed on the spaces. The hook[Pg 3] of the eighth rest is usually placed on the third space. Rests are sometimes dotted, but are never tied.

5. Rests, like notes, are best created with a strong pen stroke or by using a piece of chalk on its side. (See note under Sec. 1.) The double-whole rest, whole rest, and half rest usually sit in the third space unless they need to be positioned higher or lower to keep things clear when writing two parts on the same staff. Rests of smaller value can be placed anywhere on the staff, with the hooks always positioned on the spaces. The hook[Pg 3] of the eighth rest is typically found on the third space. Rests can sometimes have dots, but they are never tied.

6. The G clef should be begun at the second line rather than below the staff. Experiments have shown clearly that beginners learn to make it most easily in this way, and the process may be further simplified by dividing it into two parts, thus, G clef. The descending stroke crosses the ascending curve at or near the fourth line. The circular part of the curve occupies approximately the first and second spaces.

6. The G clef should start on the second line instead of below the staff. Studies have shown that beginners find it easier to learn this way, and you can simplify the process even more by breaking it down into two parts, like this: G clef. The downward stroke crosses the upward curve at or near the fourth line. The circular part of the curve takes up roughly the first and second spaces.

7. The F clef is made either thus, bass clef, or thus, old bass clef the dots being placed one on either side of the fourth line of the staff, which is the particular point that the clef marks. The C clef has also two forms, C clef and C clef.

7. The F clef can be written like this, bass clef, or like this, old bass clef with the dots on either side of the fourth line of the staff, which is the specific point that the clef indicates. The C clef has two versions as well, C clef and C clef.

8. The sharp is made with two light vertical strokes, and two heavy slanting ones, the slant of the latter being upward from left to right, . The sharp should never be made thus, #.

8. The sharp is created with two light vertical lines and two heavy slanted lines, with the slant of the latter going upward from left to right, . The sharp should never be represented like this, #.

The double sharp is made either thus double-sharp or *, the first form being at present the more common.

The double sharp is created either like this double-sharp or *, with the first version being more widely used nowadays.

9. The flat is best made by a down stroke retraced part way up, the curve being made without lifting pen from paper. The double flat consists of two flats,[3] ♭♭. The natural or cancel is made in two strokes, down-right and right-down, thus natural .

9. The flat is created by a down stroke that is retraced partway up, making the curve without lifting the pen from the paper. The double flat consists of two flats,[3] ♭♭. The natural or cancel is made in two strokes, down-right and right-down, as shown in this image: natural .

10. The tie usually connects the heads of notes, thus tie.

10. The tie typically links the heads of notes, thus tie.

11. The dot after a note always appears on a space, whether the note-head is on a line or space. (See Fig. 5.) In the case of a dot after a note on a line, the dot usually appears on the space above that line if the next note is higher in position and on the space below it if the following note is lower.[Pg 4]

11. The dot after a note always goes on a space, no matter if the note-head is on a line or a space. (See Fig. 5.) If there's a dot after a note on a line, it typically sits on the space above that line if the next note is higher up, and on the space below it if the next note is lower.[Pg 4]

 

Fig. 5

Fig. 5

 

Note.—Correct notation must be made a habit rather than a theory, and in order to form the habit of writing correctly, drill is necessary. This may perhaps be best secured by asking students to write (at the board or on ruled paper) from verbal dictation, thus: Teacher says,

Note.—Using the correct notation should become a habit instead of just a theory, and to develop the habit of writing correctly, practice is essential. This might be best achieved by having students write (either on the board or on lined paper) from verbal dictation, like this: Teacher says,

"Key of B, three-quarter measure: First measure, DO a quarter note, RE a quarter, and MI a quarter. Second measure, SOL a quarter, LA a quarter, and SOL a quarter. Third measure, LA, TI, DO, RE, MI, eighths, stroked in pairs. Fourth measure, high DO a dotted half." Pupils respond by writing the exercise dictated, after which mistakes in the turning of stems, etc., are corrected. The pitch names may be dictated instead of the syllables if desired, and still further practice may be provided by asking that the exercise be transposed to other keys.

"Key of B, three-quarter measure: First measure, C a quarter note, D a quarter, and E a quarter. Second measure, G a quarter, A a quarter, and G a quarter. Third measure, A, B, C, D, E, eighths, played in pairs. Fourth measure, high C a dotted half." Students respond by writing the exercise dictated, after which mistakes in the direction of stems, etc., are corrected. The pitch names can be dictated instead of the syllables if preferred, and additional practice may be given by asking the exercise to be transposed to different keys.


CHAPTER II

Music Symbols Explained

12. A staff is a collection of parallel lines, together with the spaces belonging to them. The modern staff has five lines and six spaces, these being ordinarily referred to as first line, second line, third line, fourth line, and fifth line (beginning with the lowest); and space below (i.e., space below the first line), first space, second space, third space, fourth space, and space above.

12. A staff is a set of parallel lines, along with the spaces between them. The modern staff has five lines and six spaces, which are usually called the first line, second line, third line, fourth line, and fifth line (starting from the bottom); and space below (i.e., the space below the first line), first space, second space, third space, fourth space, and space above.

The definition and discussion above refer more specifically to one of the portions of the "great staff," the latter term being often applied to the combination of treble and bass staffs (with one leger line between) so commonly used in piano music, etc.

The definition and discussion above refer more specifically to one of the parts of the "great staff," which is often used to describe the combined treble and bass staffs (with one ledger line in between) that are commonly used in piano music, etc.

13. The extent of the staff may be increased either above or below by the addition of short lines called leger lines,[4] and notes may be written on either these lines or on the spaces above and below them.

13. The extent of the staff can be expanded either up or down by adding short lines called leger lines,[4] and notes can be placed on these lines or in the spaces above and below them.

14. The lines and spaces constituting the staff (including leger lines if any) are often referred to as staff degrees, i.e., each separate line and space is considered to be "a degree of the staff." The tones of a scale are also sometimes referred to as "degrees of the scale."

14. The lines and spaces that make up the staff (including any leger lines) are often called staff degrees. In other words, each individual line and space is seen as "a degree of the staff." The notes in a scale are also sometimes referred to as "degrees of the scale."

15. A clef[5] is a sign placed on the staff to designate what pitches are to be represented by its lines and spaces. Thus, e.g., the G clef shows us not only that the second line of the staff represents G, but that the first line represents E, the first space F, etc. The F clef similarly shows us that the fifth line[Pg 6] of the bass staff represents the first A below middle C, the fourth line the first F below middle C, etc.

15. A clef[5] is a symbol placed on the staff to indicate which pitches correspond to its lines and spaces. For example, the G clef tells us that the second line of the staff represents G, while the first line represents E, the first space represents F, and so on. The F clef shows us that the fifth line[Pg 6] of the bass staff represents the first A below middle C, the fourth line represents the first F below middle C, and so forth.

The student should note that these clefs are merely modified forms of the letters G and F, which (among others) were used to designate the pitches represented by certain lines when staff notation was first inaugurated. For a fuller discussion of this matter see Appendix A, p. 101.

The student should be aware that these clefs are just altered versions of the letters G and F, which (along with others) were originally used to indicate the pitches represented by specific lines when staff notation was first introduced. For a more detailed discussion on this topic, see Appendix A, p. 101.

16. When the G clef is used the staff is usually referred to as the treble staff, and when the F clef is used, as the bass staff. Such expressions as "singing from the treble clef," or "singing in the treble clef," and "singing in the bass clef" are still frequently heard, but are preferably replaced by "singing from the treble staff," and "singing from the bass staff." Fig. 6 shows the permanent names of lines and spaces when the G and F clefs are used.[6]

16. When the G clef is used, the staff is typically called the treble staff, and when the F clef is used, it's called the bass staff. Phrases like "singing from the treble clef" or "singing in the treble clef," and "singing in the bass clef" are still commonly used, but it's better to say "singing from the treble staff" and "singing from the bass staff." Fig. 6 shows the permanent names of lines and spaces when the G and F clefs are used.[6]

 

Fig. 6

Fig. 6

 

17. The movable C clef C clef or C clef, formerly in very common use, is now utilized for only two purposes, viz., (1) in music written for certain orchestral instruments (cello, viola, etc.) of extended range, in order to avoid having to use too many leger lines; and (2) for indicating the tenor part in vocal music. This latter usage seems also to be disappearing however, and the tenor part is commonly written on the treble staff, it being understood that the tones are to be sung an octave lower than the notes would indicate.[Pg 7]

17. The movable C clef C clef or C clef, which used to be very common, is now only used for two reasons: (1) in music written for certain orchestral instruments (like cello and viola) that have a wide range, to avoid using too many leger lines; and (2) to show the tenor part in vocal music. However, this second use seems to be fading as well, and the tenor part is usually written on the treble staff, with the understanding that the notes are sung an octave lower than written.[Pg 7]

The C clef as used in its various positions is shown in Figs. 7, 8, and 9. It will be noted that in each case the line on which the clef is placed represents "middle C."

The C clef, in its different positions, is illustrated in Figs. 7, 8, and 9. You'll see that in each instance, the line where the clef is placed indicates "middle C."

 

Figs. 7-9

Figs. 7-9

 

18. A sharp is a character which causes the degree of the staff with which it is associated to represent a pitch one half-step higher than it otherwise would.

18. A sharp is a symbol that makes the note on the staff it’s connected to sound one half-step higher than it normally would.

Thus in Fig. 10 (a) the fifth line and first space represent the pitch F, but in Fig. 10 (b) these same staff degrees represent an entirely different tone—F. The student should note that the sharp does not then raise anything; it merely causes a staff degree to represent a higher tone than it otherwise would. There is just as much difference between F and F as between B and C, and yet one would never think of referring to C as "B raised"!

So in Fig. 10 (a), the fifth line and first space represent the note F, but in Fig. 10 (b), those same positions on the staff stand for a completely different note—F. It's important for the student to realize that the sharp doesn't actually raise anything; it simply means that a note on the staff corresponds to a higher sound than it usually would. The difference between F and F is just as significant as the difference between B and C, and yet no one would ever think to call C "B raised"!

 

Fig. 10

Fig. 10

 

19. A flat is a character that causes the degree of the staff with which it is associated to represent a tone one half-step lower than it otherwise would. (See note under Sec. 18 and apply the same discussion here.)

19. A flat is a musical symbol that makes the note it’s linked to sound one half-step lower than it normally would. (See note under Sec. 18 and apply the same discussion here.)

20. A double-sharp causes the staff degree on which it is placed to represent a pitch one whole-step higher than it would without any sharp. Similarly, a double-flat causes the staff degree on which it is placed to represent a pitch one whole-step lower than it would without any flat.

20. A double-sharp makes the note it’s placed on sound one whole step higher than it would without any sharp. Likewise, a double-flat makes the note it’s placed on sound one whole step lower than it would without any flat.

Double-sharps and double-flats are generally used on staff degrees that have already been sharped or flatted, therefore their practical effect is to cause staff degrees to represent pitches respectively a half-step higher and a half-step lower than would be represented by those same degrees in their diatonic condition. Thus in Fig. 10 (b) the first space in its diatonic condition[7] represents F-sharp, and the double-sharp on this degree would cause it to represent a pitch one-half step higher than F-sharp, i.e., F-double-sharp.

Double-sharps and double-flats are usually used on notes that are already sharp or flat, so they effectively make those notes sound a half-step higher or a half-step lower than they would in their natural form. For example, in Fig. 10 (b), the first space in its natural state[7] represents F-sharp, and adding a double-sharp to this note means it would sound a pitch one half-step higher, which is F-double-sharp.


CHAPTER III

Music Symbols Explained (Continued)

21. The natural[8] (sometimes called cancel) annuls the effect of previous sharps, flats, double-sharps, and double-flats, within the measure in which it occurs. After a double-sharp or double-flat the combination of a natural with a sharp, or a natural with a flat is often found: in this case only one sharp or flat is annulled. (Sometimes also the single sharp or flat will be found by itself, cancelling the double-sharp or double-flat). The natural is often used when a composition changes key, as in Fig. 11, where a change from E to G is shown.

21. The natural[8] (sometimes referred to as cancel) cancels out any previous sharps, flats, double-sharps, and double-flats within the measure where it appears. After a double-sharp or double-flat, you often see a natural along with a sharp or a natural with a flat; in this case, only one sharp or flat is canceled. (Sometimes, the single sharp or flat can also appear by itself, negating the double-sharp or double-flat). The natural is commonly used when a piece changes key, as shown in Fig. 11, where it transitions from E to G.

 

Fig. 11

Fig. 11

 

22. The group of sharps or flats (or absence of them) at the beginning of a staff partially indicates the key in which the composition is written. They are called collectively the key-signature.

22. The collection of sharps or flats (or the lack of them) at the start of a staff helps to indicate the key of the piece. This is collectively referred to as the key-signature.

23. The same key-signature may stand for either one of two keys, the major key, or its relative minor, hence in order to determine in what key a melody is one must note whether the tones are grouped about the major tonic DO or the minor tonic LA. In a harmonized composition it is almost always possible to determine the key by referring to the last bass note; if the final chord is clearly the DO chord the composition is in the major key, but if this final chord is clearly the LA chord then it is almost certain that the entire composition is in the[Pg 9] minor key. Thus if a final chord appears as that in Fig. 12 the composition is clearly in G major, while if it appears as in Fig. 13, it is just as surely in E minor.

23. The same key signature can represent either one of two keys: the major key or its relative minor. To figure out the key of a melody, you need to see if the notes center around the major tonic DO or the minor tonic LA. In a harmonized piece, you can usually identify the key by looking at the last bass note. If the final chord is clearly the DO chord, the piece is in the major key. If the final chord is the LA chord, it’s almost certain that the whole composition is in the[Pg 9] minor key. So, if the final chord looks like the one in Fig. 12, the piece is definitely in G major. But, if it looks like the one in Fig. 13, then it’s definitely in E minor.

 

Figs. 12-13

Figs. 12-13

 

24. Sharps, flats, naturals, double-sharps and double-flats, occurring in the course of the composition (i.e., after the key signature) are called accidentals, whether they actually cause a staff degree to represent a different pitch as in Fig. 14 or simply make clear a notation about which there might otherwise be some doubt as in Fig. 15, measure two. The effect of such accidentals terminates at the bar.

24. Sharps, flats, naturals, double-sharps, and double-flats that appear during the piece (i.e., after the key signature) are called accidentals. These can either change a note to a different pitch, as shown in Fig. 14, or clarify a notation that might otherwise be confusing, as in Fig. 15, measure two. The effect of these accidentals ends at the bar.

 

Figs. 14-15

Figs. 14-15

 

25. In the case of a tie across a bar an accidental remains in force until the combined value of the tied notes expires. In Fig. 16 first measure, third beat, an accidental sharp makes the third space represent the pitch C sharp. By virtue of the tie across the bar the third space continues to represent C sharp thru the first beat of the second measure, but for the remainder of the measure the third space will represent C unless the sharp is repeated as in Fig. 17.

25. In the case of a tie across a bar, an accidental stays in effect until the combined value of the tied notes ends. In Fig. 16, first measure, third beat, an accidental sharp makes the third space represent the pitch C sharp. Because of the tie across the bar, the third space continues to represent C sharp through the first beat of the second measure, but for the rest of the measure, the third space will represent C unless the sharp is repeated, as shown in Fig. 17.

 

Figs. 16-17

Figs. 16-17

 

26. The following rules for making staff degrees represent pitches different from those of the diatonic scale will be found useful by the beginner in the study of music notation. These[Pg 10] rules are quoted from "The Worcester Musical Manual," by Charles I. Rice.

26. The following rules for creating staff degrees indicate pitches that differ from those in the diatonic scale and will be helpful for beginners studying music notation. These[Pg 10] rules are taken from "The Worcester Musical Manual" by Charles I. Rice.

1. To sharp a natural degree, use a sharp. Fig. 18.
2. To sharp a sharped degree, use a double sharp. Fig. 19.
3. To sharp a flatted degree, use a natural. Fig. 20.
4. To flat a natural degree, use a flat. Fig. 21.
5. To flat a flatted degree, use a double flat. Fig. 22.
6. To flat a sharped degree, use a natural. Fig. 23.

1. To raise a natural note, use a sharp. Fig. 18.
2. To raise a sharp note, use a double sharp. Fig. 19.
3. To restore a flatted note, use a natural. Fig. 20.
4. To lower a natural note, use a flat. Fig. 21.
5. To lower a flatted note, use a double flat. Fig. 22.
6. To restore a sharp note, use a natural. Fig. 23.

 

Figs. 18-23

Figs. 18-23

 

27. When two different notations represent the same pitch, the word enharmonic is applied. Thus we may say that F sharp and G flat (on keyboard instruments at least) are enharmonically the same.

27. When two different notations represent the same pitch, the term enharmonic is used. So we can say that F sharp and G flat (at least on keyboard instruments) are enharmonically the same.

This word enharmonic is used in such expressions as enharmonic change, enharmonic keys, enharmonic interval, enharmonic modulation, enharmonic relation, etc., and in all such combinations it has the same meaning, viz.—a change in notation but no change in the pitch represented.

This word enharmonic is used in phrases like enharmonic change, enharmonic keys, enharmonic interval, enharmonic modulation, enharmonic relation, etc., and in all these combinations, it means the same thing: a change in notation without a change in the pitch represented.

28. A note is a character expressing relative duration, which when placed on a staff indicates that a certain tone is to be sounded for a certain relative length of time. The pitch of the tone to be sounded is shown by the position of the note on the staff, while the length of time it is to be prolonged is shown by the shape of the note. Thus e.g., a half-note on the second line of the treble staff indicates that a specific pitch (g') is to be played or sung for a period of time twice as long as would be indicated by a quarter-note in the same composition.

28. A note is a symbol that represents how long a sound lasts. When it’s placed on a staff, it shows that a specific tone should be played or sung for a certain amount of time. The tone's pitch is determined by where the note is located on the staff, while the duration it should be held is indicated by the note’s shape. For example, a half-note on the second line of the treble staff means that a specific pitch (g') should be played or sung for twice as long as a quarter-note in the same piece.

29. A rest is a character which indicates a rhythmic silence of a certain relative length.[Pg 11]

29. A rest is a symbol that shows a rhythmic pause of a specific length.[Pg 11]

30. The notes and rests in common use are as follows:

30. The notes and rests that are commonly used are as follows:

whole note Whole-note. An open note-head without stem.
half note Half-note. An open note-head with stem.
quarter note Quarter-note. A closed note-head with stem.
eighth note Eighth-note. A closed note-head with stem and one hook.
sixteenth note Sixteenth-note. A closed note-head with stem and two hooks.
32nd note Thirty-second-note. A closed note-head with stem and three hooks.
whole rest Whole-rest.
half rest Half-rest.
quarter rest Quarter-rest.
eighth rest Eighth-rest.
sixteenth rest Sixteenth-rest.
32nd rest Thirty-second-rest.

31. The English names for these notes are:

31. The English names for these notes are:

Whole-note—semi-breve.
Half-note—minim.
Quarter-note—crotchet.
Eighth-note—quaver.
Sixteenth-note—semi-quaver.
Thirty-second-note—demi-semi-quaver.

Whole note—semibreve.
Half note—minim.
Quarter note—crotchet.
Eighth note—quaver.
Sixteenth note—semi-quaver.
Thirty-second note—demi-semi-quaver.

The corresponding rests are referred to by the same system of nomenclature: e.g., semi-breve rest, etc.

The corresponding rests are referred to by the same naming system: e.g., whole note rest, etc.

32. Sixty-fourth and one-hundred-and-twenty-eighth-notes are occasionally found, but are not in common use. The double-whole-note (breve), made breve or breve, is still used, especially in English music, which frequently employs the half-note as the beat-unit. Thus in four-half measure the breve would be necessary to indicate a tone having four beats.

32. Sixty-fourth and one-hundred-and-twenty-eighth notes are occasionally found, but they aren't commonly used. The double-whole note (breve), represented as breve or breve, is still in use, particularly in English music, which often uses the half-note as the main unit of time. Therefore, in four-half measure, the breve is needed to indicate a note that lasts four beats.

33. The whole-rest has a peculiarity of usage not common to any of the other duration symbols, viz., that it is often employed as a measure-rest, filling an entire measure of beats, no matter what the measure-signature may be. Thus, not only in four-quarter-measure, but in two-quarter, three-quarter, six-eighth, and other varieties, the whole-rest fills the[Pg 12] entire measure, having a value sometimes greater, sometimes less than the corresponding whole-note. Because of this peculiarity of usage the whole-rest is termed Takt-pausa (measure-rest) by the Germans.

33. The whole-rest has a unique usage that's not found in any of the other duration symbols: it's often used as a measure-rest, filling an entire measure of beats, regardless of what the measure signature is. So, it can fill the entire measure in four-quarter, two-quarter, three-quarter, six-eighth, and other types of measures, sometimes having a value that’s greater and sometimes less than the corresponding whole note. Because of this unique usage, the whole-rest is called Takt-pausa (measure-rest) by the Germans.

34. A bar is a vertical line across the staff, dividing it into measures. The word bar is often used synonymously with measure by orchestral conductors and others; thus, "begin at the fourteenth bar after J." This use of the word, although popular, is incorrect.

34. A bar is a vertical line on the staff that separates it into measures. The term bar is often used interchangeably with measure by orchestral conductors and others; for example, "start at the fourteenth bar after J." This usage, while common, is not accurate.

35. A double-bar consists of two vertical lines across the staff, at least one of the two being a heavy line. The double bar marks the end of a division, movement, or entire composition.

35. A double-bar consists of two vertical lines across the staff, with at least one of them being a heavy line. The double bar indicates the end of a section, movement, or entire composition.


CHAPTER IV

Abbreviations, Symbols, Etc.

36. A double bar (or single heavy bar) with either two or four dots indicates that a section is to be repeated. If the repeat marks occur at only one point the entire preceding part is to be repeated, but if the marks occur twice (the first time at the right of the bar but the second time at the left), only the section thus enclosed by the marks is to be repeated.

36. A double bar (or single heavy bar) with either two or four dots indicates that a section should be repeated. If the repeat marks are placed at just one point, the whole preceding part should be repeated. However, if the marks appear twice (the first time on the right of the bar and the second time on the left), only the section between the marks should be repeated.

 

double bar

double bar

 

37. Sometimes a different cadence (or ending) is to be used for the repetition, and this is indicated as in Fig. 24.

37. Sometimes a different rhythm (or ending) should be used for the repetition, as shown in Fig. 24.

 

Fig. 24

Fig. 24

 

38. The Italian word bis is occasionally used to indicate that a certain passage or section is to be repeated. This use is becoming obsolete.

38. The Italian word bis is sometimes used to signal that a specific passage or section should be repeated. This usage is becoming outdated.

39. The words da capo (D.C.) mean literally "from the head," i.e., repeat from the beginning. The words dal segno (D.S.) indicate a repetition from the sign (segno or segno) instead of from the beginning.

39. The terms da capo (D.C.) literally mean "from the beginning," or in other words, to repeat from the start. The term dal segno (D.S.) indicates that you should repeat from the sign (segno or segno) rather than from the beginning.

In the case of both D.C. and D.S. the word fine (meaning literally the end) is ordinarily used to designate the point at which the repeated section is to terminate. The fermata (fermata) was formerly in common use for this same purpose, but is seldom so employed at present.[Pg 14]

In both D.C. and D.S., the word fine (which literally means the end) is usually used to indicate where the repeated section should stop. The fermata (fermata) used to be commonly used for this same purpose, but it’s rarely used that way anymore.[Pg 14]

D.C. (sin[9]) al fine means—repeat from the beginning to the word "fine."

D.C. (sin[9]) al fine means—start over from the beginning to the word "fine."

D.C. al fermata means—repeat to the fermata (or hold).

D.C. al fermata means—go back to the fermata (or hold).

D.C. senza repetizione, or D.C. ma senza repetizione, both mean—repeat from the beginning, but without observing other repeat marks during the repetition.

D.C. without repetition, or D.C. but without repetizione, both mean—start over from the beginning, but ignore other repeat signs during the repetition.

D.C. e poi la coda means—repeat the first section only to the mark coda, then skip to the coda. (See p. 74, Sec. 157, for discussion of coda).

D.C. e poi la coda means—repeat the first section only up to the mark coda, then move on to the coda. (See p. 74, Sec. 157, for a discussion of coda).

40. In certain cases where the repetition of characteristic figures can be indicated without causing confusion, it is the practice of composers (especially in orchestral music) to make use of certain signs of repetition. Some of the commonest of these abbreviations are shown in the following examples.

40. In some situations where repeating specific patterns can be shown without causing confusion, composers (especially in orchestral music) often use certain signs of repetition. Some of the most common of these shortcuts are illustrated in the examples below.

 

Figs. 25-27

Figs. 25-27

 

In Fig. 28 the repetition of an entire measure is called for.

In Fig. 28, the repetition of a whole measure is indicated.

 

Fig. 28

Fig. 28

 

41. The word simile (sometimes segue) indicates that a certain effect previously begun is to be continued, as e.g., staccato playing, pedalling, style of bowing in violin music, etc. The word segue is also occasionally used to show that an accompaniment figure (especially in orchestral music) is to be continued.

41. The word like (sometimes segue) indicates that a certain effect that started earlier is to be continued, like e.g., staccato playing, pedaling, style of bowing in violin music, etc. The word segue is also sometimes used to show that an accompaniment figure (especially in orchestral music) should be continued.

42. When some part is to rest for two or more measures several methods of notation are possible. A rest of two measures is usually indicated thus 2-measure rest. Three measures thus 3-measure rest. Four measures thus 4-measure rest. Rests of more than[Pg 15] four measures are usually indicated in one of the following ways: multi-measure rest. Sometimes the number of measures is written directly on the staff, thus; multi-measure rest.

42. When a part needs to rest for two or more measures, there are several ways to notate it. A rest of two measures is usually shown like this: 2-measure rest. For three measures, it looks like this: 3-measure rest. For four measures, it appears like this: 4-measure rest. Rests longer than[Pg 15] four measures are typically indicated in one of the following ways: multi-measure rest. Sometimes, the number of measures is written directly on the staff, like this: multi-measure rest.

43. The letters G.P. (general pause, or grosse pause), the words lunga pausa, or simply the word lunga, are sometimes written over a rest to show that there is to be a prolonged pause or rest in all parts. Such expressions are found only in ensemble music, i.e., music in which several performers are engaged at the same time.

43. The letters G.P. (general pause, or grosse pause), the phrase lunga pausa, or just the word lunga, are sometimes placed above a rest to indicate a longer pause or break for everyone. These terms are only used in ensemble music, i.e., music where multiple performers play together.

44. The fermata or hold fermata over a note or chord indicates that the tone is to be prolonged, the duration of the prolongation depending upon the character of the music and the taste of the performer or conductor. It has already been noted that the hold over a bar was formerly used to designate the end of the composition, as the word fine is employed at present, but this usage has practically disappeared and the hold over the bar now usually indicates a short rest between two sections of a composition.

44. The fermata or hold fermata over a note or chord indicates that the note should be held longer, with the length of the hold depending on the style of the music and the judgment of the performer or conductor. It has been mentioned that the hold over a bar was previously used to mark the end of a piece, similar to how the word fine is used now, but this practice has mostly faded away, and the hold over a bar now usually represents a brief pause between two sections of a piece.

45. The sign 8va...... (an abbreviation of all'ottava, literally at the octave) above the staff, indicates that all tones are to be sounded an octave higher than the notes would indicate. When found below the staff the same sign serves to indicate that the tones are to be sounded an octave lower. The term 8va bassa has also this latter signification.

45. The sign 8va...... (short for all'ottava, which means at the octave) above the staff means that all notes should be played one octave higher than written. When placed below the staff, the same sign means that the notes should be played one octave lower. The term 8va bassa also has this same meaning.

46. Sometimes the word loco (in place) is used to show that the part is no longer to be sounded an octave higher (or lower), but this is more often indicated by the termination of the dotted (or wavy) line.

46. Sometimes the term loco (in place) is used to indicate that the part will no longer be played an octave higher (or lower), but this is more commonly shown by the end of the dotted (or wavy) line.

47. The sign Col 8 (coll'ottava—with the octave) shows that the tones an octave higher or lower are to be sounded with the tones indicated by the printed notes.

47. The sign Col 8 (coll'ottava—with the octave) indicates that the notes an octave higher or lower should be played together with the notes shown in the printed score.

48. For the sake of definiteness in referring to pitches, a particular name is applied to each octave, and all pitches in[Pg 16] the octave are referred to by means of a uniform nomenclature. The following figure will make this system clear:

48. To be clear when talking about pitches, a specific name is given to each octave, and all pitches in[Pg 16] the octave are referred to using a consistent naming system. The figure below will clarify this system:

 

Fig. 29

Fig. 29

 

Thus e.g., "great G" (written simply G), is the G represented by the first line of the bass staff. Small A (written a), is represented by the fifth line of the bass staff. Two-lined G, (written 2-lined G), is represented by the space above the fifth line, treble staff. Three-lined C, (written 3-lined C), is represented by the second added line above the treble staff, etc. The one-lined octave may be described as the octave from middle C to the B represented by the third line of the treble staff, and any tone within that octave is referred to as "one-lined." Thus—one-lined D, one-lined G, etc.

Thus e.g., "great G" (simply written as G), is the G found on the first line of the bass staff. Small A (written as a) is on the fifth line of the bass staff. Two-lined G (shown as 2-lined G) is on the space above the fifth line of the treble staff. Three-lined C (shown as 3-lined C) is on the second added line above the treble staff, and so on. The one-lined octave refers to the octave from middle C to the B on the third line of the treble staff, and any note within that octave is called "one-lined." So—one-lined D, one-lined G, etc.

In scientific works on acoustics, etc., the pitches in the sub octave (or sub-contra octave as it is often called) are referred to as C2, D2, E2, etc.; those in the contra octave as C1, D1, etc.; in the great octave, as c1, d1, etc.; in the small octave as c2, d2, etc.

In scientific studies on acoustics, the pitches in the sub-octave (often called sub-contra octave) are labeled as C2, D2, E2, and so on; those in the contra octave are labeled as C1, D1, etc.; in the great octave, they are c1, d1, etc.; and in the small octave, they are c2, d2, etc.


CHAPTER V

Abbreviations, Symbols, Etc., (Continued)

49. A dot after a note shows that the value of the note is to be half again as great as it would be without the dot, i.e., the value is to be three-halves that of the original note.

49. A dot after a note indicates that the value of the note is to be one and a half times greater than it would be without the dot, i.e., the value is to be three halves of the original note.

 

dotted notes

dotted notes

 

50. When two dots follow the note the second dot adds half as much as the first dot has added, i.e., the entire value is seven-fourths that of the original note.

50. When two dots follow the note, the second dot adds half of what the first dot added, i.e., the total value is seven-fourths of the original note.

 

double dotted notes

double dotted notes

 

51. When three dots follow the note the third dot adds one-half the value added by the second, i.e., the entire value of the triple-dotted note is fifteen-eighths that of the original note.

51. When three dots follow the note, the third dot adds half the value of the second dot, i.e., the total value of the triple-dotted note is fifteen-eighths of the original note.

 

triple dotted notes

triple dotted notes

 

52. A dot over or under a note is called the staccato mark and indicates that the tone is to be sounded and then instantly released. staccato In music for organ and for some other instruments the staccato note is sometimes interpreted differently, this depending on the character of the instrument.

52. A dot above or below a note is called the staccato mark and indicates that the note should be played briefly and then immediately released. staccato In music for the organ and some other instruments, the staccato note may be interpreted differently, depending on the characteristics of the instrument.

On stringed instruments of the violin family the staccato effect is usually secured by a long, rapid stroke of the bow for each tone; in the case of harp and drum the hand is quickly brought in contact with the vibrating body, thus stopping the tone instantly. On the organ the tone is often prolonged to one-half the value of the printed note before the keys are released.

On string instruments like the violin family, the staccato effect is typically achieved by making a long, quick stroke of the bow for each note. For the harp and drum, the hand quickly contacts the vibrating surface, stopping the sound immediately. On the organ, the sound is often sustained for half the duration of the written note before the keys are let go.

53. The wedge-shaped dash over the note (staccatissimo) was formerly employed to indicate a tone still more detached[Pg 18] than that indicated by the dot, but this sign is really superfluous, and is seldom used at present. staccatissimo

53. The wedge-shaped dash over the note (staccatissimo) used to be used to show a tone that's even more detached[Pg 18] than the dot indicates, but this symbol is actually unnecessary and isn't often used nowadays. staccatissimo

54. A tie is a curved line connecting the heads of two notes that call for the same tone. It indicates that they are to be sounded as one tone having a duration equal to the combined value of both notes. E.g., a half-note tied to a quarter-note would indicate a tone equal in duration-length to that shown by a dotted half-note; two half-notes tied would indicate a tone equal in duration to that shown by a whole-note. (See examples under Sections 49, 50, and 51).

54. A tie is a curved line that connects the heads of two notes that are meant to be played at the same pitch. It shows that they should be played as a single sound with a duration equal to the total value of both notes. For example, a half-note tied to a quarter-note would produce a sound lasting as long as a dotted half-note; two half-notes tied together would create a sound equal in duration to a whole-note. (See examples under Sections 49, 50, and 51).

Fig. 30 illustrates the more common variety of tie, while Fig. 31 shows an example of the enharmonic[10] tie.

Fig. 30 illustrates the more common type of tie, while Fig. 31 shows an example of the enharmonic[10] tie.

 

Figs. 30-31

Figs. 30-31

 

55. The slur is used in so many different ways that it is impossible to give a general definition. It consists of a curved line, sometimes very short (in which case it looks like the tie), but sometimes very long, connecting ten, fifteen, or more notes. Some of the more common uses of the slur are:

55. The slur is used in so many different ways that it's impossible to provide a general definition. It's a curved line that can be very short (in which case it resembles a tie) or very long, connecting ten, fifteen, or more notes. Some of the more common uses of the slur are:

A. To indicate legato (sustained or connected) tones, as contrasted with staccato (detached) ones.

A. To indicate legato (smooth or connected) tones, as contrasted with staccato (short and detached) ones.

In violin music this implies playing all tones thus slurred in one bow; in music for the voice and for wind instruments it implies singing or playing them in one breath.

In violin music, this means playing all the notes smoothly with one bow stroke; in vocal music and for wind instruments, it means singing or playing them in one breath.

B. As a phrase-mark, in the interpretation of which the first tone of the phrase is often accented slightly, and the last one shortened in value.

B. As a phrase-mark, which is often interpreted with the first tone of the phrase slightly accented and the last one shortened in duration.

This interpretation of the phrase is especially common when the phrase is short (as in the two-note phrase), and when the tones constituting the phrase are of short duration, e.g., the phrase given in Fig. 32 would be played approximately as written in Fig. 33.

This interpretation of the phrase is especially common when the phrase is short (as in the two-note phrase) and when the notes that make up the phrase are short in length, e.g., the phrase shown in Fig. 32 would be played roughly as written in Fig. 33.

 

Figs. 32-33

Figs. 32-33

 

But if the notes are of greater value, especially in slow tempi, the slur merely indicates legato, i.e., sustained or connected rendition. Fig. 34 illustrates such a case.

But if the notes are more valuable, especially in slow tempos, the slur just shows legato, i.e., a sustained or connected performance. Fig. 34 illustrates such a case.

 

Fig. 34

Fig. 34

 

This is a matter of such diverse usage that it is difficult to generalize regarding it. The tendency seems at present to be in the direction of using the slur (in instrumental music) as a phrase-mark exclusively, it being understood that unless there is some direction to the contrary, the tones are to be performed in a connected manner.

This is such a varied topic that it's hard to make sweeping statements about it. Right now, it looks like the trend is to use the slur (in instrumental music) solely as a phrase mark, with the understanding that unless stated otherwise, the notes should be played smoothly.

C. In vocal music, to show that two or more tones are to be sung to one syllable of text. See Fig. 35.

C. In vocal music, to indicate that two or more notes are to be sung to a single syllable of text. See Fig. 35.

 

Fig. 35

Fig. 35

 

In notes of small denomination (eighths and smaller) this same thing is often indicated by stroking the stems together as in Fig. 36. This can only be done in cases where the natural grouping of notes in the measure will not be destroyed.

In notes of small value (eighths and smaller), this is often shown by stroking the stems together as in Fig. 36. This can only be done when the natural grouping of notes in the measure remains intact.

 

Fig. 36

Fig. 36

 

D. To mark special note-groups (triplets, etc.), in which case the slur is accompanied by a figure indicating the number of notes in the group. See Fig. 37 (a)

D. To indicate special note groups (like triplets), a slur is paired with a number showing how many notes are in the group. See Fig. 37 (a)

The most common of these irregular note-groups is the triplet, which consists of three notes to be performed in the time ordinarily given to two of the same value. Sometimes the triplet consists of only two notes as in Fig. 37 (b). In such a case the first two of the three notes composing the triplet are considered to be tied.

The most common of these uneven note groups is the triplet, which is made up of three notes played in the time usually allotted for two notes of the same value. Sometimes the triplet consists of just two notes, as shown in Fig. 37 (b). In this instance, the first two of the three notes that make up the triplet are treated as being tied.

 

Fig. 37

Fig. 37

 

When the triplet form is perfectly obvious, the Fig. 3 (as well as the slur) may be omitted.

When the triplet form is clearly obvious, the Fig. 3 (as well as the slur) can be left out.

Other examples of irregular note-groups, together with the names commonly applied, follow.

Other examples of irregular note groups, along with the names usually given to them, follow.

 

irregular note groups

irregular note groups

 

56. The combination of slur or tie and dots over the notes indicates that the tones are to be somewhat detached, but not sharply so. slur and dots

56. The combination of slur or tie and dots over the notes shows that the notes should be played with a slight disconnect, but not too sharply. slur and dots

This effect is sometimes erroneously termed portamento (lit. carrying), but this term is more properly reserved for an entirely different effect, viz., when a singer, or player on a stringed instrument, passes from a high tone to a low one (or vice versa) touching lightly on some or all of the diatonic tones between the two melody tones.

This effect is sometimes mistakenly called portamento (meaning carrying), but that term is actually meant for a different effect, which is when a singer or a player on a stringed instrument moves smoothly from a high note to a low one (or the other way around), lightly touching on some or all of the diatonic notes between the two melodic notes.

57. The horizontal dash over a note dash over note indicates that the tone is to be slightly accented, and sustained. This mark is also sometimes used after a staccato passage to show that the tones are no longer to be performed in detached fashion, but are to be sustained. This latter use is especially common in music for stringed instruments.

57. The horizontal dash over a note dash over note indicates that the tone should be slightly emphasized and held. This mark is also sometimes used after a staccato section to show that the tones should no longer be played separately, but should be held. This latter use is especially common in music for stringed instruments.

58. The combination of dash and dot over a note dash and dot over note indicates that the tone is to be slightly accented and separated from its neighboring tones.

58. The combination of dash and dot over a note dash and dot over note shows that the tone should be a bit accented and distinct from the surrounding tones.

59. Accent marks are made in a variety of fashions. The most common forms follow. accents sf fz. All indicate that a certain tone or chord is to be differentiated from its neighboring tones or chords by receiving a certain relative amount of stress.

59. Accent marks are created in different ways. The most common types are shown below. accents sf fz. All of these indicate that a specific tone or chord should stand out from the surrounding tones or chords by getting a certain level of emphasis.

60. In music for keyboard instruments it is sometimes necessary to indicate that a certain part is to be played by a certain hand. The abbreviations r.h. (right hand), m.d. (mano destra, It.), and m.d. (main droite, Fr.), designate that a passage or tone is to be played with the right hand, while l.h. (left hand), m.s. (mano sinistra, It.), and m.g. (main gauche, Fr.), show that the left hand is to be employed.[Pg 21]

60. In keyboard music, it’s sometimes necessary to indicate which hand should play a specific part. The abbreviations r.h. (right hand), m.d. (mano destra, Italian), and m.d. (main droite, French), mean that a passage or note should be played with the right hand, while l.h. (left hand), m.s. (mano sinistra, Italian), and m.g. (main gauche, French), indicate that the left hand should be used.[Pg 21]

61. The wavy line placed vertically beside a chord arpeggio indicates that the tones are to be sounded consecutively instead of simultaneously, beginning with the lowest tone, all tones being sustained until the duration-value of the chord has expired. This is called arpeggio playing. When the wavy line extends through the entire chord (covering both staffs) as in Fig. 38, all the tones of the chord are to be played one after another, beginning with the lowest: but if there is a separate wavy line for each staff as at Fig. 39 then the lowest tone represented on the upper staff is to be played simultaneously with the lowest tone represented on the bass staff.

61. The wavy line placed vertically beside a chord arpeggio shows that the notes should be played one after another rather than at the same time, starting with the lowest note, and each note should be held until the chord's duration ends. This is called arpeggio playing. When the wavy line covers the entire chord (spanning both staffs), as shown in Fig. 38, all the notes of the chord should be played successively starting from the lowest. However, if there is a separate wavy line for each staff, as in Fig. 39, then the lowest note on the upper staff should be played simultaneously with the lowest note on the bass staff.

 

Figs. 38-39

Figs. 38-39

 

The word arpeggio (plural arpeggi) is a derivation of the Italian word arpa (meaning harp), and from this word arpa and its corresponding verb arpeggiare (to play on the harp) are derived also a number of other terms commonly used in instrumental music. Among these are—arpeggiamento, arpeggiando, arpeggiato, etc., all of these terms referring to a harp style of performance, the tones being sounded one after another in rapid succession instead of simultaneously as on the piano.

The word arpeggio (plural arpeggi) comes from the Italian word arpa (which means harp), and from this word arpa and its related verb arpeggiare (to play on the harp) come several other terms commonly used in instrumental music. These include—arpeggiamento, arpeggiando, arpeggiato, etc., all referring to a harp style of playing, where the notes are sounded one after another in quick succession instead of at the same time like on the piano.

62. The sign crescendo-decrescendo over a note indicates that the tone is to be begun softly, gradually increased in power, and as gradually decreased again, ending as softly as it began. In vocal music this effect is called messa di voce.

62. The sign crescendo-decrescendo over a note means that you should start playing softly, gradually get louder, and then gradually get softer again, finishing softly just like it started. In vocal music, this effect is called messa di voce.

63. In music for stringed instruments of the violin family, the sign downbow indicates down-bow and the sign upbow up-bow. In cello music the down-bow sign is sometimes written cello downbow.

63. In music for string instruments in the violin family, the sign downbow indicates down-bow and the sign upbow indicates up-bow. In cello music, the down-bow sign is sometimes written cello downbow.


CHAPTER VI

Decorations

64. Embellishments (or graces) (Fr. agréments) are ornamental tones, either represented in full in the score or indicated by certain signs. The following are the embellishments most commonly found: Trill (or shake), mordent, inverted mordent (or prall trill), turn (gruppetto), inverted turn, appoggiatura and acciaccatura.

64. Embellishments (or graces) (Fr. agréments) are decorative notes, either shown completely in the score or indicated by specific symbols. The following are the most common embellishments: trill (or shake), mordent, inverted mordent (or prall trill), turn (gruppetto), inverted turn, appoggiatura, and acciaccatura.

Usage varies greatly in the interpretation of the signs representing these embellishments and it is impossible to give examples of all the different forms. The following definitions represent therefore only the most commonly found examples and the most generally accepted interpretations.

Usage varies widely in how the signs representing these embellishments are interpreted, and it's impossible to provide examples of all the different forms. The following definitions represent only the most commonly found examples and the most generally accepted interpretations.

65. The trill (or shake) consists of the rapid alternation of two tones to the full value of the printed note. The lower of these two tones is represented by the printed note, while the upper one is the next higher tone in the diatonic scale of the key in which the composition is written. The interval between the two tones may therefore be either a half-step or a whole-step.

65. The trill (or shake) involves quickly alternating between two tones for the full duration of the printed note. The lower tone is shown by the printed note, while the upper tone is the next higher note in the diatonic scale of the key of the composition. The distance between the two tones can be either a half-step or a whole-step.

Whether the trill is to begin with the principal tone (represented by the printed note) or with the one above is a matter of some dispute among theorists and performers, but it may safely be said that the majority of modern writers on the subject would have it begin on the principal tone rather than on the tone above. Fig. 40.

Whether the trill should start on the main note (shown by the printed note) or the one above is a topic of debate among theorists and performers. However, it's generally accepted that most modern writers on the subject prefer it to start on the main note rather than the note above. Fig. 40.

When the principal note is preceded by a small note on the degree above, it is of course understood that the trill begins on the tone above. Fig. 41.

When the main note is preceded by a small note a step above, it’s understood that the trill starts on the note above. Fig. 41.

The trill is indicated by the sign trill.

The trill is shown by the sign trill.

 

Fig. 40

Fig. 40

 

Fig. 41

Fig. 41

 

The above examples would be termed perfect trills because they close with a turn. By inference, an imperfect trill is one closing without a turn.

The examples above would be called perfect trills because they finish with a turn. Therefore, an imperfect trill is one that ends without a turn.

66. The mordent mordent consists of three tones; first the one represented by the printed note; second the one next below it in the diatonic scale; third the one represented by the printed note again.

66. The mordent mordent is made up of three notes: the first is the note shown, the second is the note immediately below it in the diatonic scale, and the third is the note shown again.

 

Fig. 42

Fig. 42

 

67. The double (or long) mordent has five tones (sometimes seven) instead of three, the first two of the three tones of the regular mordent being repeated once or more. (See Fig. 43.)

67. The double (or long) mordent has five tones (sometimes seven) instead of three, with the first two tones of the regular mordent being repeated one or more times. (See Fig. 43.)

In the case of both mordent and double-mordent the tones are sounded as quickly as possible, the time taken by the embellishment being subtracted from the value of the principal note as printed.

In the case of both the mordent and double-mordent, the notes are played as quickly as possible, with the time spent on the embellishment deducted from the value of the main note as printed.

 

Fig. 43

Fig. 43

 

68. The inverted mordent inverted mordent (note the absence of the vertical line) is like the mordent except that the tone below is replaced by the tone above in each case. This ornament is sometimes called a "transient shake" because it is really only a part of the more elaborate grace called "trill." (See Fig. 44.)[Pg 24]

68. The inverted mordent inverted mordent (notice the lack of the vertical line) is similar to the mordent, but in this case, the note below is swapped out for the note above. This ornament is sometimes referred to as a "transient shake" because it is essentially just part of the more complex decoration known as a "trill." (See Fig. 44.)[Pg 24]

 

Fig. 44

Fig. 44

 

The confusion at present attending the interpretation of the last two embellishments described, might be largely obviated if the suggestion of a recent writer[11] to call the one the upward mordent, and the other the downward mordent were to be universally adopted.

The confusion surrounding the interpretation of the last two embellishments mentioned could be greatly reduced if we all agreed with a recent writer[11] who suggested calling one the upward mordent and the other the downward mordent.

69. The turn consists of four tones; first, the diatonic scale-tone above the principal tone; second, the principal tone itself; third, the tone below the principal tone; and fourth, the principal tone again.

69. The turn is made up of four notes: first, the scale tone one step above the main note; second, the main note itself; third, the note one step below the main note; and fourth, the main note again.

When the sign (turn or turn) occurs over a note of small value in rapid tempo (Fig. 45) the turn consists of four tones of equal value; but if it occurs over a note of greater value, or in a slow tempo, the tones are usually played quickly (like the mordent), and the fourth tone is then held until the time-value of the note has expired. (Fig. 46.)

When the sign (turn or turn) appears over a short note in a fast tempo (Fig. 45), the turn consists of four equal tones; however, if it appears over a longer note or in a slow tempo, the tones are generally played quickly (like the mordent), and the fourth tone is held until the time for the note has run out. (Fig. 46.)

 

Figs. 45-46

Figs. 45-46

 

70. When the turn-sign is placed a little to the right of the note the principal tone is sounded first and held to almost its full time-value, then the turn is played just before the next tone of the melody. In this case the four tones are of equal length as in the first example. (See Fig. 47.)

70. When the turn sign is placed slightly to the right of the note the main note is played first and sustained for almost its full duration, then the turn is executed just before the next note in the melody. In this case, the four notes are of equal length as in the first example. (See Fig. 47.)

 

Fig. 47

Fig. 47

 

The student should note the difference between these two effects; in the case of a turn over the note the turn comes at the beginning, but in the case of the sign after the note the turn comes at the very end. But in both cases the time taken by the embel[Pg 25]lishment is taken from the time-value of the principal note. For further details see Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians, Vol. V, p. 184. Also Elson, op. cit. p. 274.

The student should recognize the difference between these two effects; in the case of a turn over the note, the turn occurs at the beginning, but in the case of the sign after the note, the turn happens at the very end. However, in both instances, the duration spent on the embellishment is subtracted from the time value of the main note. For more details, see Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians, Vol. V, p. 184. Also, refer to Elson, op. cit. p. 274.

71. Sometimes an accidental occurs with the turn, and in this case when written above the sign it refers to the highest tone of the turn, but when written below, to the lowest (Fig. 48).

71. Sometimes an accident happens with the turn, and in this case, when written above the sign, it refers to the highest tone of the turn, but when written below, it refers to the lowest (Fig. 48).

 

Fig. 48

Fig. 48

 

72. In the inverted turn the order of tones is reversed, the lowest one coming first, the principal tone next, the highest tone third, and the principal tone again, last.

72. In the inverted turn, the order of notes is flipped: the lowest comes first, the main note is second, the highest note is third, and the main note appears again last.

 

Fig. 49

Fig. 49

 

73. The appoggiatura (lit. leaning note) consists of an ornamental tone introduced before a tone of a melody, thus delaying the melody tone until the ornamental tone has been heard. The time taken for this ornamental tone is taken from that of the melody tone.

73. The appoggiatura (literally leaning note) is an ornamental note that comes before a melodic note, delaying the melodic note until the ornamental note has been played. The duration of this ornamental note comes from the duration of the melodic note.

The appoggiatura was formerly classified into long appoggiatura and short appoggiatura, but modern writers seem to consider the term "short appoggiatura" to be synonymous with acciaccatura[12], and to avoid confusion the word acciaccatura will be used in this sense, and defined under its own heading.

The appoggiatura used to be classified as long appoggiatura and short appoggiatura, but today, many writers view "short appoggiatura" as the same as acciaccatura[12]. To prevent confusion, the term acciaccatura will be used in this way and defined under its own heading.

74. Three rules for the interpretation of the appoggiatura are commonly cited, viz.:

74. Three rules for interpreting the appoggiatura are often mentioned, namely:

(1) When it is possible to divide the principal tone into halves, then the appoggiatura receives one-half the value of the printed note. (Fig. 50.)[Pg 26]

(1) When you can split the main note into halves, the appoggiatura is given half the value of the written note. (Fig. 50.)[Pg 26]

(2) When the principal note is dotted (division into halves being therefore not possible), the appoggiatura receives two-thirds of the value. (Fig. 51.)

(2) When the main note is dotted (making it impossible to divide it in half), the appoggiatura gets two-thirds of its value. (Fig. 51.)

(3) When the principal note is tied to a note of smaller denomination the appoggiatura receives the value of the first of the two notes. (Fig. 52.)

(3) When the main note is connected to a note of lesser value, the appoggiatura takes on the value of the first of the two notes. (Fig. 52.)

 

Figs. 50-52

Figs. 50-52

 

75. The acciaccatura (or short appoggiatura) is written like the appoggiatura except that it has a light stroke across its stem. acciaccatura It has no definite duration-value, but is sounded as quickly as possible, taking its time from that of the principal tone. The appoggiatura is always accented, but the acciaccatura never is, the stress always falling on the melody tone. (See Grove, op. cit. Vol. I, p. 96.)

75. The acciaccatura (or short appoggiatura) looks like the appoggiatura, but it has a light stroke across its stem. acciaccatura It doesn’t have a specific duration, but it's played as quickly as possible, taking its timing from the main note. The appoggiatura is always accented, while the acciaccatura isn't; the emphasis always falls on the melody note. (See Grove, op. cit. Vol. I, p. 96.)

The use of embellishments is on the wane, and the student of to-day needs the above information only to aid him in the interpretation of music written in previous centuries. In the early days of instrumental music it was necessary to introduce graces of all sorts because the instruments in use were not capable of sustaining tone for any length of time; but with the advent of the modern piano with its comparatively great sustaining power, and also with the advent in vocal music of a new style of singing (German Lieder singing as contrasted with Italian coloratura singing), ornamental tones were used less and less, and when found now are usually written out in full in the score instead of being indicated by signs.

The use of embellishments is declining, and today's student only needs the information above to help understand music written in earlier centuries. In the early days of instrumental music, it was necessary to include all kinds of grace notes because the instruments available couldn't sustain notes for very long. However, with the arrival of the modern piano, which has a much greater ability to sustain sound, and the emergence of a new style of vocal music (German Lieder singing as opposed to Italian coloratura singing), ornamental tones are now used less frequently. When they do appear, they are usually fully written out in the score instead of being indicated by symbols.


CHAPTER VII

Scales

76. A scale (from scala, a Latin word meaning ladder; Ger. Ton-leiter) is an ascending or descending series of tones, progressing according to some definite system, and all bearing (in the case of tonality scales at least) a very intimate relation to the first tone—the key-tone or tonic. (See p. 28, Sec. 78; also note 1 at bottom of p. 38.)

76. A scale (from scala, a Latin word meaning ladder; Ger. Ton-leiter) is a series of tones that goes up or down, following a specific system, and all have a very close relationship to the first tone—the key-tone or tonic. (See p. 28, Sec. 78; also note 1 at bottom of p. 38.)

Many different kinds of scales have existed in various musical eras, the point of resemblance among them all being the fact that they have all more or less recognized the octave as the natural limit of the series. The difference among the various scales has been in the selection of intervals between the scale-tones, and, consequently, in the number of tones within the octave. Thus e.g., in our major scale the intervals between the tones are all whole-steps except two (which are half-steps), and the result is a scale of eight tones (including in this number both the key-tone and its octave): but in the so-called pentatonic scale of the Chinese and other older civilizations we find larger intervals (e.g., the step-and-a-half), and consequently a smaller number of tones within the octave. Thus in the scale upon which many of the older Scotch folk songs are based the intervals are arranged as follows:

Many different types of scales have existed throughout various musical eras, with the common factor being that they all generally acknowledge the octave as the natural limit of the series. The differences among the various scales lie in the choice of intervals between the scale tones, which affects the number of tones within the octave. For instance, in our major scale, the intervals between the tones are mostly whole steps, except for two (which are half steps), resulting in a scale of eight tones (including both the key tone and its octave). In contrast, the so-called pentatonic scale of Chinese and other ancient civilizations features larger intervals (such as the step-and-a-half), leading to fewer tones within the octave. Similarly, in the scale that many older Scottish folk songs are based on, the intervals are arranged as follows:

1 whole
step
2 whole
step
3 step-and-
a-half
4 whole
step
5 step-and-
a-half
6

The result is a scale of six tones, corresponding approximately with C—D—E—G—A—C in our modern system.

The result is a scale of six notes, roughly matching C—D—E—G—A—C in our modern system.

The term pentatonic is thus seen to be a misnomer since the sixth tone is necessary for the completion of the series, just as the eighth tone is essential in our diatonic scales.

The term pentatonic is therefore considered misleading since the sixth tone is needed to complete the series, just as the eighth tone is essential in our diatonic scales.

The following Chinese tune (called "Jasmine") is based on the pentatonic scale.

The following Chinese song (called "Jasmine") is based on the pentatonic scale.

 

Jasmine

Jasmine

 

77. In studying the theory of the scale the student should bear in mind the fact that a scale is not an arbitrary series of tones which some one has invented, and which others are required to make use of. It is rather the result of accustoming the ear to certain melodic combinations (which were originally hit upon by accident), and finally analyzing and systematizing these combinations into a certain definite order or arrangement. The application of this idea may be verified when it is recalled that most primitive peoples have invented melodies of some sort, but that only in modern times, and particularly since the development of instrumental music, have these melodies been analyzed, and the scale upon which they have been based, discovered, the inventors of the melodies being themselves wholly ignorant of the existence of such scales.

77. When studying the theory of scales, students should remember that a scale isn't just a made-up sequence of tones someone created for others to follow. Instead, it's a product of training the ear to recognize certain melodic combinations (which were originally discovered by chance) and then analyzing and organizing these combinations into a specific order. This concept can be confirmed by noting that many early societies came up with their own melodies, but it wasn't until modern times, especially with the rise of instrumental music, that these melodies were analyzed and the scales underlying them were identified, often without the original creators of the melodies even realizing these scales existed.

78. A key is a number of tones grouping themselves naturally (both melodically and harmonically) about a central tone—the key tone. The word tonality is often used synonymously with key in this sense.

78. A key is a set of tones that come together naturally (both melodically and harmonically) around a central tone—the key tone. The term tonality is often used interchangeably with key in this context.

The difference between key and scale is therefore this, that while both key and scale employ the same tone material, by key we mean the material in general, without any particular order or arrangement in mind, while by scale we mean the same tones, but now arranged into a regular ascending or descending series. It should be noted in this connection also that not all scales present an equally good opportunity of having their tones used as a basis for tonality or key-feeling: neither the chromatic nor the whole-step scale possess the necessary characteristics for being used as tonality scales in the same sense that our major and minor scales are so used.

The difference between key and scale is this: while both key and scale use the same set of tones, key refers to the tones in general, without a specific arrangement, while scale refers to those same tones organized into a clear ascending or descending sequence. It's also important to note that not all scales provide equally good opportunities to use their tones as a foundation for tonality or a sense of key: neither the chromatic scale nor the whole-step scale have the necessary qualities to serve as tonality scales in the same way that our major and minor scales do.

79. There are three general classes of scales extant at the present time, viz.: (1) Diatonic; (2) Chromatic; (3) Whole-tone.[13]

79. There are three main types of scales currently in use: (1) Diatonic; (2) Chromatic; (3) Whole-tone.[13]

80. The word diatonic means "through the tones" (i.e., through the tones of the key), and is applied to both major and minor scales of our modern tonality system. In general a diatonic scale may be defined as one which proceeds by half-steps and whole-steps. There is, however, one exception to[Pg 29] this principle, viz., in the progression six to seven in the harmonic minor scale, which is of course a step-and-a-half. (See p. 33, Sec. 86.)

80. The word diatonic means "through the tones" (i.e., through the tones of the key) and applies to both major and minor scales in our modern tonality system. Generally, a diatonic scale is defined as one that moves by half steps and whole steps. However, there is one exception to[Pg 29] this rule: the progression from six to seven in the harmonic minor scale, which is a step and a half. (See p. 33, Sec. 86.)

81. A major diatonic scale is one in which the intervals between the tones are arranged as follows:

81. A major diatonic scale is one where the gaps between the notes are set up like this:

1 whole
step
2 whole
step
3 half
step
4 whole
step
5 whole
step
6 whole
step
7 half
step
8

In other words, a major diatonic scale is one in which the intervals between three and four, and between seven and eight are half-steps, all the others being whole-steps. A composition based on this scale is said to be written in the major mode, or in a major key. The major diatonic scale may begin on any one of the twelve pitches C, C or D, D, D or E, E, F, F or G, G, G or A, A, A or B, B, but in each case it is the same scale because the intervals between its tones are the same. We have then one major scale only, but this scale may be written in many different positions, and may be sung or played beginning on any one of a number of different pitches.

In other words, a major diatonic scale is one where the intervals between the third and fourth notes, and between the seventh and eighth notes are half-steps, while all the other intervals are whole steps. A piece of music based on this scale is said to be in the major mode or in a major key. The major diatonic scale can start on any of the twelve pitches: C, C or D, D, D or E, E, F, F or G, G, G or A, A, A or B, B, but no matter which pitch it starts on, the scale remains the same because the intervals between its notes are consistent. So we essentially have just one major scale, but it can be played in many different positions and can be sung or played starting on various pitches.

82. It is interesting to note that the major scale consists of two identical series of four tones each; i.e., the first four tones of the scale are separated from one another by exactly the same intervals and these intervals appear in exactly the same order as in the case of the last four tones of the scale. Fig. 53 will make this clear. The first four tones of any diatonic scale (major or minor) are often referred to as the lower tetrachord[14] and the upper four tones as the upper tetrachord.

82. It's interesting to point out that the major scale is made up of two identical sets of four notes each; i.e. the first four notes of the scale are spaced apart by the same intervals, which appear in the same order as the last four notes of the scale. Fig. 53 will clarify this. The first four notes of any diatonic scale (major or minor) are often called the lower tetrachord[14] and the upper four notes are known as the upper tetrachord.

 

Fig. 53

Fig. 53

 

It is interesting further to note that the upper tetrachord of any sharp scale is always used without change as the lower tetrachord of the next major scale involving sharps, while the lower tetrachord of any flat scale is used as the upper tetrachord of the next flat scale. See Figs. 54 and 55.

It’s also worth mentioning that the upper tetrachord of any sharp scale is always used unchanged as the lower tetrachord of the next major scale that involves sharps, while the lower tetrachord of any flat scale is used as the upper tetrachord of the next flat scale. See Figs. 54 and 55.

 

Figs. 54-55

Figs. 54-55

 

83. From the standpoint of staff notation the major scale may be written in fifteen different positions, as follows:

83. From the perspective of staff notation, the major scale can be written in fifteen different positions, as follows:

 

scales

scales

scales

scales

 

It will be observed that in the above series of scales those beginning on F and G call for the same keys on the piano, i.e., while the notation is different, the actual tones of the scale are the same. The scales of C and D likewise employ the same tones. When two scales thus employ the same tones[Pg 32] but differ in notation they are said to be enharmonic, (cf. p. 38, Sec. 93.)

It can be seen that in the series of scales above, those starting on F♯ and G♭ use the same keys on the piano; that is, even though the notation differs, the actual notes of the scale are the same. The scales of C♯ and D♭ also use the same notes. When two scales use the same notes but have different notations, they are called enharmonic. (cf. p. 38, Sec. 93.)

Note.—The student is advised to adopt some uniform method of writing scales, preferably the one followed in those given above, the necessary sharps and flats appearing before the notes in the scale and then repeated collectively at the end as a signature. He is also advised to repeat these scales and signatures over and over until absolute familiarity is attained. E.g., E—F—G—A—B—C—D—E; signature, four sharps, F, C, G, and D.

Note.—Students should use a consistent method for writing scales, ideally the one mentioned above, where the necessary sharps and flats come before the notes in the scale and are then listed together at the end as a signature. It's also recommended to practice these scales and signatures repeatedly until they are completely familiar. E.g., E—F—G—A—B—C—D—E; signature, four sharps, F, C, G, and D.


CHAPTER VIII

Weights (Continued)

84. The minor diatonic scale is used in several slightly different forms, but the characteristic interval between the first and third tones (which differentiates it from the major scale) remains the same in every case. This interval between the first and third tones consists of four half-steps in the major scale and of three half-steps in the minor scale and this difference in size has given rise to the designation major for the scale having the larger third, and minor for the scale having the smaller one.

84. The minor diatonic scale comes in a few slightly different versions, but the key interval between the first and third notes (which sets it apart from the major scale) stays consistent in all cases. This interval between the first and third notes consists of four half-steps in the major scale and three half-steps in the minor scale. This difference in size has led to the terms major for the scale with the larger third and minor for the scale with the smaller one.

85. The original (or primitive) form of the minor scale has its tones arranged as follows.

85. The original (or primitive) form of the minor scale has its tones arranged like this.

1 whole
step
2 half
step
3 whole
step
4 whole
step
5 half
step
6 whole
step
7 whole
step
8

As its name implies, this is the oldest of the three forms (being derived from the old Greek Aeolian scale), but because of the absence of a "leading tone" it is suitable for the simplest one-part music only, and is therefore little used at present.

As the name suggests, this is the oldest of the three forms (coming from the ancient Greek Aeolian scale), but because it lacks a "leading tone," it's only appropriate for the simplest single-part music and is not commonly used today.

86. The harmonic minor scale is like the primitive form except that it substitutes a tone one half-step higher for the seventh tone of the older (i.e., the primitive) form. This change was made because the development of writing music in several parts (particularly harmonic part-writing) made necessary a "leading tone," i.e., a tone with a strong tendency to move on up to the key-tone as a closing point. In order[Pg 34] to secure a tone with such a strongly upward tendency the interval between seven and eight had to be reduced in size to a half-step. It should be noted that this change in the seventh tone of the scale caused an interval of a step-and-a-half between the sixth and seventh tones of the scale.

86. The harmonic minor scale is similar to the primitive form, but it replaces the seventh note of the older (i.e. the primitive) version with a note that is a half-step higher. This adjustment was made because the evolution of composing music in multiple parts (especially harmonic part-writing) required a "leading tone," i.e. a note that strongly tends to move up to the key note as a resolution point. To achieve a note with such a strong upward pull, the interval between seven and eight needed to be reduced to a half-step. It's important to note that this change in the seventh note of the scale results in an interval of a step-and-a-half between the sixth and seventh notes of the scale.

1 whole
step
2 half
step
3 whole
step
4 whole
step
5 half
step
6 step and
a half
7 half
step
8

87. The melodic minor scale substitutes a tone one half-step higher than six as well as one a half-step higher than seven, but this change is made in the ascending scale only, the descending scale being like the primitive form. The higher sixth (commonly referred to as the "raised sixth") was used to get rid of the unmelodic interval of a step-and-a-half[15] (augmented second), while the return to the primitive form in descending is made because the ascending form is too much like the tonic major scale.

87. The melodic minor scale raises the sixth and seventh notes by a half-step in the ascending scale only, while the descending scale follows the original form. The raised sixth helps eliminate the awkward interval of a step-and-a-half (augmented second), and the descent returns to the original form because the ascending version resembles the major scale too closely.

1 whole
step
2 half
step
3 whole
step
4 whole
step
5 whole
step
6 whole
step
7 half
step
8
7 whole
step
6 half
step
5 whole
step
4 whole
step
3 half
step
2 whole
step
1

This form is used only to a very limited extent, and then principally in vocal music, the harmonic form being in almost universal use in spite of the augmented second.

This form is used only sparingly, mainly in vocal music, while the harmonic form is almost universally used despite the augmented second.

88. The minor scale in its various positions (up to five sharps and five flats) and in all three forms follows: a composition based on any one of these forms (or upon a mixture of them, which often occurs) is said to be in the minor mode. It will be noted that the first four tones are alike in all three forms; i.e., the lower tetrachord in the minor scale is invariable no matter, what may happen to the upper tetrachord. The sign + marks the step-and-a-half.[Pg 35]

88. The minor scale in its various positions (with up to five sharps and five flats) and in all three forms is as follows: a composition based on any one of these forms (or a mix of them, which often happens) is said to be in the minor mode. It's worth noting that the first four notes are the same in all three forms; i.e., the lower tetrachord in the minor scale remains unchanged regardless of what happens to the upper tetrachord. The sign + indicates the step-and-a-half.[Pg 35]

 

minor scales

minor scales

 

Note.—The student is advised to recite the harmonic form of the minor scale as was suggested in the case of the major scale, noting that the "raised seventh" does not affect the key-signature. E.g.,—E—F—G—A—B—C—D—E; signature, one sharp, F.

Note.—Students are encouraged to practice the harmonic form of the minor scale just like with the major scale, keeping in mind that the "raised seventh" doesn’t change the key signature. E.g.,—E—F—G—A—B—C—D—E; signature, one sharp, F.

89. A minor scale having the same signature as a major scale is said to be its relative minor. E.g.,—e is the relative minor of G, c of E, d of F, etc., the small letter being used to refer to the minor key or scale, while the capital letter indicates the major key or scale unless accompanied by the word minor. Relative keys are therefore defined as those having the same signature. G and e are relative keys, as are also A and f, etc.

89. A minor scale that shares the same key signature as a major scale is called its relative minor. For example, e is the relative minor of G, c is the relative minor of E, d is the relative minor of F, and so on. The lowercase letter refers to the minor key or scale, while the uppercase letter indicates the major key or scale, unless it’s specified as minor. Therefore, relative keys are defined as those that have the same signature. G and e are relative keys, just like A and f, etc.

90. A minor scale beginning with the same tone as a major scale is referred to as its tonic minor. Thus, e.g., c with three flats in its signature is the tonic minor of C with all degrees in natural condition; e with one sharp is the tonic minor of E with four sharps, etc. Tonic keys are therefore those having the same key-tone.

90. A minor scale that starts on the same note as a major scale is called its tonic minor. For example, C with three flats in its key signature is the tonic minor of C, which has all notes in natural form; E with one sharp is the tonic minor of E, which has four sharps, and so on. Tonic keys are those that share the same key note.

91. The eight tones of the diatonic scale (both major and minor) are often referred to by specific names, as follows:

91. The eight notes of the diatonic scale (both major and minor) are often called by specific names, as follows:

1. Tonic—the tone. (This refers to the fact that the tonic is the principal tone, or generating tone of the key, i.e., it is the tone.)

1. Tonic—the main tone. (This refers to the fact that the tonic is the primary tone, or the foundational tone of the key, i.e., it is the tone.)

2. Super-tonic—above the tone.

2. Super-tonic—above the note.

3. Mediant—midway between tonic and dominant.

3. Mediant—in between tonic and dominant.

4. Sub-dominant—the under dominant. (This name does not refer to the position of the tone under the dominant but to the fact that the fifth below the tonic is also a dominant tone—the under dominant—just as the fifth above is the upper dominant).

4. Sub-dominant—the under dominant. (This name doesn’t describe the position of the tone under the dominant but highlights that the fifth below the tonic is also a dominant tone—the under dominant—just like the fifth above is the upper dominant).

5. Dominant—the governing tone. (From the Latin word dominus meaning master.)

5. Dominant—the main tone. (From the Latin word dominus meaning master.)

6. Super-dominant—above the dominant. Or Sub-mediant—midway between tonic and sub-dominant.

6. Super-dominant—above the dominant. Or Sub-mediant—halfway between tonic and sub-dominant.

7. Leading tone—the tone which demands resolution to the tonic (one-half step above it).

7. Leading tone—the note that needs to resolve to the tonic (a half step above it).

8. Octave—the eighth tone.

8. Octave—the 8th tone.

92. The syllables commonly applied to the various major and minor scales in teaching sight-singing are as follows:[16]

92. The syllables typically used for the different major and minor scales in sight-singing lessons are as follows:[16]

Major—DO, RE, MI, FA, SOL, LA, TI, DO.

Minor[17]—original—LA, TI, DO, RE, MI, FA, SOL, LA.
harmonic—LA, TI, DO, RE, MI, FA, SI, LA.
melodic —LA, TI, DO, RE, MI, FI, SI, LA, SOL, FA, MI, RE, DO, TI, LA.

Major—DO, RE, MI, FA, SOL, LA, TI, DO.

Minor[17]—original—LA, TI, DO, RE, MI, FA, SOL, LA.
harmonic—A, B, C, D, E, F, G, A.
melodic — LA, TI, DO, RE, MI, FI, SI, LA, SOL, FA, MI, RE, DO, TI, LA.

It is interesting to study the changes in both spelling and pronunciation that have occurred (and are still occurring) in these syllables. The first one (ut) was changed to DO as early as the sixteenth century because of the difficulty of producing a good singing tone on ut. For the same reason and also in order to avoid having two diatonic syllables with the same initial letter, the tonic-sol-fa system (invented in England about 1812 and systematized about 1850) changed SI to TI and this change has been almost universally adopted by teachers of sight-singing in this country. The more elaborate tonic-sol-fa spelling of the diatonic syllables (DOH, LAH, etc.), has not, however, been favorably received in this country and the tendency seems to be toward still further simplification rather than toward elaboration. It is probable that further changes in both spelling and pronunciation will be made in the near future, one such change that seems especially desirable being some other syllable than RE for the second tone of the major scale, so that the present syllable may be reserved for "flat-two," thus providing a uniform vowel-sound for all intermediate tones of the descending chromatic scale, as is already the case in the ascending form.

It's interesting to look at the changes in both spelling and pronunciation that have happened (and are still happening) in these syllables. The first one (ut) was changed to DO as early as the sixteenth century because it was difficult to produce a good singing tone on ut. For the same reason, and to avoid having two diatonic syllables starting with the same letter, the tonic-sol-fa system (created in England around 1812 and systematized around 1850) changed SI to TI, and this change has been widely adopted by sight-singing teachers in this country. However, the more elaborate tonic-sol-fa spelling of the diatonic syllables (DOH, LAH, etc.) has not been well received here, and the trend seems to be towards further simplification rather than elaboration. It's likely that additional changes in both spelling and pronunciation will occur soon, with one change that seems particularly desirable being a different syllable than RE for the second tone of the major scale, so that the current syllable can be reserved for "flat-two," thus providing a consistent vowel sound for all intermediate tones of the descending chromatic scale, as already happens in the ascending form.

93. The chromatic scale[18] is one which proceeds always by half-steps. Its intervals are therefore always equal no matter with what tone it begins. Since, however, we have (from the standpoint of the piano keyboard) five pairs of tones[19] which are enharmonically the same, it may readily be seen that the chromatic scale might be notated in all sorts of fashions, and this is in fact the real status of the matter, there being no one method uniformly agreed upon by composers.

93. The chromatic scale[18] is a scale that progresses entirely by half steps. Its intervals are always the same, regardless of the starting note. However, when looking at the piano keyboard, we have five pairs of tones[19] that are enharmonically equivalent, so it's clear that the chromatic scale can be notated in various ways. This reflects the true situation, as there isn't one universally accepted method among composers.

Parry (Grove's Dictionary, article chromatic) recommends writing the scale with such accidentals as can occur in chromatic chords without changing the key in which the passage occurs. Thus, taking C as a type, "the first accidental will be D, as the upper note of the minor ninth on the tonic; the next will be E, the minor third of the key; the next F, the major third of the super-tonic—all of which can occur without causing modulation—and the remaining two will be A and B, the minor sixth and seventh of the key." According to this plan the chromatic scale beginning with C would be spelled—C, D, D, E, E, F, F, G, A, A, B, B, C—the form being the same both ascending and descending. This is of course written exclusively from a harmonic standpoint and the advantage of such a form is its definiteness.

Parry (Grove's Dictionary, article chromatic) suggests writing the scale using accidentals that can occur in chromatic chords without changing the key of the passage. So, using C as an example, "the first accidental will be D, the upper note of the minor ninth on the tonic; the next will be E, the minor third of the key; the next will be F, the major third of the supertonic—all of which can occur without causing modulation—and the remaining two will be A and B, the minor sixth and seventh of the key." Following this approach, the chromatic scale starting with C would be spelled—C, D, D, E, E, F, F, G, A, A, B, B, C—the pattern remains the same when going up or down. This is, of course, written solely from a harmonic perspective, and the advantage of this format is its clarity.

94. For sight-singing purposes the chromatic scale[20] is usually written by representing the intermediate tones in ascending by sharps, (in some cases naturals and double-sharps), and the intermediate tones in descending by flats (sometimes naturals and double-flats). The chromatic scale in nine different positions, written from this standpoint, follows, and the syllables most commonly applied in sight-singing have also been added. In the first two scales the student of harmony is asked to note that because of the very common prac[Pg 39]tice of modulating to the dominant and sub-dominant keys, the intermediate tones 4 and 7 are quite universally used in both ascending and descending melody passages. In other words the scales that follow would more nearly represent actual usage if in each case 4 (FI) were substituted for 5 (SE) in the descending scale; and if 7 (TE) were substituted for 6 (LI) in the ascending form.

94. For sight-singing purposes, the chromatic scale[20] is typically written with ascending intermediate notes represented by sharps (and sometimes naturals and double sharps), and descending intermediate notes represented by flats (occasionally naturals and double flats). The chromatic scale in nine different positions, written from this perspective, follows, and the syllables most commonly used in sight-singing have also been included. In the first two scales, harmony students should note that due to the prevalent practice of modulating to the dominant and subdominant keys, the intermediate notes ♯4 and ♭7 are widely used in both ascending and descending melody passages. In other words, the following scales would more accurately reflect actual usage if, in each case, ♯4 (FI) were substituted for ♭5 (SE) in the descending scale, and if ♭7 (TE) were substituted for ♯6 (LI) in the ascending form.

 

chromatic scales

chromatic scales

chromatic scales

chromatic scales

 

Note.—In writing chromatic scales from this sight-singing standpoint the student is urged to adopt a three-step process; first, writing the major diatonic scale both ascending and descending; second, marking the half-steps; third, inserting accidental notes calling for the intermediate tones. In the above chromatic scales these intermediate tones have been represented by black note-heads so as to differentiate them from the notes representing diatonic scale tones.

Note.—When writing chromatic scales from this sight-singing perspective, students should follow a three-step process: first, write the major diatonic scale both ascending and descending; second, mark the half-steps; third, add accidentals to indicate the intermediate tones. In the chromatic scales above, these intermediate tones are represented by black note-heads to distinguish them from the notes that represent diatonic scale tones.

95. The whole-step scale (the third type mentioned in Sec. 79) is, as its name implies, a scale in which the intervals between the tones consist in every instance of whole-steps. This reduces the number of tones in the scale to seven. Beginning with C the scale reads: C, D, E, F or G, A, B, C. This scale has been used somewhat extensively by the ultramodern French school of composition represented by Debussy, Ravel, and others, but is not making any progress toward universal adoption. The remarks of a recent English writer[21] on this subject may be interesting to the student who is puzzled by the apparent present-day tendencies of French music. He says:

95. The whole-step scale (the third type mentioned in Sec. 79) is, as its name suggests, a scale where the intervals between the notes are all whole-steps. This limits the scale to seven notes. Starting from C, the scale is: C, D, E, F or G, A, B, C. This scale has been somewhat widely used by the extremely modern French composers like Debussy, Ravel, and others, but it hasn't gained widespread acceptance. The comments of a recent English writer [21] on this topic might be interesting for students trying to understand the current trends in French music. He says:

"The student of some interesting modern developments will also speedily discover that the adoption of the so-called whole-tone scale as a basis of music is, except upon a keyed instrument tuned to the compromise of equal temperament, unnatural and impossible. No player upon a stringed instrument can play the scale of whole-tones and arrive at an octave which is in tune with the starting note, unless he deliberately changes one of the notes on the road and alters it while playing it. The obvious result of the application of the whole-tone scale to an orchestra or a string quartet would be to force them to adopt the equal temperament of the pianoforte, and play every interval except the octave out of tune. When this modification had taken hold all music in the pure scale would be distorted and destroyed, unless string players were to face the[Pg 41] practically impossible drudgery of studying both the equal temperament and the pure scale from the start, and were able to tackle either form at a moment's notice. A thorough knowledge of the natural genesis of the scale of western nations will be the best antidote to fads founded upon ignorance of it. It is a curious commentary upon this question that Wagner, in the opening of the third act of Tristan (bars 6 to 10), experimented with the whole-tone scale and drew his pen through it, as was to be expected from a composer whose every work proves the writer to have had the pure scale inbred in him."

"The student exploring some interesting modern developments will quickly realize that using the so-called whole-tone scale as a foundation for music is unnatural and impossible, except on a keyed instrument tuned to the compromise of equal temperament. No player on a string instrument can play the whole-tone scale and reach an octave that is in tune with the starting note unless they intentionally change one of the notes along the way while playing. The obvious result of applying the whole-tone scale to an orchestra or a string quartet would be forcing them to adopt the equal temperament of the piano and play every interval except the octave out of tune. Once this change takes root, all music in the pure scale would be distorted and ruined unless string players were to take on the practically impossible task of learning both the equal temperament and the pure scale from the beginning and be able to switch between either form at a moment's notice. A solid understanding of the natural development of the scale in Western music will be the best antidote to trends based on ignorance of it. It's an interesting note on this issue that Wagner, in the opening of the third act of Tristan (bars 6 to 10), experimented with the whole-tone scale and ultimately moved past it, as would be expected from a composer whose every work shows he had the pure scale ingrained in him."

There may be some difference of opinion among acousticians as to whether Mr. Stanford is correct in his scientific assumptions regarding the difference between "tempered" and "pure" scales,[22] but even so, there is a far more potent reason why the whole-step scale will probably never become popular as the major and minor scales now are, viz., the fact that it offers no possibility of inculcating tonality feeling, which has always been the basis of even the simplest primitive music. Tonality scales give rise to a feeling of alternate periods of contraction and relaxation—an active tone (or chord) followed by a passive one, but no such effect is possible in the whole-step scale, and it seems suitable therefore only for that class of music whose outlines are purposely intended to be vague and indefinite—the impressionistic style of music writing.

There might be some disagreement among sound experts about whether Mr. Stanford's scientific ideas about the difference between "tempered" and "pure" scales are right,[22] but there's a much stronger reason why the whole-step scale is unlikely to gain popularity like the major and minor scales do: it doesn't create any sense of tonality feeling, which has always been the foundation of even the simplest primitive music. Tonality scales evoke a feeling of alternating phases of tension and release—an active tone (or chord) followed by a passive one—but that kind of impact isn't possible with the whole-step scale. It seems to work best only for music that is deliberately designed to be vague and indistinct—the impressionistic style of music composition.


CHAPTER IX

Auxiliary Words and Endings

96. Being a list of articles, adverbs, conjunctions, prepositions, and endings, often utilized in compounding terms relating to musical effects.

96. This is a list of articles, adverbs, conjunctions, prepositions, and endings, often used in combining terms related to musical effects.

A—preposition—variously translated to, at, for, by, in, with, towards.
A cappella—in church style.
A capriccio—at the fancy of the performer.
À deux mains—for two hands.
A mezza voce—with half voice.

A—preposition—translated to, at, for, by, in, with, towards.
A cappella—in a church vibe.
A capriccio—at the player's discretion.
With both hands—for two hands.
A mezza voce—in a quiet voice.

À la, or alla—in the manner of. Alla marcia—in the style of a march.

À la, or alla—in that style. Alla marcia—in the style of a march.

Assai—very, or very much. Allegro assai—very fast.

Assai—very, or a lot. Allegro assai—very fast.

Ben—well. Ben marcato—well marked.

Ben—well. Ben bold—well marked.

Coi, con, col, colla, colle, collo—with, or with the.
Con amore—with tenderness.
Colla voce—with the voice.

With, or with the.
With love—gently.
With the voice.

Come—as, like. Come primo—as at first.

Come—as, like. Come primo—as initially.

Contra—against. In compound words means "an octave below."

Contra—against. In compound words, it means "an octave lower."

Da—from. Da Capo—from the head.

Da—from. Da Capo—from the top.

Di—by, with, of, for. Di bravura—with daring.

Di—by, with, of, for. Di bravura—with boldness.

Di molto—exceedingly—very much. Allegro di molto—exceedingly rapid.

Di molto—very much. Allegro di molto—very fast.

Doppio—double. Doppio movimento—double movement.

Doppio—double. Doppio movimento—double movement.

E, ed, et—and. Cresc. et accel.—louder and faster.

E, ed, et—and. Cresc. et accel.—louder and faster.

Ensemble—together, the opposite of solo.

Ensemble—together, the opposite of solo.

Il, La, l', le—the. Il basso—the bass. L'istesso tempo—the same speed.

Il, La, l', le—the. Il basso—the bass. L'istesso tempo—the same speed.

Il più—the most. Il più forte possible—as loudly as possible.

The most—the most. As loudly as possible—as loudly as possible.

Issimo—Italian superlative ending. Fortefortissimo.

Issimo—Italian superlative suffix. Fortefortissimo.

Ino, etto—Italian diminutive endings. Andanteandantino. Pocopochetto.

Ino, etto—Italian diminutive endings. Andante—andantino. Poco—pochetto.

Meno—less. Meno forte—less loud.

Meno—lower. Meno forte—quieter.

Mente—the ending which changes a noun or adjective to an adverb. Largo largamente.

Mente—the suffix that changes a noun or adjective into an adverb. Largo largamente.

Mezzo or mezza—half, or medium. Mezzo forte—medium loud.

Mezzo or mezza—half, or medium. Mezzo forte—medium loud.

Molto—much, or very much. Molto cresc.—very much louder.

Molto—a lot, or really a lot. Molto cresc.—a lot louder.

Nel, nella, etc.—in the, or at the. Nel battere—at the down beat.

Nel, nella, etc.—in the, or at the. Nel battere—at the downbeat.

Non—not. Non tanto—not too much.

Non—no. Non tanto—not too much.

Ossia—or else. Ossia più facile—or else more easily.

Ossia—or something else. Ossia più facile—or something easier.

Per—for. Per il violino—for the violin.

For—for. For the violin.

Peu—little. Un peu cresc.—a little increase in tone.

Peu—small amount. Un peu cresc.—a slight increase in tone.

Più—more. Più forte—more loudly.[Pg 43]

More—more. More loudly—more loudly.[Pg 43]

Poco—little. Poco a poco—little by little.

Poco—small. Poco a poco—gradually.

Poi—then. E poi la coda—and then the coda.

Poi—then. And then the coda—and then the coda.

Possibile—possible. Forte possibile—as loudly as possible.

Forte possibile—as loud as possible.

Quasi—in the manner of. Allegro quasi andante—a fairly rapid movement, yet in the style of an andante; almost as slow as an andante.

Quasi—in that way. Allegro quasi andante—a pretty fast movement, but in the style of an andante; nearly as slow as an andante.

Sans—without. Sans pedales—without pedals.

Sans—without. Sans pedales—no pedals.

Sempre—always, or continually. Sempre forte—a long passage to be played forte throughout its entirety.

Sempre—always, or constantly. Sempre forte—a long section to be played loudly for its entire duration.

Senza—without. Senza accompagnamento—without accompaniment.

Senza—without. Senza accompagnamento—without music.

Sino, sin—as far as. See p. 14, note.

Sino, sin—to the extent that. See p. 14, note.

Solo—alone. Opposite of ensemble.

Solo—alone. Opposite of group.

Sub—under or lower. Sub-dominant—the under dominant.

Sub—under or lower. Sub-dominant—the lower dominant.

Tanto—same as troppo, q.v.

Tanto—same as troppo, see below.

Tre—three. Tre corde—three strings.

Tre—3. Tre corde—3 strings.

Très—very. Très vivement—very lively.

Very. Very lively.

Troppo—too much. Non tanto allegro, or non troppo allegro—not too fast.

Troppo—too much. Non tanto allegro, or non troppo allegro—not too fast.

Una, un, uno—one, or a. Una corda—one string. Un peu—a little.

Una, un, uno—one, or a. Una corda—one string. Un peu—a little.

A working knowledge of these auxiliary terms will aid the student greatly in arriving at the meaning of hundreds of terms without stopping to look up each individual one.

A basic understanding of these additional terms will help the student significantly in figuring out the meaning of hundreds of terms without having to look up each one individually.


CHAPTER X

Measure

97. From the standpoint of the eye, a measure is that portion of the staff found between two bars, (in certain cases this space may be less than a measure, as e.g., at the beginning and end of a movement); but from the standpoint of the ear a single, isolated measure is not possible, and the term must therefore be defined in the plural form.

97. From the perspective of the eye, a measure is the section of the staff that lies between two bars. (In some cases, this space might be less than a full measure, for example, at the start and end of a movement). However, from the perspective of the ear, a single, isolated measure doesn't really exist, so the term should be defined in the plural form.

Measures are similarly accented groups of evenly-spaced beats, each group having at least one accented and one non-accented beat. The strongest accent falls normally on the first beat in the measure.

Measures are similarly emphasized groups of evenly spaced beats, with each group containing at least one emphasized and one non-emphasized beat. The strongest emphasis usually falls on the first beat in the measure.

Two essential characteristics are involved in the ordinary musical measure:

Two key features are part of a regular musical measure:

(1) A group of even beats (or pulses), always felt, though not always actually sounded, one or more of these beats being stronger than the rest;

(1) A group of steady beats (or pulses), always felt but not always actually heard, with one or more of these beats being stronger than the others;

(2) Certain rhythmic figures (rhythmic figure etc.) which form the actual musical content of these groups.

(2) Certain rhythmic patterns (rhythmic figure etc.) that make up the actual musical substance of these groups.

The student will note the essential difference between rhythm and measure. Rhythm is the regular recurrence of accent in a series of beats (or pulses), while measure is the grouping of these beats according to some specified system. In listening to a piece of music, two hearers A and B may feel the rhythm equally strongly, but A may subjectively group the beats into—one, two | one, two |—etc., while B feels the groups as—one, two, three, four | one, two, three, four |—etc. Rhythm is thus seen to be a fundamental thing, inherent in the music itself, while measure is to a certain extent at least an arbitrary grouping which musicians have adopted for practical purposes.

The student will notice the key difference between rhythm and measure. Rhythm is the regular pattern of accents in a series of beats (or pulses), while measure is how these beats are organized according to a specific system. When listening to a piece of music, two listeners, A and B, might feel the rhythm equally strongly, but A might group the beats as—one, two | one, two |—etc., whereas B might perceive the groups as—one, two, three, four | one, two, three, four |—etc. Therefore, rhythm is seen as a fundamental element inherent in the music itself, while measure is somewhat of an arbitrary grouping that musicians have adopted for practical reasons.

98. In syncopation the normal system of accenting is temporarily suspended and the accented tone falls on the regularly unaccented part of the measure. Syncopation may therefore be defined as the temporary interruption of a normal[Pg 45] series of accents, i.e., accenting a beat that is usually not accented. Thus e.g., in Fig. 56, measure one has the regular system of accents normally found in four-quarter-measure, (strong accent on one, secondary accent on three); but measure three has only one accent, and it falls on the second beat.

98. In syncopation, the usual pattern of accents is temporarily put on hold, and the accent falls on the part of the measure that usually doesn’t get emphasized. Syncopation can be defined as the temporary disruption of a normal [Pg 45] series of accents, i.e., stressing a beat that typically isn't accentuated. For example, in Fig. 56, measure one has the standard accent pattern you usually find in a four-quarter measure (strong accent on one, secondary accent on three); but measure three has only one accent, and it’s on the second beat.

 

Fig. 56

Fig. 56

 

99. Measures are usually classified as simple and compound. A simple measure is one which has but a single accent, i.e., the measure cannot be divided into smaller constituent groups. There are two main classes of simple measures, two-beat measure, and three-beat measure. A compound measure is (as its name implies) one made up by combining two or more simple measures, or by the elaboration of a single measure (in slow tempo) into several constituent groups. The principal compound measures are four-beat and six-beat, both being referred to as compound-duple measures. Five-beat, seven-beat, nine-beat, and twelve-beat measures are also classified as compound measures.

99. Measures are usually categorized as simple and compound. A simple measure has just a single accent, meaning the measure can't be broken down into smaller groups. There are two main types of simple measures: two-beat and three-beat measures. A compound measure is, as the name suggests, made by combining two or more simple measures or breaking down a single measure (at a slow tempo) into several smaller groups. The main compound measures are four-beat and six-beat, both known as compound-duple measures. Five-beat, seven-beat, nine-beat, and twelve-beat measures are also considered compound measures.

An English writer[23] classifies measures as duple, triple, or quadruple, specifying that a simple measure is one in which each beat is represented by a note whose value can be divided into halves (simple measure etc.) and that a compound measure is one in which each beat is represented by a dotted-note, whose value can be divided into three parts, (compound measure). There is thus seen to be considerable difference of opinion as to the meaning of the words simple and compound when applied in this connection, the principal question at issue being whether four-beat measure is an individual variety, or whether it is a variety compounded out of two-beat measures, either by placing two of these in a group or by the elaboration of a single measure into a larger number of beats, as is often necessary in slow tempi. Perhaps the easiest way out of the difficulty is to admit that both may be true—but in different compositions. That is, it is frequently impossible to tell whether a composition that is being listened to is in two-beat, or in four-beat measure; and yet it is sometimes possible so to discriminate. Since, however, one cannot in the majority of cases distinguish between two-beat and four-beat measures, it will probably be best to leave the original classification intact and regard four-beat measure as a compound variety.

An English writer[23] classifies measures as duple, triple, or quadruple, explaining that a simple measure is one where each beat is marked by a note that can be divided into halves (simple measure etc.), while a compound measure is one where each beat is indicated by a dotted note, which can be divided into three parts (compound measure

100. The commonest varieties of measure are:

100. The most common types of measure are:

1. Duple (sometimes called even measure, or even time), in which there are two beats, the first one being accented. Examples of duple measure are 2/4, 2/8, 2/2, two-quarter,[24] two-eighth, and two-half measure, respectively.

1. Duple (also known as even measure or even time) has two beats, with the first beat being emphasized. Examples of duple measure include 2/4, 2/8, 2/2, two-quarter,[24] two-eighth, and two-half measure, respectively.

2. Triple, (the old perfect measure), in which there are three beats, the first one being accented, the second and third unaccented. Examples are 3/8, 3/4, 3/2, three-eighth, three-quarter, and three-half measure, respectively.

2. Triple, (the traditional perfect measure), where there are three beats, with the first beat being stressed and the second and third beats being unstressed. Examples include 3/8, 3/4, 3/2, three-eighths, three-quarters, and three-halves, respectively.

3. Quadruple, in which there are four beats, the first and third being accented (primary accent on one, secondary accent on three), the second and fourth unaccented. (See note above, under Sec. 99.)

3. Quadruple, which has four beats, with the first and third beats being stressed (primary stress on one, secondary stress on three), while the second and fourth beats are unstressed. (See note above, under Sec. 99.)

4. Sextuple, in which there are six beats, the first and fourth being accented, the others not. In rapid tempi this is always taken as compound duple measure, a dotted quarter note having a beat. It will be noted that the two measures sextuple are identical in effect with sextuple.

4. Sextuple, which has six beats, with the first and fourth beats accented while the others are not. In fast tempos, this is always considered a compound duple measure, with a dotted quarter note counting as one beat. It's important to note that the two measures sextuple have the same effect as sextuple.

101. Other varieties of measure sometimes found are 9/8 and 12/8, but these are practically always taken as three-beat and four-beat measures respectively, being equivalent to these if each group of three tones is thought of as a triplet. 9/8 bar is identical in effect with 3/4 bar.

101. Other types of measures you might come across are 9/8 and 12/8, but these are almost always interpreted as three-beat and four-beat measures, respectively, since they're equivalent to these when you think of each group of three notes as a triplet. 9/8 bar has the same effect as 3/4 bar.

102. Quintuple (five-beat) and septuple (seven-beat) measures are occasionally met with, but these are rare and will always be sporadic. The five-beat measure is taken as a combination of three and two, or of two and three (sometimes a mixture of both in the same composition), while the[Pg 47] seven-beat measure is taken in groups of four and three, or of three and four.

102. Quintuple (five-beat) and septuple (seven-beat) measures are sometimes seen, but they are rare and usually occur sporadically. The five-beat measure can be thought of as a combination of three and two, or two and three (and sometimes a mix of both within the same piece), while the [Pg 47] seven-beat measure is grouped as four and three, or three and four.

103. The sign common time is usually understood to mean four-quarter measure, and the sign cut-time, two-half measure, but usage varies somewhat, and the second sign is sometimes used to indicate four-half measure. It may safely be said however that the sign cut-time always indicates that a half-note has a beat. cut-timecut-time may occasionally be found indicating four-half measure but this is rare.

103. The sign common time is typically understood to represent four-quarter time, and the sign cut-time, indicates two-half time, but the usage can vary a bit, and the second sign is sometimes used to signify four-half time. However, it can be confidently stated that the sign cut-time always means that a half-note gets one beat. cut-timecut-time may sometimes be used to indicate four-half time, but this is uncommon.

The student will note that the sign common time is not a letter C, but an incomplete circle, differentiating two-beat (imperfect) measure from three-beat (perfect) measure. See Appendix A, p. 106.

The student will notice that the sign common time is not a letter C, but an incomplete circle, distinguishing two-beat (imperfect) measure from three-beat (perfect) measure. See Appendix A, p. 106.


CHAPTER XI

Pace

104. The word time in musical nomenclature has been greatly abused, having been used to indicate:

104. The term time in music terminology has been misused a lot, as it has been used to mean:

(1) Rhythm; as "the time was wrong."

(1) Rhythm; because "the timing was off."

(2) Variety of measure-signature; as "two-four time."

(2) Different types of time signatures; like "two-four time."

(3) Rate of speed; as "the time was too slow."

(3) Speed; as "the time was too slow."

To obviate the confusion naturally resulting from this three-fold and inexact use of the word, many teachers of music are adopting certain changes in terminology as noted in Sections 105, 106, and 107. Such changes may cause some confusion at first, but seem to be necessary if our musical terminology is to be at all exact.

To avoid the confusion that naturally arises from this three-fold and vague use of the word, many music teachers are adopting certain changes in terminology as noted in Sections 105, 106, and 107. These changes might create some confusion initially, but they seem necessary if we want our musical terminology to be precise at all.

105. The first of the changes mentioned in the above paragraph is to substitute the word rhythm for the word time when correcting mistakes involving misplaced accent, etc. E.g., "Your rhythm in the third measure of the lower score was wrong," instead of "Your time—was wrong."

105. The first of the changes mentioned in the above paragraph is to replace the word time with rhythm when correcting mistakes involving misplaced accents, etc. E.g., "Your rhythm in the third measure of the lower score was wrong," instead of "Your time—was wrong."

106. The second change mentioned would eliminate such blind and misleading expressions as "two-four time," "three-four time," "four-four time," "six-eight time," etc., and substitute therefor such self-explanatory designations as "two-quarter measure," "three-quarter measure," "four-quarter measure," "six-eighth measure," etc. E.g., "The first movement of the Beethoven Sonata Op. 2, No. 3, is in four-quarter measure."

106. The second change mentioned would remove confusing and misleading terms like "two-four time," "three-four time," "four-four time," "six-eight time," etc., and replace them with clearer names like "two-quarter measure," "three-quarter measure," "four-quarter measure," "six-eighth measure," etc. For example, "The first movement of the Beethoven Sonata Op. 2, No. 3, is in four-quarter measure."

107. The third change referred to above would substitute the word tempo (plural—tempi) for the word time in all allusions to rate of speed. E.g., "The scherzo was played in very rapid tempo."[Pg 49]

107. The third change mentioned earlier would replace the word time with tempo (plural—tempi) in any references to speed. For example, "The scherzo was played at a very quick tempo."[Pg 49]

The word tempo has been used in this connection so long by professional musicians that there can be no possible objection to it on the ground of its being a foreign word. In fact there is a decided advantage in having a word that is understood in all countries where modern music (i.e., civilized music) is performed, and just here is found the principal reason for the popularity of the Italian language in musical terminology. Schumann, MacDowell and other well known composers have tried to break down this popularity by using their own respective vernaculars in both tempo and dynamic indications, but in spite of these attempts the Italian language is still quite universally used for this purpose, and deservedly so, for if we are to have a music notation that is universal, so that an American is able to play music written by a Frenchman or a German, or a Russian, then we ought also to have a certain number of expressions referring to tempo, etc., which will be understood by all, i.e., a music terminology that is universal. The Italian language was the first in the field, is the most universally known in this particular at the present time, and is entirely adequate. It should therefore be retained in use as a sort of musical Esperanto.

The word tempo has been used in this context for so long by professional musicians that there's really no objection to it just because it's a foreign word. In fact, there's a clear benefit to having a term that is recognized in all countries where modern music (i.e., civilized music) is performed, and this is the main reason for the popularity of the Italian language in musical terminology. Composers like Schumann, MacDowell, and others have tried to challenge this popularity by using their own languages for tempo and dynamic markings, but despite these efforts, Italian is still widely used for this purpose—and rightly so. If we're going to have music notation that is universal, allowing an American to play music written by a Frenchman, German, or Russian, then we should also have a set of terms related to tempo, etc., that everyone understands, i.e., a universally accepted music terminology. The Italian language was the first to establish itself in this area, is the most recognized today, and is entirely sufficient. Therefore, it should continue to be used as a kind of musical Esperanto.

108. There are several ways of finding the correct tempo of a composition:

108. There are several ways to find the right tempo of a composition:

1. From the metronomic indication found at the beginning of many compositions. Thus e.g., the mark M.M. 92 (Maelzel's Metronome 92) means that if the metronome (either Maelzel's or some other reliable make) is set with the sliding weight at the figure 92 there will be 92 clicks per minute, and they will serve to indicate to the player or singer the rate at which the beats (or pulses) should follow one another. This is undoubtedly the most accurate means of determining tempi in spite of slight inaccuracies in metronomes[25] and of the mistakes which composers themselves often make in giving metronomic indications.

1. From the metronomic indication found at the beginning of many pieces. For example, the mark M.M. 92 (Maelzel's Metronome 92) means that if the metronome (either Maelzel's or another reliable brand) is set with the sliding weight at the figure 92, there will be 92 clicks per minute, which will help the player or singer keep track of the rate at which the beats (or pulses) should follow one another. This is definitely the most accurate way to determine tempos, despite some minor inaccuracies in metronomes[25] and the mistakes that composers often make in giving metronomic indications.

2. Another means of determining the tempo of a composition is to play it at different tempi and then to choose the one that "feels right" for that particular piece of music. This is perhaps the best means of getting at the correct tempo but is open only to the[Pg 50] musician of long experience, sure judgment, and sound scholarship.

2. Another way to figure out the tempo of a composition is to play it at different speeds and then choose the one that "feels right" for that specific piece of music. This might be the best method for finding the correct tempo, but it's only accessible to the [Pg 50] musician with lots of experience, good judgment, and solid knowledge.

3. A third method of finding tempi is through the interpretation of certain words used quite universally by composers to indicate the approximate rate of speed and the general mood of compositions. The difficulty with this method is that one can hardly find two composers who employ the same word to indicate the same tempo, so that no absolute rate of speed can be indicated, and in the last analysis the conductor or performer must fall back on the second method cited above—i.e., individual judgment.

3. A third way to determine tempos is by interpreting specific terms that composers commonly use to suggest the approximate speed and overall mood of their pieces. The challenge with this approach is that it’s rare to find two composers who use the same term to convey the same tempo, so there’s no definitive speed that can be established. Ultimately, the conductor or performer must rely on the second method mentioned above—i.e., personal judgment.

109. In spite of the inexactness of use in the case of expressions relating to tempo, these expressions are nevertheless extremely useful in giving at least a hint of what was in the composer's mind as he conceived the music that we are trying to interpret. Since a number of the terms overlap in meaning, and since the meaning of no single term is absolute, these expressions relating to tempo are best studied in groups. Perhaps the most convenient grouping is as follows:

109. Despite the imprecision of terms related to tempo, these terms are still very helpful in providing at least a glimpse of what the composer intended when creating the music we're trying to interpret. Because many of the terms share similar meanings and no single term has an absolute definition, it's best to study these tempo-related expressions in groups. One of the most useful ways to group them is as follows:

1. Grave (lit. weighty, serious), larghissimo, adagissimo, and lentissimo—indicating the very slowest tempo used in rendering music.

1. Grave (meaning heavy, serious), larghissimo, adagissimo, and lentissimo—indicating the slowest tempo used in playing music.

2. Largo,[26] adagio,[27] and lento—indicating quite a slow tempo.

Largo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ adagio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ and lento—indicating a very slow tempo.

3. Larghetto (i.e., a little largo) and adagietto (a little adagio)—a slow tempo, but not quite so slow as largo, etc.

3. Larghetto (i.e., a little largo) and adagietto (a little adagio)—a slow tempo, but not as slow as largo, etc.

4. Andante (going, or walking, as contrasted with running) and andantino—indicating a moderately slow tempo.[Pg 51]

4. Andante (moving or walking, as opposed to running) and andantino—signifying a moderately slow tempo.[Pg 51]

Andantino is now quite universally taken slightly faster than andante, in spite of the fact that if andante means "going," and if "ino" is the diminutive ending, then andantino means "going less," i.e., more slowly!

Andantino is now generally played a bit faster than andante, even though if andante means "going," and "ino" is a diminutive ending, then andantino technically means "going less," i.e., more slowly!

5. Moderato—a moderate tempo.

5. Moderato—a moderate tempo.

6. Allegro and allegretto[28]—a moderately quick tempo, allegretto being usually interpreted as meaning a tempo somewhat slower than allegro.

6. Allegro and allegretto[28]—a moderately fast tempo, with allegretto generally understood to be a pace that is a bit slower than allegro.

The word allegro means literally happy, joyous, and this literal meaning is still sometimes applicable, but in the majority of instances the term refers only to rate of speed.

The word allegro literally means happy or joyous, and this meaning is still sometimes applicable, but most of the time the term only refers to speed.

7. Vivo, vivace, (lit. lively)—a tempo between allegro and presto.

7. Vivo, vivace (lively)—a tempo between allegro and presto.

8. Presto, prestissimo, vivacissimo, and prestissimo possibile—the most rapid tempo possible.

8. Presto, prestissimo, vivacissimo, and prestissimo possibile—the fastest tempo possible.


CHAPTER XII

Pace (Continued)

110. Innumerable combinations of the words defined in Sec. 109 with one another and with other words occur. Some of these combinations with their approximate meanings follow. The meaning of any such expression not found in the list may usually be arrived at by consulting the terms defined in paragraph 109 and recalling the use of certain auxiliary terms quoted in Chapter IX.

110. Countless combinations of the words defined in Sec. 109 with each other and with other words appear. Some of these combinations along with their approximate meanings are listed below. The meaning of any expression not included in the list can typically be determined by looking at the terms defined in paragraph 109 and remembering the use of certain auxiliary terms mentioned in Chapter IX.

Largo assai—very slow.

Largo assai—super slow.

Largo di molto—very slow.

Largo di molto—super slow.

Largo ma non troppo—slow, but not too slow.

Largo but not too slow—slow, but not excessively slow.

Largo un poco—slow, but not so slow as largo. (Cf. larghetto.)

Largo a bit—slow, but not as slow as largo. (See larghetto.)

Lentemente—slowly.

Slowly.

Lentando—with increasing slowness.

Slowing down.

Très lentement—very slowly.

Very slowly.

Lentissamente—very slowly.

Lentissamente—super slowly.

Lentissamamente—very slowly.

Lentissamamente—super slowly.

Lento assai—very slowly.

Lento assai—really slowly.

Lento a capriccio—slowly but capriciously.

Lento a capriccio—slowly and unpredictably.

Lento di molto—very slowly.

Lento di molto—slowly.

Andante affettuoso—moderately slow, and with tenderness and pathos.

Andante affectionate—slow enough to feel emotional depth and warmth.

Andante amabile—moderately slow, and lovingly.

Andante amabile—moderately slow and sweet.

Andante cantabile—moderately slow, and in singing style.

Andante cantabile—at a moderate pace and in a smooth, melodic style.

Andante grazioso—moderately slow, and gracefully.

Andante grazioso—moderately slow and graceful.

Andante maestoso—moderately slow, and majestically.

Moderately slow and majestic.

Andante con moto—slightly faster than andante.

Andante con moto—faster than andante.

Andante (ma) non troppo—not too slowly.

Andante (but) not too slowly—not too slowly.

Andante pastorale—moderately slow, and in simple and unaffected style; (lit. rural, pastoral).

Andante pastorale—moderately slow, in a straightforward and natural style; (literally rural, pastoral).

Andante quasi allegro—almost as rapid in tempo as allegro; (lit. an andante in the style of allegro).

Andante quasi allegro—nearly as fast in tempo as allegro; (literally, an andante in the style of allegro).

Andante sostenuto—moderately slow and sustained.

Andante sostenuto—moderately slow and steady.

Allegrissimo—much faster than allegro. (The superlative degree of allegro.)

Allegrissimo—much faster than allegro. (The highest form of allegro.)

Allegro agitato—a moderately rapid tempo, and in agitated style.

Allegro agitato—a fairly fast tempo, played in an agitated style.

Allegro appassionata—a moderately rapid tempo, and in passionate style.

Allegro appassionata—a moderately fast tempo, played with passion.

Allegro assai (very allegro)—faster than allegro.

Allegro assai (very allegro)—faster than allegro.

Allegro commodo—a conveniently rapid tempo.

Fast and easy—an upbeat tempo.

Allegro con brio—an allegro played in brilliant style. Faster than allegro.[Pg 53]

Allegro con brio—an allegro played in a lively, vibrant way. Faster than allegro.[Pg 53]

Allegro con fuoco—an allegro played with fire, i.e., with extreme animation. Faster than allegro.

Allegro con fuoco—an allegro played intensely, i.e., with extreme energy. Faster than allegro.

Allegro con spirito—an allegro performed with spirit.

Allegro con spirito—an upbeat performance with energy.

Allegro con moto—faster than allegro.

Allegro con moto—faster than allegro.

Allegro di bravura—an allegro performed in brilliant style, i.e., demanding great skill in execution.

Allegro di bravura—a lively performance executed with brilliance, meaning it requires a high level of skill to pull off.

Allegro furioso (furiously)—quicker than allegro; very brilliant.

Allegro furioso (furiously)—faster than allegro; very brilliant.

Allegro giusto—an allegro movement, but in exact rhythm.

Allegro giusto—a lively section, but with precise timing.

Allegro ma grazioso—an allegro played in graceful style.

Allegro but graceful—an allegro played in a smooth and elegant way.

Allegro (ma) non tanto—an allegro movement, but not too rapid.

Allegro (but) not too much—an allegro movement, but not too fast.

Allegro (ma) non troppo—an allegro movement, but not too rapid.

Allegro (but) not too much—an allegro movement, but not too fast.

Allegro (ma) non presto—an allegro movement, but not too rapid.

Allegro (but) not too fast—an allegro movement, but not too rapid.

Allegro moderato—slower than allegro.

Allegro moderato—slower than allegro.

Allegro vivace—faster than allegro.

Allegro vivace—faster than allegro.

Presto assai—as rapidly as possible.

As fast as possible.

Presto (ma) non troppo—a presto movement, but not too rapid.

Presto (ma) non troppo—a presto movement, but not overly fast.

111. There are certain terms which indicate a modification of the normal tempo of a movement, these being divided into two classes, (a) those terms which indicate in general a slower tempo, and (b) those which indicate in general a more rapid tempo. The further subdivisions of these two classes are shown below.

111. There are specific terms that show a change in the normal tempo of a movement, which are divided into two categories: (a) terms that generally indicate a slower tempo, and (b) terms that generally indicate a faster tempo. The additional subdivisions of these two categories are outlined below.

(a) Terms indicating a slower tempo.

(a) Terms that suggest a slower tempo.

1. Terms indicating a gradual retard.

Terms indicating a gradual delay.

Ritenente, (rit.), ritenuto (rit.), ritardando (rit.), rallentando (rall.), slentando.

Ritenente, (rit.), ritenuto (rit.), ritardando (rit.), rallentando (rall.), slentando.

2. Terms indicating a tempo which is to become definitely slower at once.

2. Terms that indicate a tempo that is going to become definitely slower immediately.

Più lento (lit. more slowly), meno mosso (lit. less movement).

Less active, slower.

3. Terms indicating a slower tempo combined with an increase in power.

3. Terms that suggest a slower pace along with a boost in strength.

Largando, allargando. These words are both derived from largo, meaning large, broad.

Largando, allargando. These terms both come from largo, which means large or broad.

(For terms indicating both slower tempo and softer tone, see page 59, Sec. 127.)

(For terms indicating both a slower tempo and a softer tone, see page 59, Sec. 127.)

The student should note the difference between groups 1 and 2 as given above: the terms in group 1 indicate that each measure, and even each pulse in the measure, is a little slower than the preceding one, while such terms as più lento and meno mosso[Pg 54] indicate a rate of speed becoming instantly slower and extending over an entire phrase or passage. Some composers (e.g., Beethoven and Couperin) have evidently had this same distinction in mind between rallentando and ritardando on the one hand, and ritenuto and ritenente on the other, considering the former (rall. and rit.) to indicate a gradually slackening speed, and the latter (ritenuto and ritenente) to indicate a definitely slower rate. The majority of composers do not however differentiate between them in this way, and it will therefore hardly be worth while for the student to try to remember the distinction.

The student should pay attention to the difference between groups 1 and 2 as described above: the terms in group 1 suggest that each measure, and even each pulse within the measure, is slightly slower than the one before it, while terms like più lento and meno mosso[Pg 54] indicate a speed that becomes instantly slower and lasts over an entire phrase or passage. Some composers (e.g., Beethoven and Couperin) clearly had this distinction in mind between rallentando and ritardando on one side, and ritenuto and ritenente on the other, viewing the former (rall. and rit.) as a gradual slowing down, while the latter (ritenuto and ritenente) indicates a definite slower pace. However, most composers do not make this distinction, so it might not be worth the student’s time to try to remember it.

(b) Terms indicating a more rapid tempo.

(b) Terms that indicate a faster pace.

1. Terms indicating a gradual acceleration.

1. Terms that suggest a slow increase in speed.

Accelerando, affrettando (this term implies some degree of excitement also), stringendo, poco a poco animato.

Accelerando, hurriedly (this term suggests a certain level of excitement as well), stringendo, gradually getting more lively.

2. Terms indicating a tempo which is to become definitely faster at once.

2. Terms that indicate a tempo that will definitely speed up right away.

Più allegro, più tosto, più mosso, stretto, un poco animato.

More cheerful, faster, livelier, tight, a bit animated.

112. After any modification in tempo (either faster or slower) has been suggested it is usual to indicate a return to the normal rate by some such expression as a tempo (lit. in time), a tempo primo (lit. in the first time), tempo primo, or tempo.

112. After any change in speed (either faster or slower) has been suggested, it's common to show a return to the normal pace with expressions like a tempo (literally, in time), a tempo primo (literally, in the first time), tempo primo, or tempo.

113. Tempo rubato (or a tempo rubato) means literally in robbed time, i.e., duration taken from one measure or beat and given to another, but in modern practice the term is quite generally applied to any irregularity of rhythm or tempo not definitely indicated in the score.

113. Tempo rubato (or a tempo rubato) literally means in robbed time, i.e., taking duration from one measure or beat and giving it to another. However, in modern practice, the term is generally used to refer to any irregularity of rhythm or tempo that isn't specifically noted in the score.

The terms ad libitum, (ad lib.), a piacere, and a capriccio, also indicate a modification of the tempo at the will of the performer. Ad libitum means at liberty; a piacere, at pleasure; and a capriccio, at the caprice (of the performer).

The terms ad libitum (ad lib.), a piacere, and a capriccio also refer to changing the tempo as the performer chooses. Ad libitum means at liberty; a piacere means at pleasure; and a capriccio means at the whim of the performer.

114. The term tempo giusto is the opposite of tempo rubato (and of the other terms defined in paragraph 113). It means literally in exact time. (Tempo giusto is sometimes translated quite rapidly,[29] but this is very unusual.)

114. The term tempo giusto is the opposite of tempo rubato (and of the other terms defined in paragraph 113). It literally means in exact time. (Tempo giusto is sometimes translated as quite rapidly,[29] but this is very rare.)

115. L'istesso tempo means—at the same rate of speed. E.g., when a measure signature changes from 2/4 to 6/8 with a change in beat-note from a quarter to a dotted-quarter, but with the same tempo carried through the entire movement.

115. L'istesso tempo means — at the same speed. E.g., when a measure signature changes from 2/4 to 6/8 with a change in beat note from a quarter note to a dotted quarter note, but with the same tempo maintained throughout the entire movement.

116. Tenuto (ten.) indicates that a tone or chord is to be held to its full value. This word is sometimes used after a staccato passage to show that the staccato effect is to be discontinued, but is often used merely as a warning not to slight a melody-tone—i.e., to give it its full value.

116. Tenuto (ten.) means that a note or chord should be held for its full duration. This term is sometimes used after a staccato section to signal that the staccato effect should stop, but it’s often just a reminder not to overlook a melody note—i.e., to give it its full value.

117. Veloce means—swiftly, and is applied to brilliant passages (e.g., cadenzas) which are to be played as rapidly as possible without much regard for measure rhythm. The words rapidamente, brillante and volante (flying) have the same meaning as veloce.

117. Veloce means swiftly and is used for brilliant passages (e.g., cadenzas) that should be played as fast as possible without much concern for strict timing. The terms rapidamente, brillante, and volante (flying) have the same meaning as veloce.

118. The following expressions referring to tempo are also in common use but cannot easily be classified with any of the groups already defined.

118. The following expressions about tempo are also commonly used but can’t easily be categorized into any of the groups already defined.

Con moto—with motion; i.e., not too slow.

Con moto—with movement; i.e., not too slowly.

Pesante—slowly, heavily.

Pesante—slow, heavy.

Doppio movimento—twice as rapid as before.

Doppio movimento—twice as fast as before.

Tempo ordinario—in ordinary tempo.

Ordinary tempo—in ordinary tempo.

Tempo commodo—in convenient tempo.

Easy pace—in convenient tempo.

Sempre lento malinconico assai—always slowly and in a very melancholy style.

Always slowly and in a very melancholy style.

Animando, animato, con anima—with animation.

Animated, lively, with spirit—with animation.

Agitato—agitated.

Agitato—agitated.

119. Tempo di marcia is given by Riemann (Dictionary of Music, p. 783) as equivalent to andante, M.M. 72-84. The same writer gives tempo di menuetto as equivalent to allegretto, and tempo di valso as equivalent to allegro moderato (which he regards as indicating a more rapid tempo than allegretto).

119. Tempo di marcia is defined by Riemann (Dictionary of Music, p. 783) as equivalent to andante, M.M. 72-84. The same author states that tempo di menuetto is equivalent to allegretto, and tempo di valso is equivalent to allegro moderato (which he considers to suggest a faster tempo than allegretto).


CHAPTER XIII

Dynamics

120. The word dynamics (cf. dynamic—the opposite of static) as used in the nomenclature of music has to do with the various degrees of power (i.e., the comparative loudness and softness) of tones.

120. The word dynamics (see dynamic—the opposite of static) in music terminology refers to the different levels of intensity (i.e., the relative loudness and softness) of sounds.

As in the case of words referring to tempo, the expressions referring to dynamics are always relative, never absolute; it is possible to indicate that one measure is to be louder than another, but it is not possible (nor desirable) to indicate exactly how loud either is to be. Thus dynamics, perhaps even more than tempo, will be seen to depend on the taste of the performer or conductor.

As with words that describe tempo, the terms related to dynamics are always relative, never absolute; you can say that one measure should be louder than another, but you can’t (and shouldn’t) specify exactly how loud each one should be. Therefore, dynamics, maybe even more than tempo, will be influenced by the preferences of the performer or conductor.

The following words referring to dynamics are in common use:

The following words related to dynamics are commonly used:

Pianisissimo (ppp)—as softly as possible. (It will be noted that this is a sort of hyper-superlative of piano.)

Pianisissimo (ppp)—as softly as possible. (It's worth mentioning that this is a kind of hyper-superlative of piano.)

Pianissimo (pp)—very softly. (The superlative of piano.)

Pianissimo (pp)—very softly.

Piano (p)—softly.

Piano (p)—quietly.

Mezzo piano (mp)—medium softly.

Mezzo piano (mp) — moderately soft.

Mezzo forte (mf)—medium loudly.

Mezzo forte (mf)—medium loud.

Forte (f)—loudly (lit. strong).

Forte (f)—loudly (literally strong).

Fortissimo (ff)—very loudly. (The superlative of forte.)

Fortissimo (ff)—very loudly.

Fortisissimo (fff)—as loudly as possible.

Fortissimo (fff)—as loud as possible.

The lack of a one-word comparative degree in the case of both piano and forte seems to necessitate the hyper-superlative degree as given above, but the practice of using four, or even five p's or f's is not desirable.

The absence of a one-word comparative form for both piano and forte seems to require the hyper-superlative form mentioned above, but using four or even five p's or f's is not ideal.

121. The terms defined in Sec. 120 are often combined with others, as e.g.,

121. The terms defined in Sec. 120 are often combined with others, like e.g.,

Pianissimo possibile—as softly as possible.

As softly as possible.

Piano assai—very softly.

Piano assai—very quietly.

Fortissimo possibile—as loudly as possible.

As loud as possible.

Forte piano (fp)—loud, followed at once by soft.

Forte piano (fp)—loud, then soft.

As in the case of terms relating to tempo, the meaning of many other expressions relating to dynamics may easily be arrived at by recalling the list of auxiliary terms quoted under Sec. 96.

As with the terms related to tempo, the meanings of many other expressions related to dynamics can be easily understood by referring back to the list of auxiliary terms mentioned under Sec. 96.

122. The terms sforzando, forzando, sforzato and forzato all indicate a strong accent on a single tone or chord. These words are abbreviated as follows:—sf,fz, and sfz, the abbreviation being placed directly above (sometimes below) the note or chord affected. The signs vertical accent and horizontal accent are also commonly used to indicate such an accent.

122. The terms sforzando, forzando, sforzato, and forzato all indicate a strong emphasis on a single note or chord. These words are shortened as follows:—sf, fz, and sfz, with the abbreviation placed directly above (sometimes below) the note or chord being affected. The symbols vertical accent and horizontal accent are also commonly used to indicate such an emphasis.

In interpreting these accent marks the student must bear in mind again the fact that they have a relative rather than an absolute meaning: the mark sf occurring in the midst of a piano passage will indicate a much milder form of accent than would the same mark occurring in the midst of a forte passage.

In interpreting these accent marks, the student must remember that they carry a relative rather than an absolute meaning: the mark sf found in a piano passage indicates a much softer form of accent compared to the same mark found in a forte passage.

123. The words rinforzando and rinforzato (abb.—rinf. and rfz.) mean literally reinforced, and are used to indicate a sudden increase in power usually extending over an entire phrase or passage instead of applying only to a single tone or chord as in the case of sforzando, etc.

123. The terms rinforzando and rinforzato (abbreviated as rinf. and rfz.) literally mean reinforced and are used to indicate a sudden increase in intensity, typically covering an entire phrase or passage, rather than just applying to a single note or chord, like in the case of sforzando, etc.

124. Crescendo (abb.—cresc. or crescendo) means a gradual increase in power. It will be noted that this word does not mean loud, nor does it mean a sudden increase in power unless accompanied by some auxiliary term such as subito, or molto.

124. Crescendo (abbreviated as cresc. or crescendo) refers to a gradual increase in power. It's important to note that this word does not mean loud, nor does it imply a sudden increase in power unless it's paired with some additional term like subito or molto.

Broadly speaking there are two varieties of crescendo: (1) that in which the same tone increases in power while being prolonged; (2) that in which succeeding tones are each sounded more strongly than the preceding one. The first variety is possible only on instruments giving forth a tone which can be varied after it begins. Thus e.g., the human voice, the violin, the organ enclosed in a swell box, and certain wind instruments, are all capable of sounding a tone softly at first and gradually increasing the volume until the maximal point of power has been reached. But on the piano, organ not enclosed in a swell-box, kettle drum, etc., the power of the[Pg 58] tone cannot be varied after the tone has once been sounded, and a crescendo effect is therefore possible only in a passage, in rendering which each succeeding tone is struck more forcibly than its immediate predecessor. This second variety of crescendo offers a means of dramatic effect which may be employed most strikingly, as e.g., when a long passage begins very softly and increases in power little by little until the utmost resources of the instrument or orchestra have been reached. A notable example of such an effect is found in the transition from the third to the fourth movements of the Beethoven Fifth Symphony.

In general, there are two types of crescendo: (1) the kind where the same note gets louder while being held; (2) the kind where each successive note is played more forcefully than the one before. The first type can only happen on instruments that allow the tone to be adjusted after it starts. For example, the human voice, the violin, an organ with a swell box, and certain wind instruments can produce a note softly at first and gradually increase the volume until it reaches its loudest point. However, on instruments like the piano, organ without a swell box, and kettle drum, the power of the[Pg 58] tone cannot be adjusted once it’s been played, so a crescendo effect can only be achieved in a passage, where each subsequent note is played more forcefully than the one right before it. This second type of crescendo allows for dramatic expression, especially when a long passage starts very softly and gradually gets louder until the full capacity of the instrument or orchestra is reached. A striking example of this effect is seen in the transition from the third to the fourth movements of Beethoven’s Fifth Symphony.

The difference between sforzando, rinforzando, and crescendo should now be noted: sforzando indicates that a single tone or chord is to be louder; rinforzando, that an entire passage is to be louder, beginning with its first tone; but crescendo indicates that there is to be a gradual increase in power, this increase sometimes occurring during the sounding of a single tone, but more often in a passage.

The difference between sforzando, rinforzando, and crescendo should now be noted: sforzando means that a single note or chord should be louder; rinforzando means that an entire section should be louder, starting with its first note; while crescendo means that there should be a gradual increase in volume, which can happen during a single note but is more common in a section.

125. Certain combinations of the word crescendo with other words are so common that they should be especially noted. Among these are:

125. Certain combinations of the word crescendo with other words are so common that they should be especially noted. Among these are:

Crescendo al fortissimo—keep on gradually increasing in power until the fortissimo (or very loud) point has been reached.

Crescendo al fortissimo—continue to gradually build in intensity until you reach the fortissimo (or very loud) point.

Crescendo subito—increase in power suddenly (or rapidly).

Crescendo subito—suddenly (or quickly) increase in intensity.

Crescendo poco a poco—increase in power very, very gradually.

Crescendo poco a poco—build up in intensity very, very slowly.

Crescendo poi diminuendo—first increase, then diminish the tone.

Start strong, then fade—first increase, then decrease the tone.

Crescendo e diminuendo—same as cresc. poi dim.

Crescendo and diminuendo—the same as cresc. then dim.

Crescendo molto—increase in power very greatly.

Crescendo molto—increase in power a lot.

Crescendo ed animando poco a poco—growing gradually louder in tone and quicker in tempo.

Crescendo ed animando poco a poco—growing gradually louder in tone and faster in tempo.

Crescendo ed affrettando—gradually louder and faster.

Crescendo ed affrettando—getting louder and faster.

Crescendo poco a poco sin al fine—crescendo gradually even up to the very end.

Crescendo poco a poco sin al fine—gradually getting louder right up to the very end.

126. Decrescendo (decresc. or decrescendo) means a gradual diminishing of the tone. It is the opposite of crescendo. The word diminuendo is synonymous with decrescendo.

126. Decrescendo (decresc. or decrescendo) means a gradual softening of the sound. It's the opposite of crescendo. The word diminuendo is a synonym for decrescendo.

Decrescendo (or diminuendo) al pianissimo means—decrease gradually in power until the pianissimo (or very soft) point is reached.[Pg 59]

Decrescendo (or diminuendo) al pianissimo means—gradually decrease in intensity until you reach the pianissimo (or very soft) point. [Pg 59]

127. A number of terms referring to both softer tone and slower tempo are in use. The most common of these are:—mancando, moriente,[30] morendo, perdendo (from perdere—to lose), perdendosi, calando, and smorzando.[31] Such expressions are usually translated—"gradually dying away."

127. There are several terms that refer to both a softer tone and a slower tempo in use. The most common ones are:—mancando, moriente,[30] morendo, perdendo (from perdere—to lose), perdendosi, calando, and smorzando.[31] These terms are typically translated as—"gradually dying away."

128. In piano music the abbreviation Ped. indicates that the damper pedal (the one at the right) is to be depressed, while the sign damper release shows that it is to be released. In many modern editions this depression and release of the damper pedal are more accurately indicated by the sign damper.

128. In piano music, the abbreviation Ped. means that you should press down the damper pedal (the one on the right), while the sign damper release indicates that it should be released. In many modern editions, the pressing and releasing of the damper pedal are represented more accurately by the sign damper.

The term senza sordini is also occasionally found in old editions, indicating that the damper pedal is to be depressed, while con sordini shows that it is to be released. These expressions are taken from a usage in music for stringed instruments, in which the term con sordini means that the mute (a small clamp of metal, ivory or hardwood) is to be affixed to the bridge, this causing a modification in both power and quality of the tone. The damper on the piano does not in any way correspond to the mute thus used on stringed instruments, and the terms above explained as sometimes occurring in piano music are not to be recommended, even though Beethoven used them in this sense in all his earlier sonatas.

The term senza sordini is also sometimes seen in older editions, meaning that the damper pedal should be pressed down, while con sordini indicates that it should be released. These terms come from music practices for string instruments, where con sordini means that the mute (a small clamp made of metal, ivory, or hardwood) should be attached to the bridge, which changes both the volume and quality of the sound. The damper on the piano doesn’t really match the mute used on string instruments, and the terms mentioned, which occasionally appear in piano music, aren't the best choice, even though Beethoven used them in this way in all his earlier sonatas.

129. The words una corda (lit.—one string) indicate that the "soft pedal" (the one at the left) is to be depressed, while the words tre corde (lit. three strings) or tutte le corde (all the strings) show that the same pedal is to be released. These expressions refer to the fact that on grand pianos the "soft pedal" when depressed moves the hammers to one side so that instead of striking three strings they strike only two (in the older pianos only one, hence una corda), all three strings (tre corde) being struck again after the release of the pedal.

129. The terms una corda (literally "one string") indicate that the "soft pedal" (the one on the left) should be pressed down, while the terms tre corde (literally "three strings") or tutte le corde (all the strings) signify that the same pedal should be released. These phrases refer to how, on grand pianos, when the "soft pedal" is pressed, it shifts the hammers to one side so that instead of hitting three strings, they only hit two (on older pianos, just one, which is why it's called una corda), and all three strings (tre corde) are struck again once the pedal is released.

130. Other terms relating either directly or indirectly to the subject of dynamics are:

130. Other terms related, either directly or indirectly, to the topic of dynamics are:

Con alcuna licenza—with some degree of license.

With some degree of freedom—with some degree of freedom.

Con amore—with tenderness.

With love—with tenderness.

Con bravura—with boldness.

Con bravura—with confidence.

Con celerita—with rapidity.

With speed.

Con delicato—with delicacy.

Con delicato—with care.

Con energico—with energy.

With energy.

Con espressione—with expression.[Pg 60]

With expression.

Con forza—with force.

Con forza—with strength.

Con fuoco—with fire and passion.

Con fuoco—with fire and passion.

Con grand' espressione—with great expression.

With great expression.

Con grazia—with grace.

With grace.

Con melinconia—with melancholy.

With melancholy.

Con passione—with passion.

With passion.

Con spirito—with spirit.

With spirit.

Con tenerezza—with tenderness.

With tenderness.

Delicato—delicately.

Delicate—gently.

Dolce—sweetly, gently.

Dolce—sweetly, softly.

Dolcissimo—most sweetly.

Dolcissimo—most sweetly.

Dolce e cantabile—gently and with singing tone.

Sweet and singable—softly and with a melodic tone.

Dolente   }
Doloroso } plaintively or sorrowfully.

Dolente   }
Doloroso } sadly.

Espressivo—expressively.

Espressivo—with expression.

Grandioso—grandly, pompously.

Grandiose—grandly, pompously.

Grazioso—gracefully.

Grazioso—elegantly.

Giocoso—humorously, (cf. jocose).

Giocoso—playfully, (cf. jocose).

Giojoso—joyfully, (cf. joyous).

Giojoso—joyfully, (see joyous).

Lacrimando, lacrimoso—sorrowfully.

Lacrimando, lacrimoso—sadly.

Legato—smoothly.

Legato—smoothly.

Leggiero—lightly.

Leggiero—light.

Leggierissimo—most lightly; almost a staccato.

Leggierissimo—very light; almost staccato.

Lusingando—caressingly, coaxingly, tenderly.

Luring—caressingly, coaxingly, tenderly.

Maesta, maestoso—majestically.

Maesta, maestoso—majestic.

Martellando, martellato—strongly accented, (lit.—hammered).

Martellando, martellato—strongly accented, (lit.—hammered).

Marziale—martial—war-like.

Martial—war-like.

Mesto—pensively.

Mesto—thoughtfully.

Mezzo voce—with half voice.

Mezzo voce—in a soft voice.

Misterioso—mysteriously.

Misterioso—mysteriously.

Parlando—well accented or enunciated; applied to melody playing. (The word parlando means literally-speaking.)

Parlando—well pronounced or articulated; used for melody playing. (The word parlando literally means speaking.)

Pastorale—in simple and unaffected style, (lit.—pastoral, rural).

Pastorale—in a straightforward and genuine style, (lit.—pastoral, rural).

Pomposo—pompously.

Pomposo—pretentiously.

Precipitoso—precipitously.

Precipitoso—rushed.

Recitativo—well enunciated. (This meaning applies only in instrumental music in which a melody is to stand out above the accompaniment. For def. of recitative in vocal music, see p. 78.)

Recitativo—clearly expressed. (This definition only applies to instrumental music where a melody is meant to stand out above the accompaniment. For the definition of recitative in vocal music, see p. 78.)

Risoluto—firmly, resolutely.

Risoluto—strongly, decisively.

Scherzando, scherzoso, etc.—jokingly. These terms are derived from the word scherzo meaning a musical joke.

Scherzando, scherzoso, etc.—in a playful manner. These terms come from the word scherzo, which means a musical joke.

Semplice—simply.

Simplistic—simply.

Sempre marcatissimo—always well marked, i.e., strongly accented.

Sempre marcatissimo—always clearly marked, i.e., strongly accented.

Sentimento—with sentiment.

Sentiment—with feeling.

Solenne—solemn.

Solenne—serious.

Sotto voce—in subdued voice.

Quietly— in a subdued voice.

Spiritoso—with spirit.[Pg 61]

Spiritoso—with energy.[Pg 61]

Strepitoso—precipitously.

Strepitoso—suddenly.

Tranquillo—tranquilly.

Tranquillo—calmly.

Tristamente—sadly.

Sadly.

131. Many other terms are encountered which on their face sometimes seem to be quite formidable, but which yield readily to analysis. Thus e.g., crescendo poco a poco al forte ed un pochettino accelerando, is seen to mean merely—"increase gradually to forte and accelerate a very little bit." A liberal application of common sense will aid greatly in the interpretation of such expressions.

131. Many other terms come up that might seem intimidating at first glance but can be easily understood with some analysis. For example, crescendo poco a poco al forte ed un pochettino accelerando simply means "increase gradually to forte and speed up just a little bit." A good dose of common sense will be very helpful in interpreting these kinds of expressions.


CHAPTER XIV

Terms Related to Forms and Styles

132. A form in music is a specific arrangement of the various parts of a composition resulting in a structure so characteristic that it is easily recognized by the ear. Thus e.g., although every fugue is different from all other fugues in actual material, yet the arrangement of the various parts is so characteristic that no one who knows the fugue form has any doubt as to what kind of a composition he is hearing whenever a fugue is played. The word form is therefore seen to be somewhat synonymous with the word plan as used in architecture; it is the structure or design underlying music. Examples of form are the canon, the fugue, the sonata, etc.

132. A form in music is a specific arrangement of the different parts of a composition that creates a structure so distinctive that it's easily recognizable by the ear. For example, even though every fugue has unique material, the arrangement of its parts is so characteristic that anyone familiar with the fugue form knows exactly what type of composition they're listening to whenever a fugue is played. The term form can be seen as somewhat synonymous with the word plan in architecture; it represents the structure or design behind the music. Examples of form include the canon, the fugue, the sonata, etc.

Speaking broadly we may say that form in any art consists in the placing together of certain parts in such relations of proportion and symmetry as to make a unified whole. In music this implies unity of tonality and of general rhythmic effect, as well as unity in the grouping of the various parts of the work (phrases, periods, movements) so as to weld them into one whole, giving the impression of completeness to the hearer.

Speaking broadly, we can say that form in any art involves arranging specific parts in ways that relate to one another in proportion and balance to create a unified whole. In music, this means having a consistent tonality and overall rhythmic effect, along with a cohesive grouping of the different sections of the piece (like phrases, periods, movements) to blend them into one complete work, leaving the listener with a sense of wholeness.

133. The primal basis of form is the repetition of some characteristic effect, and the problem of the composer is to bring about these repetitions in such a way that the ear will recognize them as being the same material and will nevertheless not grow weary of them. This is accomplished by varying the material (cf. thematic development), by introducing contrasting material, and by choice of key.

133. The basic foundation of form is the repetition of a specific characteristic effect, and the challenge for the composer is to create these repetitions in a way that the listener recognizes them as the same material without getting bored. This is achieved by varying the material (see thematic development), introducing contrasting material, and selecting different keys.

134. The student should note at the outset of this topic the difference in meaning between the terms form and style:[Pg 63] A form is a plan for building a certain definite kind of composition, but a style is merely a manner of writing. Thus e.g., the fugue is a formi.e., it is a plan, which although capable of variation in details, is yet carried out fairly definitely in every case; but counterpoint is merely a style or manner of writing (just as Gothic architecture is a style of building), which may be cast into any one of several forms.

134. The student should recognize from the beginning of this topic the difference in meaning between the terms form and style:[Pg 63] A form is a blueprint for creating a specific type of composition, while a style is simply a way of writing. For example, the fugue is a formthat is, it’s a plan that, although it can vary in details, is still carried out quite clearly in every instance; but counterpoint is just a style or way of writing (just like Gothic architecture is a style of building), which can take on any one of several forms.

135. The material found in the following sections is an attempt to explain in simple language certain terms relating to forms and styles which are in common use; in many cases the definition is too meagre to give anything but a very general idea, but it is hoped that the student will at least be set to thinking and that he will eventually be led to a more detailed and scholarly study of the subject. (The article "Form" and the separate articles under each term here defined, as found in Grove's Dictionary, are especially recommended. For examples of the various forms described, see also Mason and Surette—"The Appreciation of Music," Supplementary Volume.)

135. The material in the following sections aims to explain in simple terms some commonly used words related to forms and styles; in many cases, the definitions may be too brief to provide anything more than a general understanding, but it is hoped that students will at least start thinking about the topics and eventually pursue a more in-depth and scholarly study of the subject. (The article "Form" and the separate entries for each term defined here in Grove's Dictionary are highly recommended. For examples of the various forms described, see also Mason and Surette—"The Appreciation of Music," Supplementary Volume.)

136. In a very general way there may be said to be two styles of musical composition, the monophonic (or homophonic)—the one-voiced—and the polyphonic—the many voiced. The polyphonic[32] style antedates the monophonic historically.

136. In a broad sense, there are two styles of musical composition: monophonic (or homophonic)—which has a single melody—and polyphonic— which features multiple melodies. Historically, the polyphonic[32] style came before the monophonic style.

137. In monophonic music there is one voice which has a pronounced melody, the other voices (if present) supporting this melody as a harmonic (and often rhythmic) background. An example of this is the ordinary hymn-tune with its melody in the highest part, and with three other voices forming a "four-part harmony." The sonata, symphony, opera, modern piano piece, etc., are also largely monophonic, though polyphonic passages by way of contrast are often to be found.[Pg 64]

137. In monophonic music, there's one main voice that carries the melody, while any other voices (if there are any) support this melody with harmonic (and often rhythmic) backing. A good example is a typical hymn tune, where the melody is in the highest part, and three other voices create a "four-part harmony." Pieces like sonatas, symphonies, operas, and modern piano compositions are also primarily monophonic, although you can often find contrasting polyphonic sections.[Pg 64]

138. In polyphonic music each voice is to a certain extent melodically interesting, and the "harmony" is the result of combining several melodies in such a way as to give a pleasing effect, instead of treating a melody by adding chords as an accompaniment or support. Counterpoint, canon, round, fugue, etc., are all polyphonic in style. The word contrapuntal is often used synonymously with polyphonic.

138. In polyphonic music, each voice is melodically interesting to some degree, and the "harmony" comes from blending multiple melodies to create a pleasing effect, rather than simply adding chords as accompaniment or support to a single melody. Counterpoint, canon, round, fugue, and so on are all polyphonic in style. The term contrapuntal is often used interchangeably with polyphonic.

(Sections 139 to 143 relate especially to terms describing polyphonic music.)

(Sections 139 to 143 focus specifically on terms that describe polyphonic music.)

139. Counterpoint is the art of adding one or more parts or melodies to a given melody, the latter being known as the "cantus firmus," or subject. It may therefore be broadly defined as "the art of combining melodies."

139. Counterpoint is the skill of adding one or more parts or melodies to a main melody, which is referred to as the "cantus firmus," or subject. It can thus be generally defined as "the art of combining melodies."

The word counterpoint comes from the three words "punctus contra punctum," meaning "point against point." The word point as here used refers to the punctus—one of the neumae of the mediaeval system, these neumae being the immediate predecessors of modern notes.

The word counterpoint comes from the three words "punctus contra punctum," which means "point against point." The word point in this context refers to the punctus—one of the neumae from the medieval system, which are the direct ancestors of modern notes.

Both vocal and instrumental music have been written in contrapuntal style. The familiar two- and three-part "inventions" by Bach are excellent examples of instrumental counterpoint, while such choruses as those in "The Messiah" by Handel illustrate the highest type of vocal counterpoint.

Both vocal and instrumental music have been composed in a counterpoint style. The well-known two- and three-part "inventions" by Bach are great examples of instrumental counterpoint, while choruses like those in "The Messiah" by Handel demonstrate the finest type of vocal counterpoint.

140. Imitation is the repetition by one part, of a subject or theme previously introduced by another part. If the imitation is exact, the term strict imitation is applied, but if only approximate, then the term free imitation is used in referring to it. The repetition need not have the exact pitches of the subject in order to be strict; on the contrary the imitation is usually at the interval of an octave, or a fifth, or a second, etc. Fig. 57 shows an example of strict imitation in which the third part comes in an octave lower than the first part.

140. Imitation is when one part repeats a subject or theme that another part has already introduced. If the imitation is identical, we call it strict imitation, but if it’s only similar, we refer to it as free imitation. The repetition doesn't have to match the exact pitches of the subject to be considered strict; in fact, the imitation often occurs at intervals like an octave, a fifth, or a second, etc. Fig. 57 shows an example of strict imitation where the third part enters an octave lower than the first part.

141. A canon is a contrapuntal composition in the style of strict imitation, one part repeating exactly (but at any interval) what another part has played or sung. The term "canonic style" is sometimes applied to music in which the imitation is not exact. An example of three-part canon is given in Fig. 57.[Pg 65]

141. A canon is a musical piece that involves strict imitation, where one part repeats exactly (but at any interval) what another part has played or sung. The phrase "canonic style" is sometimes used for music where the imitation isn't exact. An example of a three-part canon is shown in Fig. 57.[Pg 65]

 

CANON IN THREE VOICES, IN THE UNISON AND OCTAVE

CANON IN THREE VOICES, IN UNISON AND OCTAVE

Fig. 57. Mozart Canon

Fig. 57. Mozart Canon

 

The word canon means law, and was applied to this particular form of composition because the rules relating to its composition were invariable. It is because of this non-flexibility that the canon is so little used as a form at the present time: the modern composer demands a plan of writing that is capable of being varied to such an extent as to give him room for the exercise of his own particular individuality of conception, and this the canon does not do. For this same reason too the fugue and the sonata have successively gone out of fashion and from Schumann down to the present time composers have as it were created their own forms, the difficulty in listening arising from the fact that no one but the composer himself could recognize the form as a form[Pg 66] because it had not been adopted to a great enough extent by other composers to make it in any sense universal. The result is that in much present-day music it is very difficult for the hearer to discover any trace of familiar design, and the impression made by such music is in consequence much less definite than that made by music of the classic school. It is probable that a reaction from this state of affairs will come in the near future, for in any art it is necessary that there should be at least enough semblance of structure to make the art work capable of standing as a universal thing rather than as the mere temporary expression of some particular composer or of some period of composition.

The word canon means law, and it was used for this specific type of composition because its rules were strict and unchanging. This rigidity is why the canon is rarely used today: modern composers want a writing style that offers enough flexibility to allow for their unique creative expression, which the canon does not provide. The same reason has led to the decline of the fugue and the sonata; since Schumann's time, composers have been creating their own forms, making it hard for listeners to recognize the structure as a form[Pg 66] because it hasn't been widely adopted by other composers to be considered universal. As a result, much of today's music makes it challenging for listeners to find any familiar patterns, and the impact of such music feels less clear compared to that of classical music. It’s likely that this trend will shift soon, as art needs to have some sense of structure to be viewed as a universal piece rather than just a temporary expression of one specific composer or a particular time in music history.

142. The common school round is an example of canon, each voice repeating exactly what the first voice has sung, while this first voice is going on with its melody. The round is therefore defined as a variety of canon in which the imitation is always in unison with the subject.

142. The common school round is a type of canon, where each voice echoes exactly what the first voice has sung, while the first voice continues with its melody. The round is thus defined as a variation of canon in which the imitation is always in unison with the subject.

143. The fugue (Latin, fuga = flight) is a form of contrapuntal composition in which the imitation is always in the dominant key, i.e., a fifth above or a fourth below. The imitation (called "the answer") may be an exact repetition of the subject (sometimes called "the question"), but is usually not so.

143. The fugue (from Latin, fuga = flight) is a style of contrapuntal composition where the imitation is consistently in the dominant key, i.e., a fifth higher or a fourth lower. The imitation (known as "the answer") can be an exact repetition of the subject (sometimes referred to as "the question"), but it often isn't.

The fugue differs from the canon also in that the subject is given in complete form before the answer begins, while in the canon the imitation begins while the subject is still going on. The fugue is not nearly so strict in form as the canon and gives the composer much greater opportunity for expressing musical ideas. A canon may be perfect in form and yet be very poor music; this same statement might of course be made about any form, but is especially true in the stricter ones.

The fugue is different from the canon in that the main theme is presented in full before the answer starts, while in the canon, the imitation begins while the main theme is still playing. The fugue is not nearly as strict in structure as the canon, allowing the composer much more freedom to express musical ideas. A canon can be technically perfect but still not very good musically; this is true for any form, but it's especially relevant for the more rigid ones.


CHAPTER XV

Terms Related to Forms and Styles (Continued)

(Sections 144 to 160 relate particularly to terms used in descriptions of monophonic music[33].)

(Sections 144 to 160 are especially about terms used in descriptions of monophonic music[33].)

144. A phrase is a short musical thought (at least two measures in length) closing with either a complete or an incomplete cadence. The typical phrase is four measures long. The two-measure phrase is often called section. The word phrase as used in music terminology corresponds with the same word as used in language study.

144. A phrase is a brief musical idea (at least two measures long) that ends with either a complete or an incomplete cadence. The standard phrase is four measures long. A two-measure phrase is often referred to as a section. The term phrase in music terminology aligns with the same term used in language studies.

145. A period is a little piece of music typically eight measures long, either complete in itself or forming one of the clearly defined divisions of a larger form. The period (when complete in itself) is the smallest monophonic form.

145. A period is a short piece of music usually eight measures long, either a complete standalone section or part of a larger structure. The period (when it stands alone) is the smallest monophonic form.

The essential characteristic of the regular period is the fact that it usually consists of two balanced phrases (often called antecedent and consequent or thesis and antithesis), the first phrase giving rise to the feeling of incompleteness (by means of a cadence in another key, deceptive cadence, etc.,) the second phrase giving the effect of completeness by means of a definite cadence at the close.

The main feature of the regular period is that it typically includes two balanced phrases (often referred to as antecedent and consequent or thesis and antithesis), with the first phrase creating a sense of incompleteness (through a cadence in a different key, deceptive cadence, etc.) and the second phrase providing a sense of completeness with a clear cadence at the end.

The second half of the period is sometimes a literal repetition of the first half, in all respects except the cadence, but in many cases too it is a repetition of only one of the elements—rhythm, intervals, or general outline. Figs. 58 and 59 show examples of both types. The principle almost invariably holds that the simpler the music (cf. folk-tunes) the more obvious the form of the period, while the more complex the music, the less regular the period.

The second half of the period often literally repeats the first half, with the only difference being the rhythm. However, in many cases, it only repeats one of the elements—like rhythm, intervals, or the overall structure. Figs. 58 and 59 show examples of both types. The principle usually applies that the simpler the music (like folk tunes), the clearer the form of the period, while the more complex the music, the less regular the period.

 

Figs. 58-59

Figs. 58-59

 

146. The primary forms are built up by combining two or more periods.

146. The primary forms are created by combining two or more sentences.

The small two-part primary form (often called song-form or Lied-form) consists of two periods so placed that the second constitutes a consequent or antithesis to the first. The second half of this second period is often exactly the same as the second half of the first period, thus binding the two periods together into absolute unity. The theme of the choral movement of the Ninth Symphony (Beethoven) quoted below is a perfect example of this form. Other examples are "Drink to Me Only With Thine Eyes," and "The Last Rose of Summer."

The small two-part primary form (often referred to as song-form or Lied-form) consists of two sections where the second acts as a response or contrast to the first. The latter half of this second section often mirrors the latter half of the first section, creating a complete unity between the two. The theme from the choral movement of Beethoven's Ninth Symphony, which is quoted below, is a perfect example of this structure. Other examples include "Drink to Me Only With Thine Eyes" and "The Last Rose of Summer."

 

Beethoven

Beethoven

Beethoven

Beethoven

 

The small three-part primary form is like the two-part primary form except that it has a section of contrasting material interpolated between the two periods. This middle part is usually an eight-measure phrase.

The small three-part primary form is similar to the two-part primary form, but it includes a contrasting section inserted between the two phrases. This middle section is typically an eight-measure phrase.

The large two- and three-part primary forms usually have sixteen-measure periods instead of eight-measure ones, but are otherwise similar in construction.

The large two- and three-part primary forms typically have sixteen-measure sections instead of eight-measure ones, but are otherwise similar in structure.

These various primary forms are used in constructing many varieties of compositions, among them the theme and variations, the polka, the waltz, the march, etc., as well as most of the shorter movements in sonatas, quartets, etc. They are used in vocal music also, but are less apt to be regular here because the form of vocal music is largely dependent upon the structure of the text.

These different primary forms are used to create many types of compositions, including theme and variations, polka, waltz, march, and so on, as well as most of the shorter movements in sonatas, quartets, and more. They are also used in vocal music, but tend to be less consistent here because the form of vocal music is mostly influenced by the structure of the text.

147. A theme is a fragment of melody used as the subject of a fugue, as the basis of the development section in "sonata form," etc. Sometimes it is a complete tune (often in period form), on which variations are made, as e.g., in the familiar theme and variations.

147. A theme is a piece of melody used as the main idea in a fugue, as the foundation of the development section in "sonata form," etc. Sometimes it's a full tune (often in a structured format), which variations are based on, as e.g., in the well-known theme and variations.

148. Thematic development consists in taking a short theme (or several short themes) and by means of transposition, interval expansion and contraction, rhythmic augmentation and diminution, inversion, tonality changes, etc., building out of it a lengthy composition or section of a composition. Fig. 60 b, c, d, e, and f show how the theme given in Fig. 60 (a) may be varied in a few of these ways. There are hundreds of other fashions in which this same theme might be varied without destroying its identity. For other examples of thematic development see the development section of Sonata Op. 31, No. 3, as analyzed in Appendix E.

148. Thematic development involves taking a short theme (or several short themes) and using techniques like transposition, interval expansion and contraction, rhythmic augmentation and diminution, inversion, tonality changes, etc., to create a longer piece or section of a piece. Fig. 60 b, c, d, e, and f illustrate how the theme shown in Fig. 60 (a) can be altered in various ways. There are hundreds of other ways this same theme could be changed without losing its identity. For more examples of thematic development, refer to the development section of Sonata Op. 31, No. 3, as discussed in Appendix E.

 

Fig. 60

Fig. 60

Fig. 60

Fig. 60

 

For further illustrations of development in the case of this same theme, see—Christiani—The Principles of Expression in Pianoforte playing, p. 144, ff. from which the foregoing themes have been adapted.

For more examples of development related to this same theme, see—Christiani—The Principles of Expression in Pianoforte playing, p. 144, ff. from which the previous themes have been adapted.

149. A rondo is an instrumental composition (in homophonic style) in which a certain theme appears several times almost always in the same form (i.e., not thematically varied), the repetitions of this theme being separated by contrasting material.

149. A rondo is an instrumental piece (in a homophonic style) where a specific theme comes up several times, usually in the same form (i.e., not thematically varied), with these repetitions interspersed with contrasting sections.

The rondo is the oldest of the larger monophonic forms and has been used in many different ways, but perhaps its most characteristic construction is as follows: (1) Principal subject; (2) second subject in dominant key; (3) principal subject; (4) third subject; (5) first subject again; (6) second subject, in tonic key; (7) coda (or ending).

The rondo is the oldest of the larger monophonic forms and has been used in many different ways, but maybe its most typical structure is this: (1) Main theme; (2) second theme in the dominant key; (3) main theme; (4) third theme; (5) main theme again; (6) second theme, in the tonic key; (7) coda (or ending).

The student should note particularly the problem of repetition and contrast (mentioned in Sec. 134) as here worked out, as the rondo was the first monophonic form in which this matter was at all satisfactorily solved, and its construction is especially interesting because it is readily seen to be one of the direct predecessors of the highest form of all—the sonata. Examples of rondos may be found in any volume of sonatas or sonatinas.

The student should pay special attention to the issue of repetition and contrast (mentioned in Sec. 134) as it's developed here, since the rondo was the first monophonic form in which this issue was effectively addressed. Its structure is particularly interesting because it's clearly one of the direct precursors to the highest form of all—the sonata. You can find examples of rondos in any collection of sonatas or sonatinas.

150. A suite is a set of instrumental dances all in the same or in nearly related keys. The first dance is usually preceded by an introduction or prelude, and the various dances are so grouped as to secure contrast of movement—a quick dance being usually followed by a slower one.[Pg 71]

150. A suite is a collection of instrumental dances that are all in the same or closely related keys. The first dance is typically introduced by a prelude, and the different dances are arranged to create a contrast in movement—a fast dance is usually followed by a slower one.[Pg 71]

The suite is interesting to students of the development of music as being the first form in several movements to be generally adopted by composers. It retained its popularity from the beginning of the seventeenth to the end of the eighteenth centuries, being finally displaced by the sonata, whose immediate predecessor it is thus seen to be.

The suite is fascinating to music students because it was the first form in several movements that composers widely adopted. It remained popular from the early seventeenth century to the late eighteenth century, ultimately replaced by the sonata, which it is considered to have directly preceded.

The suite was formerly written for solo instrument only (harpsichord, clavichord, piano) but modern composers like Dvořák, Lachner, Moszkowski, and others have written suites for full orchestra also.

The suite was previously composed for solo instruments only (like harpsichord, clavichord, piano), but contemporary composers such as Dvořák, Lachner, Moszkowski, and others have created suites for full orchestra as well.

151. Among the dances commonly found in suites are the following:

151. Some of the dances that are typically included in suites are:

Allemande—duple or quadruple measure.

Allemande—2/4 or 4/4 time.

Bolero—triple measure.

Bolero—3/4 time.

Bourée—duple or quadruple measure.

Bourée—2/4 or 4/4 time.

Chaconne—triple measure.

Chaconne—3/4 time.

Courante—a very old dance in triple measure.

Courante—an ancient dance in three beats.

Csardas—Hungarian dance in duple or quadruple measure.

Csardas—a Hungarian dance in two or four beats.

Gavotte—quadruple measure.

Gavotte—4/4 time.

Gigue (or jig)—duple measure.

Gigue (or jig)—two beats.

Habanera—Spanish dance in triple measure.

Habanera—Spanish dance in 3/4 time.

Minuet—slow dance in triple measure.

Minuet—slow 3/4 time dance.

Mazurka—Polish dance in triple measure.

Mazurka—Polish dance in 3/4 time.

Polonaise—Polish dance in triple measure.

Polonaise—Polish dance in 3/4 time.

Rigaudon—lively dance in duple or triple measure.

Rigaudon—a lively dance in two or three beats.

Sarabande—triple measure.

Sarabande—3/4 time.

Tarantella—swift Italian dance in sextuple measure.

Tarantella—a fast Italian dance in six beats.

The allemande is especially interesting to students of music form because of its relation to the sonata, it being the prototype of the sonata-allegro (i.e., the first movement of the sonata). The sarabande and courante are likewise interesting as the prototypes of the second movement, and the bourée, minuet, etc., for their connection with the third movement.

The allemande is particularly fascinating for music students due to its connection to the sonata, as it serves as the model for the sonata-allegro (i.e., the first movement of the sonata). The sarabande and courante are also intriguing as they represent the models for the second movement, while the bourée, minuet, and others relate to the third movement.

152. The scherzo (lit. musical joke) is a fanciful instrumental composition. It was used by Beethoven as the third movement of the sonata instead of the more limited minuet, but is also often found as an independent piece.

152. The scherzo (literally, musical joke) is a playful instrumental composition. Beethoven used it as the third movement of the sonata instead of the more traditional minuet, but it is also commonly found as a standalone piece.

153. A sonata is an instrumental composition of three or more movements (usually four), the first and last of which are[Pg 72] almost always in rapid tempo. Each of these movements is a piece of music with a unity of its own, but they are all merged together in a larger whole with a broad underlying unity of larger scope. The composition receives its name from the fact that its first movement is cast in sonata-form. (See Sec. 157 for description of sonata-form.)

153. A sonata is an instrumental work that typically has three or more movements (usually four), with the first and last movements almost always performed at a fast tempo. Each of these movements is a standalone piece of music, yet they all come together to form a cohesive whole with a broader underlying unity. The piece gets its name from the first movement, which is structured in sonata-form. (See Sec. 157 for description of sonata-form.)

When the sonata has four movements, these are usually arranged as follows:

When a sonata has four movements, they are typically organized like this:

1. A quick movement (allegro, presto, etc.), often preceded by a slower introduction.

1. A fast movement (allegro, presto, etc.), usually introduced by a slower section.

2. A slow movement (largo, andante, adagio, etc.).

2. A slow movement (largo, andante, adagio, etc.).

3. A minuet or scherzo, often with a trio added, in which case the part preceding the trio is repeated after the trio is played.

3. A minuet or scherzo, often with a trio added; in that case, the section before the trio is repeated after the trio is played.

4. A quick movement—the finale, sometimes a rondo, sometimes another sonata-form, sometimes a theme with variations.

4. A quick movement—the ending, sometimes a rondo, sometimes another sonata form, sometimes a theme with variations.

These movements are all in closely related keys, but in a variety of contrasting rhythms.

These movements are all in closely related keys, but use a variety of contrasting rhythms.

154. A trio is a sonata for three instruments (such as piano, violin, and cello), while a quartet is a sonata for four instruments, the most common quartet combination being as follows: First and second violins, viola, and violoncello.

154. A trio is a sonata for three instruments (like piano, violin, and cello), while a quartet is a sonata for four instruments, with the most common quartet setup being: first and second violins, viola, and cello.

The term chamber music is often applied to instrumental music for trio, quartet, quintet, and other similar combinations which are suitable for a small room rather than for a large concert hall.

The term chamber music is often used to describe instrumental music for a trio, quartet, quintet, and other similar combinations that are more appropriate for a small room than for a large concert hall.

The words trio and quartet are also applied to vocal works for three and four voices respectively, these having no relation whatsoever to the sonata as described above. The word trio is also applied to the middle section of minuets, scherzas, marches, etc., the term originating in the old usage of writing this part for three instruments only.

The terms trio and quartet are also used for vocal pieces for three and four voices, respectively, and they have nothing to do with the sonata described earlier. The term trio is also used for the middle section of minuets, scherzos, marches, and so on, with the term coming from the original practice of composing this section for just three instruments.

155. A concerto is a sonata for a solo instrument with orchestral accompaniment, the form being usually somewhat modified so as to adapt it to a composition in which there must[Pg 73] necessarily be opportunity for a good deal of technical display. There are usually but three movements in the concerto.

155. A concerto is a sonata for a solo instrument accompanied by an orchestra. The form is typically adjusted to allow for plenty of technical showcase. There are usually three movements in the concerto.

The great majority of concertos are for piano and orchestra, but examples of concertos for violin, cello, flute, oboe, and other solo instruments (all with orchestral accompaniment) have also been written. A few modern composers have applied the term concerto to certain large organ works (with no orchestral accompaniment, the composition being written for just the one instrument), but this use of the word is so contrary to the accepted definition that it is hardly justifiable.

The vast majority of concertos are for piano and orchestra, but there are also concertos for violin, cello, flute, oboe, and other solo instruments (all featuring orchestral accompaniment). A few modern composers have used the term concerto for some large organ pieces (without orchestral accompaniment, as they're written for just that one instrument), but this usage is so out of line with the accepted definition that it’s pretty much unjustifiable.

When a concerto is played on two pianos (without orchestra), this does not mean that there is no orchestral part, but that there is no orchestra to play it, and so the parts that should be played by the orchestral instruments have simply been arranged for a second piano (sometimes organ).

When a concerto is performed on two pianos (without an orchestra), it doesn't mean that there isn't an orchestral part. It just means that there's no orchestra to play it, so the parts that would typically be played by orchestral instruments have been arranged for a second piano (or sometimes an organ).

156. A symphony is a sonata for full orchestra. In general its construction is the same as that of the sonata, but it is usually of much larger proportions and has in it much greater variety of both tonal and rhythmic material. The symphony is generally conceded to be the highest type of instrumental music ever evolved.

156. A symphony is a sonata for a full orchestra. Its structure is generally similar to that of a sonata, but it tends to be much larger in scale and features a greater variety of both tonal and rhythmic elements. The symphony is widely regarded as the highest form of instrumental music ever created.

The symphony was accepted as a standard form in the time of Haydn (1732-1809) and was developed enormously by Haydn himself, Mozart (1756-1791), and Beethoven (1770-1827), reaching perhaps its highest point in the famous "Nine Symphonies" of the last-named composer. Later symphony writers whose works are at present being performed include Schumann, Tschaikowsky, and Dvořák.

The symphony became the standard form during Haydn's time (1732-1809) and was greatly expanded by Haydn himself, along with Mozart (1756-1791) and Beethoven (1770-1827), reaching its peak in Beethoven's famous "Nine Symphonies." Contemporary symphony composers whose works are currently being performed include Schumann, Tchaikovsky, and Dvořák.

The word symphony was formerly used synonymously with ritornelle, both words being applied to instrumental interludes between parts of vocal works, but this usage has now entirely disappeared.

The word symphony used to be synonymous with ritornelle, both terms referring to instrumental breaks between sections of vocal pieces, but this usage has completely faded away.

157. Sonata-form (sometimes called sonata-allegro) is a plan for the construction of instrumental music (sonatas, quartets, symphonies, etc.), in which three rather definite divisions always occur, the third division being a more or less literal repetition of the first.

157. Sonata form (sometimes called sonata-allegro) is a structure for creating instrumental music (like sonatas, quartets, symphonies, etc.), which always includes three main sections, with the third section being a more or less exact repetition of the first.

These three parts of sonata-form with their usual subdivisions are:

These three parts of sonata form along with their typical sections are:

I. Exposition

I. Exposition

(1) Principal theme (or first subject).

(1) Main theme (or first topic).

(2) Link-episode (or modulation group).

(2) Link episode (or modulation group).

(3) Secondary theme (or song group), always in a nearly related key.

(3) Secondary theme (or song group), always in a closely related key.

(4) Closing group.

Closing group.

(5) Coda.

Coda.

II. Development Section

II. Development Section

Treating the themes introduced in the exposition in an almost infinite variety of fashions, according to the principles of thematic development. (See Sec. 148).

Treating the themes introduced in the exposition in a nearly endless variety of ways, based on the principles of thematic development. (See Sec. 148).

III. Recapitulation (or Reprise)

III. Recap (or Reprise)

Consisting essentially of the same subdivisions found in the exposition, but differing from this first section in one essential point, viz., that instead of stating the secondary theme in a related key, the entire recapitulation is in the principal key. This third section is always followed by a coda (which may either be very short or quite extended), bringing the whole movement to a more definite close.

Consisting basically of the same parts found in the exposition, but different from this first section in one key way, which is that instead of presenting the secondary theme in a related key, the whole recapitulation is in the principal key. This third section is always followed by a coda (which can be very short or quite long), bringing the entire movement to a more definite conclusion.

The second part of sonata-form (the development section) is sometimes the longest and most intricate of the three divisions, and it is at this point that the composer has an opportunity of displaying to the full his originality and inventive skill. It is principally because of this development section that the sonata is so far superior as a form to its predecessors. For an analyzed example of sonata-form, see Appendix E. The student is advised to take other sonatas and go through the first movements with a view to finding at least the three main divisions mentioned above. In some cases the form will of course be so irregular that all the parts indicated cannot be discovered, but the general outlines of the scheme will always be present.

The second part of sonata form (the development section) is often the longest and most complex of the three sections, and this is where the composer can really showcase his creativity and inventive talent. It's mainly because of this development section that the sonata form is so much better than its predecessors. For an analyzed example of sonata form, see Appendix E. Students are encouraged to take other sonatas and examine the first movements to identify at least the three main sections mentioned above. In some cases, the form may be so irregular that not all the indicated parts can be found, but the overall structure will always be present.

158. A sonatina, as its name implies, is a little sonata. It differs from the sonata proper principally in having little or no development, the second section being of slight importance as compared with the corresponding section of a sonata.

158. A sonatina, as the name suggests, is a short sonata. It mainly differs from a full sonata in having little to no development, with the second section being less significant compared to the corresponding section of a sonata.

A grand sonata is like an ordinary sonata in form, but is of unusually large dimensions.

A grand sonata is similar to a regular sonata in form, but it's significantly larger in size.

159. Program music is instrumental music which is supposed to convey to the listener an image or a succession of images that will arouse in him certain emotions which have been previously aroused in the composer's mind by some scene, event, or idea. The clue to the general idea is usually given at the beginning of the music in the form of a poem or a short description of the thing in the mind of the composer, but there are many examples in which there is no clue whatsoever except the title of the composition.

159. Program music is instrumental music designed to evoke a specific image or series of images in the listener, stirring the same emotions that inspired the composer when they encountered a scene, event, or idea. The main concept is usually introduced at the beginning of the piece through a poem or a brief description of what the composer had in mind, although there are many instances where no clue is provided other than the title of the composition.

Program music represents a mean between pure music (cf. the piano sonata or the string quartet) on the one hand, and descriptive music (in which actual imitations of bird-calls, whistles, the blowing of the wind, the galloping of horses, the rolling of thunder, etc., occur), on the other. Most program music is written for the orchestra, examples being Liszt's "The Preludes," Strauss' "Till Eulenspiegel," etc.

Program music strikes a balance between pure music (like the piano sonata or string quartet) on one side, and descriptive music (which includes actual imitations of bird calls, whistles, wind blowing, horses galloping, thunder rolling, etc.) on the other. Most program music is composed for the orchestra, with examples including Liszt's "The Preludes," Strauss' "Till Eulenspiegel," and others.

160. A symphonic poem (or tone poem) is an orchestral composition of large dimensions (resembling the symphony in size), usually embodying the program idea. It has no prescribed form and seems indeed to be often characterized by an almost total lack of design, but there are also examples of symphonic poems in which the same theme runs throughout the entire composition, being adapted at the various points at which it occurs to the particular moods expressed by the program at those points.

160. A symphonic poem (or tone poem) is a large orchestral piece that resembles a symphony in scale and usually conveys a specific theme. It doesn't follow a set structure and often appears to lack a clear design, but there are also instances where a single theme weaves through the whole composition, changing at different moments to match the moods expressed in the program at those times.

The symphonic poem was invented by Liszt (1811-1886) and has since been used extensively by Strauss, Saint-Saëns and others. It came into existence as a part of the general movement which has caused the fugue and the sonata successively to go out of fashion, viz., the tendency to invent forms which would not hamper the composer in any way, but would leave him absolutely free to express his ideas in his own individual way.

The symphonic poem was created by Liszt (1811-1886) and has since been widely adopted by Strauss, Saint-Saëns, and others. It emerged as part of the broader trend that made the fugue and sonata less popular, which is the inclination to develop forms that wouldn’t restrict the composer in any way, allowing them complete freedom to express their ideas in their unique style.


CHAPTER XVI

Terms Related to Vocal Music

161. An anthem is a sacred choral composition, usually based on Biblical or liturgical[34] words. It may or may not have an instrumental accompaniment, and is usually written in four parts, but may have five, six, eight, or more.

161. An anthem is a sacred choral piece, typically based on Biblical or liturgical[34] words. It might have instrumental support or not, and is usually composed in four parts, although it can have five, six, eight, or even more.

The word anthem is derived from antifona (or antiphona), meaning a psalm or hymn sung responsively, i.e., antiphonally, by two choirs, or by choir and congregation.

The word anthem comes from antifona (or antiphona), meaning a psalm or hymn sung in response, i.e. antiphonally, by two choirs or by a choir and the congregation.

A full anthem is one containing no solo parts; a solo anthem is one in which the solo part is predominant over the chorus, while a verse anthem is one in which the chorus parts alternate with passages for concerted solo voices (i.e., trios, quartets, etc.).

A full anthem is one without any solo parts; a solo anthem is one where the solo part stands out more than the chorus, while a verse anthem is one in which the chorus sections alternate with parts for solo voices working together (i.e., trios, quartets, etc.).

162. A capella (sometimes spelled cappella) or alla capella music is part-singing (either sacred or secular) without accompaniment.

162. A cappella (sometimes spelled cappella) or alla cappella music is singing in harmony (either religious or non-religious) without any instrumental support.

This term means literally "in chapel style," and refers to the fact that in the early days of the church all singing was unaccompanied.

This term literally means "in chapel style," referring to the fact that in the early days of the church, all singing was unaccompanied.

163. A motet is a sacred choral composition in contrapuntal style. It has no solo parts, thus corresponding to the madrigal (q.v.) in secular music. The motet is intended for a capella performance, but is often given with organ accompaniment.

163. A motet is a sacred choral piece written in a counterpoint style. It has no solo sections, similar to the madrigal (q.v.) in secular music. The motet is meant for a capella performance, but it is often performed with organ accompaniment.

164. A choral is a hymn-tune of the German Protestant Church. It is usually harmonized in four voices. The choral (sometimes spelled chorale) is described as having "a plain melody, a strong harmony, and a stately rhythm." It differs from the ordinary English and American hymn-tune in being[Pg 77] usually sung at a much slower tempo, and in having a pause at the end of each line of text.

164. A choral is a hymn tune from the German Protestant Church. It's typically arranged for four voices. The choral (sometimes spelled chorale) is characterized by "a simple melody, a strong harmony, and a dignified rhythm." It differs from regular English and American hymn tunes in being[Pg 77] usually sung at a much slower pace, and it includes a pause at the end of each line of text.

165. The mass is the liturgy for the celebration of the Lord's Supper in the service of the Roman Catholic Church. As used in the terminology of music the word refers to the six hymns which are always included when a composer writes a musical mass, and which form the basis of the celebration of the Communion.[35] These six hymns are as follows:

165. The mass is the service for celebrating the Lord's Supper in the Roman Catholic Church. In music, the term refers to the six hymns that are always included when a composer writes a musical mass, and they are the foundation of the Communion celebration.[35] These six hymns are as follows:

Kyrie.

Kyrie.

Gloria (including the Gratias agimus, Qui tollis, Quoniam, Cum Sancto Spirito).

Gloria (including the Gratias agimus, Qui tollis, Quoniam, Cum Sancto Spirito).

Credo (including the Et Incarnatus, Crucifixus, and Et Resurrexit).

Creed (including the And Became Incarnate, Crucified, and And Rose Again).

Sanctus (including the Hosanna).

Sanctus (including the Hosanna).

Benedictus.

Benedictus.

Agnus Dei (including the Dona nobis).

Agnus Dei (including the Dona nobis).

The requiem mass is the "mass for the dead" and differs considerably from the ordinary mass. Both regular and requiem masses have been written by many of the great composers (Bach, Beethoven, Verdi, Gounod), and in many cases these masses are so complex that they are not practicable for the actual service of the Church, and are therefore performed only by large choral societies, as concert works.

The requiem mass is the "mass for the dead" and is quite different from the regular mass. Many of the great composers (Bach, Beethoven, Verdi, Gounod) have written both regular and requiem masses, and often these masses are so intricate that they aren't suitable for actual Church services, so they are typically performed only by large choral groups as concert pieces.

166. A cantata is a vocal composition for chorus and soloists, the text being either sacred or secular. The accompaniment may be written for piano, organ, or orchestra.

166. A cantata is a vocal piece for choir and solo singers, with the lyrics being either religious or non-religious. The music can be accompanied by piano, organ, or an orchestra.

When sacred in character the cantata differs from the oratorio in being shorter and less dramatic, in not usually having definite characters, and in being written for church use, while the oratorio is intended for concert performance.

When it's sacred, the cantata differs from the oratorio by being shorter and less dramatic, typically not featuring specific characters, and being written for church use, while the oratorio is meant for concert performance.

When secular in subject the cantata differs from the opera in not usually having definite characters, and in being always rendered without scenery or action.

When it comes to secular themes, a cantata is different from an opera because it usually doesn't have specific characters and is always performed without scenery or action.

Examples of the sacred cantata are: Stainer's "The Crucifixion," Clough-Leighter's "The Righteous Branch," and Gaul's "The Holy City." Examples of the secular cantata are: Bruch's "Armenius," Coleridge-Taylor's "Hiawatha."

Examples of the sacred cantata are: Stainer's "The Crucifixion," Clough-Leighter's "The Righteous Branch," and Gaul's "The Holy City." Examples of the secular cantata are: Bruch's "Armenius," Coleridge-Taylor's "Hiawatha."

167. An oratorio is a composition on a large scale for chorus, soloists, and orchestra, the text usually dealing with some religious subject. The oratorio, as noted above, is not[Pg 78] intended for the church service, but is written for concert performance.

167. An oratorio is a large-scale composition for choir, soloists, and orchestra, typically focusing on a religious theme. As mentioned earlier, the oratorio is not[Pg 78] meant for church services but is created for concert performances.

168. An opera is a composition for vocal soloists, chorus, and orchestra, with characters, action, scenery, and dramatic movement. It is a drama set to music.

168. An opera is a musical work featuring singing soloists, a chorus, and an orchestra, complete with characters, a storyline, visual elements, and dramatic action. It is a story told through music.

Grand opera is opera with a serious plot, in which everything is sung, there being no spoken dialog at all.

Grand opera is opera with a serious storyline, where everything is sung, with no spoken dialogue at all.

Opera comique is a species of opera in which part of the dialog is spoken and part sung. Opera comique is not synonymous with comic opera, for the plot of opera comique is as often serious as not. In fact the entire distinction between the terms grand opera and opera comique is being broken down, the latter term referring merely to operas first given at the Opera Comique in Paris, and the former term to those given at the Grand Opera House in the same city.

Opera comique is a type of opera where some of the dialogue is spoken while other parts are sung. Opera comique is not the same as comic opera, because the story in opera comique can be serious just as often as it can be lighthearted. In fact, the distinction between grand opera and opera comique is becoming less clear, with the latter simply referring to operas that premiered at the Opera Comique in Paris, and the former referring to those performed at the Grand Opera House in the same city.

A comic opera is a humorous opera, the plot providing many amusing situations and the whole ending happily. It corresponds with the comedy in literature.

A comic opera is a funny opera, with a plot that features many entertaining situations and a happy ending. It aligns with comedy in literature.

A light opera is one with an exceedingly trivial plot, in which songs, dances, and pretty scenery contribute to the amusement of the audience. The music is lively, but usually as trivial as the plot.

A light opera features an extremely simple plot, where songs, dances, and attractive scenery add to the entertainment of the audience. The music is upbeat, but typically just as simple as the storyline.

The term music drama was used by Wagner in referring to his own operas, and is also sometimes applied to other modern operas in which the dramatic element is supposed to predominate over the musical.

The term music drama was used by Wagner to describe his own operas, and is also sometimes used for other modern operas where the dramatic aspect is meant to take precedence over the musical.

169. A libretto (lit.—little book) is the word-text of an opera, oratorio, cantata, or some other similar work.

169. A libretto (meaning "little book") is the text of an opera, oratorio, cantata, or another similar piece.

170. Recitative is a style of vocal solo common to operas, oratorios, and cantatas, especially those written some time ago. Its main characteristic is that the word-text is of paramount importance, both rhythm and tone-progression being governed by rhetorical rather than by musical considerations.

170. Recitative is a style of solo singing found in operas, oratorios, and cantatas, especially those from earlier periods. Its defining feature is that the lyrics take priority, with rhythm and melody influenced more by the flow of speech than by musical structure.

Recitative undoubtedly originated in the intoning of the priest in the ritualistic service of the Church, but when applied to the opera it became an important means of securing dramatic effects, especially in situations in which the action of the play moved along rapidly. Recitative is thus seen to be a species of musical declamation.

Recitative clearly started with the chanting of the priest during Church rituals, but when it was used in opera, it became a crucial tool for creating dramatic effects, particularly in scenes where the action unfolded quickly. Recitative is therefore recognized as a form of musical speaking.

In the early examples of recitative there was scarcely any accompaniment, often only one instrument (like the cello) being employed to play a sort of obbligato melody: when full chords were played they were not written out in the score, but were merely indicated in a more or less general way by certain signs and figures. (See "thorough-bass," p. 85, Sec. 200.)

In the early examples of recitative, there was hardly any accompaniment, typically just one instrument (like the cello) providing a kind of obbligato melody. When full chords were played, they weren't written out in the score but were instead suggested in a general way through specific signs and figures. (See "thorough-bass," p. 85, Sec. 200.)

But about the middle of the seventeenth century a slightly different style of recitative was invented, and in this type the orchestra was employed much more freely in the accompaniment, especially in the parts between the phrases of the text, but to some extent also to support the voice while singing. This new style was called recitativo stromento (i.e., accompanied recitative), while the original type was called recitativo secco (i.e., dry recitative).[Pg 79]

But around the middle of the seventeenth century, a slightly different style of recitative was created. In this version, the orchestra was used much more freely in the accompaniment, especially in the sections between the phrases of the text, and also somewhat to support the singing voice. This new style was called recitativo stromento (i.e., accompanied recitative), while the original type was known as recitativo secco (i.e., dry recitative).[Pg 79]

During the last century the style of recitative has been still further developed by Gluck and Wagner, both of whom used the orchestra as an independent entity, with interesting melodies, harmonies and rhythms all its own, while the vocal part is a sort of obbligato to this accompaniment. But even in this latest phase of recitative, it is the word-text that decides the style of both melody and rhythm in the voice part. Fig. 61 shows an example of dry recitative, taken from "The Messiah."

During the last century, the style of recitative has been further developed by Gluck and Wagner, both of whom used the orchestra as an independent element, featuring interesting melodies, harmonies, and rhythms of its own, while the vocal part acts as a sort of obbligato to this accompaniment. But even in this latest phase of recitative, it is the text that determines the style of both melody and rhythm in the vocal part. Fig. 61 shows an example of dry recitative, taken from "The Messiah."

 

Messiah

Messiah

 

171. Aria is likewise a style of vocal solo found in operas, etc., but its predominating characteristic is diametrically opposed to that of the recitative. In the aria the word-text is usually entirely subordinate to the melody, and the latter is often very ornate, containing trills, runs, etc.

171. Aria is also a type of vocal solo commonly found in operas, but its main feature is completely different from that of recitative. In the aria, the lyrics are usually secondary to the melody, which is often very elaborate, including trills, runs, and more.

The rendition of this ornate style of music is often referred to as "coloratura singing," but it should be noted that not all arias are coloratura in style.

The performance of this elaborate style of music is often called "coloratura singing," but it's important to highlight that not all arias are coloratura in style.

The familiar solos from The Messiah—"Rejoice Greatly," and "The trumpet shall sound" are good examples of the aria style.

The well-known solos from The Messiah—"Rejoice Greatly" and "The trumpet shall sound"—are great examples of the aria style.

172. A lied (Ger. = song) is a vocal solo in which the text, the melody, and the accompaniment contribute more or less equally to the effect of the whole.

172. A lied (Ger. = song) is a vocal solo where the lyrics, melody, and accompaniment all play a significant role in creating the overall effect.

Strictly speaking the word lied means "a poem to be sung," and this meaning will explain at once the difference between the lied on the one hand, and the Italian recitative and aria on the other, for in the lied the text is of great importance, but the music is also interesting, while in the recitative the text was important but the music very slight, and in the aria the text was usually inconsequential while the music held the center of interest.

Strictly speaking, the word lied means "a poem to be sung," and this meaning immediately clarifies the difference between the lied on one side and the Italian recitative and aria on the other. In the lied, the text is very important, but the music is also engaging. In contrast, in the recitative, the text was important, but the music was quite minimal, and in the aria, the text was often insignificant while the music was the main focus.

The most pronounced characteristic of the lied is the fact that it usually portrays a single mood, sentiment, or picture, thus differing from the ballad, which is narrative in style. It will be noted that this "single mood, or sentiment, or picture" was originally conceived by the poet who wrote the word-text, and that the composer in writing music to this text has first tried to get at the thought of the poet, and has then attempted to compose music which would intensify and make more vivid that thought. This intensification of the poet's thought comes as often through the rhythm, harmony, and dynamics of the accompaniment as through the expressiveness of the voice part.

The most obvious feature of the lied is that it typically expresses a single mood, feeling, or image, setting it apart from the ballad, which tells a story. It's important to recognize that this "single mood, feeling, or image" was initially created by the poet who wrote the lyrics, and the composer, when setting this text to music, aimed to capture the poet's idea and then worked to create music that would enhance and bring that idea to life. This enhancement of the poet's idea often comes from the rhythm, harmony, and dynamics of the accompaniment just as much as from the expressiveness of the vocal part.

The style of song-writing in which each verse is sung to the same tune is called the "strophe form," while that in which each verse has a different melody is often referred to as the "continuous" or "through-composed" form (Ger. durch-componiert).

The style of songwriting where each verse is sung to the same tune is called the "strophe form," while the one where each verse has a different melody is often referred to as the "continuous" or "through-composed" form (Ger. durch-componiert).

173. A ballad was originally a short, simple song, the words being in narrative style, i.e., the word-text telling a story. In the earlier ballads each verse of the poem was usually sung to the same tune (strophe form), but in the art-ballad as developed by Loewe and others the continuous style of composition is employed, this giving the composer greater opportunities of making vivid through his music the events described by the poem. These later ballads are in consequence neither "short" nor "simple" but compare in structure with the lied itself.[Pg 81]

173. A ballad was originally a short, simple song, the lyrics being in a narrative style, i.e., the text telling a story. In the earlier ballads, each verse of the poem was usually sung to the same tune (strophe form), but in the art-ballad as developed by Loewe and others, a continuous style of composition is used. This allows the composer to vividly express the events described in the poem through their music. As a result, these later ballads are neither "short" nor "simple" but are comparable in structure to the lied itself.[Pg 81]

174. A folk-song is a short song sung by and usually originating among the common people. Its dominant characteristic is usually simplicity, this applying to word-text, melody, and accompaniment (if there is one). The text of the folk-song is usually based on some event connected with ordinary life, but there are also many examples in which historical and legendary happenings are dealt with. Auld Lang Syne, and Comin' thru the Rye, are examples of folk-songs.

174. A folk-song is a short song typically sung by and originating from regular people. Its main feature is usually simplicity, which applies to the lyrics, melody, and any accompaniment (if there is one). The lyrics of a folk-song are generally based on events from everyday life, but there are also plenty of examples that focus on historical and legendary events. Auld Lang Syne and Comin' Thru the Rye are examples of folk-songs.

There has been some difference of opinion as to whether a song, the composer of which is known, can ever constitute a real folk-song: recent writers seem to be taking the sensible view of the matter, viz.: that if a song has the characteristics of a folk- rather than an art-song, and if it remains popular for some time among the common people, then it is just as much a folk-song whether the composer happens to be known or not.

There has been some disagreement over whether a song with a known composer can really be considered a folk song. Recent writers seem to have a practical perspective on this: if a song has the qualities of a folk song rather than an art song, and if it stays popular among everyday people for a while, then it is just as much a folk song whether the composer is known or not.

175. A madrigal is a secular vocal composition having from three to eight parts. It is in contrapuntal style, like the motet, and is usually sung a capella.

175. A madrigal is a non-religious vocal piece with three to eight parts. It has a contrapuntal style, similar to the motet, and is typically performed a capella.

176. A glee is a vocal composition in three or more parts, being usually more simple in style than the madrigal, and sometimes having more than one movement. The glee may be either gay or sad in mood, and seems to be a composition peculiar to the English people.

176. A glee is a vocal piece with three or more parts, usually simpler in style than a madrigal, and sometimes featuring more than one movement. The glee can have either a cheerful or a somber mood, and it appears to be a type of composition unique to the English.

177. A part-song is a composition for two or more voices, (usually four) to be sung a capella. It is written in monophonic rather than in polyphonic style, thus differing from the madrigal and glee. Morley's "Now is the Month of Maying" is an example of the part-song, as is also Sullivan's "O Hush Thee, My Baby." The term part-song is often loosely applied to glees, madrigals, etc.

177. A part-song is a composition for two or more voices, usually four, to be sung a cappella. It is written in a monophonic style instead of a polyphonic style, which makes it different from madrigals and glees. Morley's "Now is the Month of Maying" is an example of a part-song, as is Sullivan's "O Hush Thee, My Baby." The term part-song is often used loosely to refer to glees, madrigals, and so on.


CHAPTER XVII

Rhythm, Melody, Harmony, and Intervals

178. The four elements commonly attributed to music (in the order of their development) are: Rhythm, Melody, Harmony, and Timbre (or tone-color).

178. The four elements typically associated with music (in the order they developed) are: Rhythm, Melody, Harmony, and Timbre (or tone color).

179. Rhythm is the regular recurrence of accent. In music it is more specifically the regular recurrence of groups of accented and non-accented beats (or pulses)—according to some specified measure-system. Since rhythm implies continuity, there must usually be at least two such measure groups in order to make musical rhythm possible. (See p. 44, Sec. 97.)

179. Rhythm is the consistent repetition of stress. In music, it specifically refers to the regular repetition of groups of stressed and unstressed beats (or pulses)—based on a defined measure system. Since rhythm suggests continuity, there typically has to be at least two of these measure groups to create musical rhythm. (See p. 44, Sec. 97.)

180. A melody is a succession of single tones of various pitches so arranged that the effect of the whole will be unified, coherent, and pleasing to the ear.

180. A melody is a sequence of individual notes with different pitches arranged in a way that creates a unified, coherent, and pleasing sound.

The soprano part of hymn-tunes and other simple harmonized compositions is often referred to as "the melody."

The soprano part of hymn tunes and other simple harmonized compositions is often called "the melody."

181. Harmony is the science of chord construction and combination.

181. Harmony is the study of how chords are built and combined.

The term harmony refers to tones sounding simultaneously, i.e., to chords, as differentiated from tones sounding consecutively, as in melody. The word harmony may therefore be applied to any group of tones of different pitches sounded as a chord, although specifically we usually refer to a succession of such chords when we speak of "harmony." It is possible to use the same combination of tones in either melody or harmony; in fact these two elements as applied to modern music have developed together and the style of present-day melody is directly based upon the development that has recently taken place in harmonic construction.

The term harmony refers to notes that are played at the same time, i.e., to chords, as opposed to notes played one after another, like in melody. The word harmony can be used to describe any group of notes with different pitches played as a chord, but usually, we talk about a succession of these chords when discussing "harmony." You can use the same combination of notes in either melody or harmony; in fact, these two elements in modern music have developed together, and today's melodies are directly influenced by the recent advancements in harmonic structure.

Harmony (as contrasted with counterpoint) first began to be an important factor in music about 1600 A.D., i.e., at the time when opera and oratorio came into existence, when form was established, and when our modern major and minor scales were adopted. Before this practically all music was composed on a contrapuntal basis.

Harmony (as opposed to counterpoint) started to become an important element in music around 1600 A.D., i.e., when opera and oratorio were introduced, when musical form was developed, and when our modern major and minor scales were established. Before this, almost all music was composed with a contrapuntal approach.

182. Timbre is that peculiar quality of sound which enables one to distinguish a tone produced by one instrument (or[Pg 83] voice) from a tone produced by an equal number of vibrations on another instrument.

182. Timbre is the unique quality of sound that allows you to identify a tone made by one instrument (or [Pg 83] voice) from a tone made by the same number of vibrations on a different instrument.

The word timbre is synonymous with the terms quality of tone, and tone quality (Ger.—Klang-farbe), the excuse for using it being that it expresses adequately in one word an idea that in our language takes at least two: this excuse would disappear (and incidentally a much-mispronounced word would be eliminated) if the single word quality were to be adopted as the equivalent of timbre. Thus, e.g., the soprano voice singing c' has a quality different from the contralto voice singing the same tone.

The word timbre means the same as quality of tone and tone quality (Ger.—Klang-farbe). The reasoning for using it is that it effectively captures an idea that, in our language, requires at least two words. This reasoning would go away (and a commonly mispronounced word would be removed) if we simply used the word quality as a substitute for timbre. For example, the soprano voice singing c' has a quality that is different from the contralto voice singing the same note.

(The remainder of this chapter and all of Chapter XVIII deal with terms commonly encountered in the study of harmony. Courses in this subject usually begin with a study of scales, but since this subject has already been somewhat extensively treated, this chapter will omit it, and will begin with the next topic in harmony study, viz.—the interval.)

(The remainder of this chapter and all of Chapter XVIII cover terms that are commonly found in the study of harmony. Courses on this topic typically start with an exploration of scales, but since that has been discussed in detail already, this chapter will skip that part and will start with the next topic in harmony study, which is—the interval.)

183. An interval is the relation of two tones with regard to pitch. If the two tones are sounded simultaneously the result is an harmonic interval, but if sounded consecutively the result is a melodic interval. Fig. 62 represents the pitches f' and a' as a harmonic interval, while Fig. 63 represents the same pitches arranged as a melodic interval.

183. An interval is the relationship between two tones in terms of pitch. When the two tones are played at the same time, it creates a harmonic interval, but when they are played one after the other, it forms a melodic interval. Fig. 62 shows the pitches f' and a' as a harmonic interval, while Fig. 63 shows the same pitches arranged as a melodic interval.

 

Figs. 62-63

Figs. 62-63

 

184. In classifying intervals two facts should be constantly kept in mind:

184. When categorizing intervals, two important things should always be considered:

(1) The number name of the interval (third, fifth, sixth, etc.), is derived from the order of letters as found in the diatonic scale. Thus the interval C—E is a third because E is the third tone from C (counting C as one) in the diatonic scale. C—G is a fifth because G is the fifth tone above C in the diatonic scale.

(1) The number name of the interval (third, fifth, sixth, etc.) comes from the position of the notes in the diatonic scale. So, the interval C—E is a third because E is the third note from C (counting C as one) in the diatonic scale. C—G is a fifth because G is the fifth note above C in the diatonic scale.

It should be noted however that the same number-names apply even though one or both letters of the interval are qualified by sharps, flats, etc. Thus e.g., C—G is still a fifth, as are also C—G and C—G.

It’s important to note that the same number-names apply even when one or both notes in the interval are modified by sharps, flats, etc. For example, C—G is still a fifth, as are C—G and C—G.

(2) In determining the specific name of any interval (perfect fifth, major third, etc.), the half-step and whole-step (often referred to respectively as minor[Pg 84] second, and major second) are used as units of measurement.

(2) To determine the specific name of any interval (perfect fifth, major third, etc.), half-steps and whole-steps (often called minor[Pg 84] second and major second) are used as measurement units.

The half-step is usually defined as "the smallest usable interval between two tones." Thus, C—C is a half-step, as are also B—C, F—G, etc.

The half-step is typically described as "the smallest usable interval between two tones." So, C—C is a half-step, just like B—C, F—G, and so on.

A whole-step consists of two half-steps. C—D is a whole-step, as are also B—C, E—F, F—G, G—A, etc.

A whole step consists of two half steps. C—D is a whole step, as are B—C, E—F, F—G, G—A, and so on.

The expressions half-step and whole-step are much to be preferred to half-tone and whole-tone, as being more clear and definite. Thus e.g., the sentence "The two tones are a half-step apart" is much better than "The two tones are a half-tone apart."

The terms half-step and whole-step are much better than half-tone and whole-tone because they are clearer and more specific. For example, the sentence "The two tones are a half-step apart" is much more effective than saying "The two tones are a half-tone apart."

185. A prime is the relation between two tones whose pitches are properly represented by the same degree of the staff.

185. A prime is the relationship between two tones whose pitches are represented by the same line or space on the staff.

A perfect prime is one whose tones have the same pitch. Middle C sounded by piano and violin at the same time would offer an example.

A perfect prime is when two notes have the same pitch. For example, if a piano and a violin play Middle C at the same time, that would illustrate this concept.

An augmented prime is one whose second tone is one half-step higher than the first. Ex. C—C.

An augmented prime is one where the second note is a half-step higher than the first. For example, C—C.

186. A second is the relation between two tones whose pitches are properly represented by adjacent degrees of the staff. (The first line and first space are adjacent degrees, as are also the third line and fourth space.)

186. A second is the relationship between two tones whose pitches are represented by neighboring degrees of the staff. (The first line and first space are neighboring degrees, as are the third line and fourth space.)

A minor second is one comprising one half-step. Ex. B—C.

A minor second is made up of one half-step. For example, B—C.

A major second is one comprising two half-steps. Ex. B—C.

A major second consists of two half-steps. For example, B—C.

An augmented second is one comprising three half-steps. Ex. F—G.

An augmented second consists of three half-steps. For example, F—G.

187. A third is an interval comprising two seconds.

187. A third is an interval made up of two seconds.

A diminished third has two minor seconds (i.e., two half-steps). C—E♭♭.

A diminished third has two minor seconds (i.e., two half-steps). C—E♭♭.

A minor third has one minor and one major second (i.e., three half-steps). C—E.

A minor third consists of one minor second and one major second (i.e., three half-steps). C—E.

A major third has two major seconds (i.e., four half-steps). C—E.

A major third consists of two major seconds (i.e., four half-steps). C—E.

188. A fourth is an interval comprising three seconds.[Pg 85]

188. A fourth is an interval lasting three seconds.[Pg 85]

A diminished fourth has two minor and one major second. C—F.

A diminished fourth consists of two minor seconds and one major second. C—F.

A perfect fourth has one minor and two major seconds. C—F.

A perfect fourth consists of one minor second and two major seconds. C—F.

An augmented fourth (tritone) has three major seconds. C—F.

An augmented fourth (tritone) consists of three major seconds. C—F.

189. A fifth is an interval comprising four seconds.

189. A fifth is an interval that includes four beats.

A diminished fifth has two minor and two major seconds. C—G.

A diminished fifth consists of two minor seconds and two major seconds. C—G.

A perfect fifth has one minor and three major seconds. C—G.

A perfect fifth includes one minor second and three major seconds. C—G.

An augmented fifth has four major seconds. C—G.

An augmented fifth has four major seconds. C—G.

190. A sixth is an interval comprising five seconds.

190. A sixth is an interval made up of five seconds.

A minor sixth has two minor and three major seconds. C—A.

A minor sixth consists of two minor seconds and three major seconds. C—A.

A major sixth has one minor and four major seconds. C—A.

A major sixth consists of one minor and four major seconds. C—A.

An augmented sixth has five major seconds. C—A.

An augmented sixth has five major seconds. C—A.

191. A seventh is an interval comprising six seconds.

191. A seventh is an interval made up of six seconds.

A diminished seventh has three minor and three major seconds. C—B♭♭.

A diminished seventh has three minor and three major seconds. C—B♭♭.

A minor seventh has two minor and four major seconds. C—B.

A minor seventh consists of two minor seconds and four major seconds. C—B.

A major seventh has one minor and five major seconds. C—B.

A major seventh consists of one minor second and five major seconds. C—B.

192. An octave is an interval comprising seven seconds.

192. An octave is an interval that consists of seven notes.

A diminished octave has three minor and four major seconds. C—C.

A diminished octave has three minor seconds and four major seconds. C—C.

A perfect octave has two minor and five major seconds. C—C.

A perfect octave consists of two minor seconds and five major seconds. C—C.

An augmented octave has one minor and six major seconds. C—C.

An augmented octave consists of one minor second and six major seconds. C—C.

193. A ninth is usually treated as a second, a tenth as a third, etc. The interval of two octaves is often referred to as a fifteenth.[Pg 86]

193. A ninth is typically seen as a second, a tenth as a third, etc. The interval of two octaves is often called a fifteenth.[Pg 86]

194. If the major diatonic scale be written and the interval between each tone and the key-tone noted, it will be observed that the intervals are all either major or perfect. See Fig. 64.

194. If you write out the major diatonic scale and note the interval between each note and the key note, you'll see that the intervals are all either major or perfect. See Fig. 64.

 

Fig. 64

Fig. 64

 

In this connection also it will be noted that the interval next smaller than major is always minor, while that next smaller than perfect or minor is always diminished: but that the interval next larger than both major and perfect is augmented.

In this context, it's important to note that the interval just smaller than major is always minor, while the interval just smaller than perfect or minor is always diminished: however, the interval just larger than both major and perfect is augmented.

195. An interval is said to be inverted when the tone originally the upper becomes the lower. Thus C—E, a major third, inverted becomes E—C, a minor sixth.

195. An interval is said to be inverted when the tone that was originally on top moves to the bottom. For example, C—E, which is a major third, becomes E—C, a minor sixth when inverted.


CHAPTER XVIII

Chords, Cadences, and More.

196. A chord is a combination of several tones sounding together and bearing an harmonic relation to each other. The simplest chord is the triad, which consists of a fundamental tone called the root, with the third and fifth above it. C—E—G is a triad, as are also D—F—A, F—A—C, and G—B—D.

196. A chord is a group of several tones played together that have a harmonious relationship with each other. The simplest chord is the triad, which is made up of a main tone called the root, along with the third and fifth above it. C—E—G is a triad, as are D—F—A, F—A—C, and G—B—D.

197. Triads are classified as major, minor, diminished, or augmented.

197. Triads are classified as major, minor, diminished, or augmented.

A major triad has a major third and a perfect fifth, i.e., it is a major third with a minor third on top of it. Ex. C—E—G.

A major triad consists of a major third and a perfect fifth, i.e. it has a major third with a minor third placed above it. For example, C—E—G.

A minor triad has a minor third and a perfect fifth, i.e., it is a minor third with a major third on top of it. Ex. C—E—G.

A minor triad consists of a minor third and a perfect fifth, i.e. it's a minor third with a major third stacked on top. For example, C—E—G.

A diminished triad has a minor third and a diminished fifth, i.e., it is a minor third with another minor third on top of it. Ex. C—E—G.

A diminished triad consists of a minor third and a diminished fifth, i.e., it's a minor third with another minor third stacked on top. For example, C—E—G.

An augmented triad has a major third and an augmented fifth, i.e., it is a major third with another major third on top of it. Ex. C—E—G.

An augmented triad consists of a major third and an augmented fifth, i.e., it's a major third with an additional major third stacked on it. For example, C—E—G.

198. A triad may be built on any scale-tone, but those on I, IV, and V, are used so much oftener than the others that they are often called the common chords. In referring to triads the Roman numerals are used to show on what scale-tone the triad is based, the size of the numeral (with other signs) indicating the kind of triad found on each tone of the scale. Thus e.g., the large I shows that the triad on the first tone (in major) is a major triad, the small ii shows that the[Pg 88] triad on the second tone is minor, etc. The following figure will make this clear.

198. You can create a triad starting from any scale tone, but the ones based on I, IV, and V are used way more often than the others, so they’re often referred to as the common chords. When talking about triads, we use Roman numerals to indicate which scale tone the triad is built on, and the size of the numeral (along with other symbols) indicates the type of triad for each scale tone. For example, the large I shows that the triad built on the first tone (in major) is a major triad, while the small ii indicates that the[Pg 88] triad built on the second tone is minor, and so on. The following figure will clarify this.

 

Fig. 65

Fig. 65

 

The triads in the minor scale are as follows:

The triads in the minor scale are as follows:

 

minor triads

minor triads

 

199. A triad is said to be in fundamental position when its root is the lowest tone. It is said to be in the first inversion when the third is the lowest tone, and in the second inversion when the fifth is the lowest tone. Thus e.g., in Fig. 66 the same chord (C—E—G) is arranged in three different positions, at (a) in fundamental position, at (b) in the first inversion, and at (c) in the second inversion.

199. A triad is called in fundamental position when its root is the lowest note. It’s referred to as being in first inversion when the third is the lowest note, and in second inversion when the fifth is the lowest note. So, for example, in Fig. 66, the same chord (C—E—G) is shown in three different positions: at (a) in fundamental position, at (b) in the first inversion, and at (c) in the second inversion.

 

Fig. 66

Fig. 66

 

200. When the root is not the bass note, figures are sometimes used to show what chord is to be played or written. Thus, e.g., the figure 6 over a bass note means that the note given is the third of a chord, the root being found by going up a sixth from the bass note: i.e., the chord is to be sounded in its first inversion. In the same way the figures 6/4 indicate that the note given is the fifth of the chord, the root and fifth being found by going up a sixth and a fourth from the note given; i.e., the chord is to be sounded in its second inversion.[Pg 89]

200. When the root isn’t the bass note, figures are sometimes used to indicate which chord should be played or written. For example, the figure 6 above a bass note means that the note shown is the third of a chord, with the root located by moving up a sixth from the bass note: that is, the chord is to be played in its first inversion. Similarly, the figures 6/4 indicate that the note shown is the fifth of the chord, with the root and fifth found by moving up a sixth and a fourth from the note given; that is, the chord is to be played in its second inversion.[Pg 89]

The use of these and other similar figures and signs is called figured bass (or thorough bass) notation. An example of a figured bass is given in Fig. 67.

The use of these and other similar symbols and signs is called figured bass (or thorough bass) notation. An example of a figured bass is shown in Fig. 67.

 

Fig. 67

Fig. 67

 

Thorough bass notation was formerly used extensively in writing accompaniments to vocal works, the accompanist having to interpret the notes and signs given, and then to make up an interesting accompaniment as he went along. Much of Handel's music was written in this way, but in modern editions of these works the chords have been printed in full and the signs omitted.

Thorough bass notation was once widely used for writing accompaniments to vocal music, with the accompanist needing to interpret the notes and symbols provided, and then create an engaging accompaniment on the spot. A lot of Handel's music was composed this way, but in contemporary editions of these pieces, the chords have been fully written out and the symbols have been left out.

201. A seventh chord consists of a fundamental tone with its third, fifth, and seventh. The fifth is sometimes omitted. A ninth chord consists of a fundamental with its third, fifth, seventh, and ninth.

201. A seventh chord includes a root note along with its third, fifth, and seventh notes. The fifth can sometimes be left out. A ninth chord includes a root note with its third, fifth, seventh, and ninth notes.

202. A cadence is the close of a musical phrase: in melody it refers to the last two tones; in harmony to the last two chords.

202. A cadence is the end of a musical phrase: in melody, it refers to the last two notes; in harmony, to the last two chords.

The word cadence is derived from cadere, a Latin word meaning to fall, the reference being to the falling of the voice (i.e., the dropping to the normal pitch) at the close of a sentence.

The word cadence comes from cadere, a Latin term meaning to fall, referring to the lowering of the voice (i.e., dropping to the normal pitch) at the end of a sentence.

203. The most frequent cadence in harmony is that involving the chord on I preceded by the chord on V. Because of its directness the cadence V—I is called the authentic cadence.

203. The most common chord progression in harmony is moving from the V chord to the I chord. Because of its straightforwardness, the V—I progression is known as the authentic cadence.

204. The most satisfactory form (to the ear) of the authentic cadence is that in which the highest voice (the soprano) of the final chord is the root of that chord. When the final chord appears in this position the cadence is called perfect[36] authentic,[Pg 90] and when the third or fifth of the chord appear in the soprano, the cadence is called imperfect authentic. Fig. 68 shows the chord G—B—D cadencing to C—E—G in three different ways. The first one (a) is called a perfect authentic cadence, but the last two (c) and (d) are imperfect authentic.

204. The most satisfying version (to the ear) of the authentic cadence is when the highest voice (the soprano) of the final chord is the root of that chord. When the final chord is in this position, the cadence is called perfect[36] authentic,[Pg 90] and when the third or fifth of the chord is in the soprano, the cadence is called imperfect authentic. Fig. 68 shows the chord G—B—D resolving to C—E—G in three different ways. The first one (a) is called a perfect authentic cadence, but the last two (c) and (d) are imperfect authentic.

 

Fig. 68

Fig. 68

 

205. A plagal cadence is one in which the tonic chord is preceded by the sub-dominant chord (IV—I). The plagal cadence (sometimes called the church cadence, or amen cadence), like the authentic, is described as being perfect when the soprano of the tonic chord is the root of that chord, and imperfect when the soprano of the final chord is the third or fifth of that chord. Fig. 69 shows the chord F—A—C cadencing to C—E—G in three ways. The first one (a) is called a perfect plagal cadence, the last two are imperfect plagal.

205. A plagal cadence is when the tonic chord follows the sub-dominant chord (IV—I). The plagal cadence (sometimes referred to as the church cadence or amen cadence), like the authentic cadence, is termed perfect when the highest note of the tonic chord is the root of that chord, and imperfect when the highest note of the final chord is the third or fifth of that chord. Fig. 69 shows the chord F—A—C resolving to C—E—G in three ways. The first one (a) is known as a perfect plagal cadence, while the last two are imperfect plagal.

 

Fig. 69

Fig. 69

 

206. A half-cadence occurs when the dominant chord is used as the final chord of a phrase, and is immediately preceded by the tonic chord. This form is used to give variety in the course of a composition, but is not available at the end because it does not give a definite close in the tonic key. Fig. 70 shows the use of the half-cadence at the close of such a phrase.[Pg 91]

206. A half-cadence happens when the dominant chord is the last chord of a phrase and is directly preceded by the tonic chord. This approach adds variety within a composition, but it can't be used at the end since it doesn't provide a clear resolution in the tonic key. Fig. 70 demonstrates the use of the half-cadence at the end of such a phrase.[Pg 91]

 

Fig. 70. Bach

Fig. 70. Bach

 

207. A deceptive cadence is the progression of the dominant chord to some other chord than the tonic, the word deceptive implying that the ear expects to hear V resolve to I and is deceived when it does not do so. The most common form of deceptive cadence is that in which V (or V7) resolves to VI. It is used to give variety, but as in the case of the half-cadence, is not available at the end of a composition. Fig. 71 gives an example.

207. A deceptive cadence is when the dominant chord leads to a different chord instead of the tonic. The term deceptive suggests that the listener expects to hear V resolve to I and is surprised when it doesn't happen. The most common type of deceptive cadence occurs when V (or V7) resolves to VI. It's used to add variety, but like a half-cadence, it can't be used at the end of a piece. Fig. 71 provides an example.

 

Fig. 71. Wm. Mather

Fig. 71. Wm. Mather

 

208. A sequence is a succession of similar harmonic progressions, these resulting from a typical or symmetrical movement of the bass part. See Fig. 72.

208. A sequence is a series of similar harmonic progressions, which come from a typical or symmetrical movement of the bass line. See Fig. 72.

 

Fig. 72

Fig. 72

 

The word sequence is also applied to a succession of similar melodic progressions, as in Fig. 73.[Pg 92]

The term sequence is also used to refer to a series of similar melodic progressions, like in Fig. 73.[Pg 92]

 

Fig. 73

Fig. 73

 

209. Modulation is a change of key without any break in the continuity of chords or melody tones. Harmonic modulations are usually effected through the medium of a chord, some or all of whose tones are common to both keys. Examples of both harmonic and melodic modulations are shown in Figs. 74 and 75.

209. Modulation is a shift in key that happens without interrupting the flow of chords or melody. Harmonic modulations usually occur through a chord that shares some or all of its notes with both keys. You can see examples of both harmonic and melodic modulations in Figs. 74 and 75.

 

Fig. 74

Fig. 74

 

The chord most frequently used in modulating is the dominant seventh, i.e., a seventh chord (see Sec. 201) on the dominant tone of the key. In the key of C this chord is G—B—D—F; in the key of D it is A—C—E—G; in the key of A it is E—G—B—D, etc.

The chord that's most commonly used for modulation is the dominant seventh, i.e., a seventh chord (see Sec. 201) built on the dominant note of the key. In the key of C, this chord is G—B—D—F; in the key of D, it's A—C—E—G; in the key of A, it’s E—G—B—D, and so on.

 

Fig. 75

Fig. 75

 

210. A suspension is the temporary substitution of a tone a degree higher than the regular chord-tone, this temporary tone being later replaced by the regular chord-tone. See Fig. 76 (a).

210. A suspension is the temporary replacement of a tone that is one degree higher than the regular chord tone, which is later replaced by the regular chord tone. See Fig. 76 (a).

 

Fig. 76

Fig. 76

 

211. A retardation is the temporary substitution of a tone a degree lower than the regular tone, this tone (as in the case of the suspension) being later replaced by the regular chord tone. See Fig. 77 (a).

211. A retardation is the temporary replacement of a tone that is one degree lower than the usual tone, with this tone (similar to a suspension) being later replaced by the regular chord tone. See Fig. 77 (a).

 

Fig. 77

Fig. 77

 

The "regular chord tone" to which both suspension and retardation resolve is called the tone of resolution.

The "regular chord tone" that both suspension and retardation resolve to is known as the tone of resolution.

212. The anticipation is a chord-tone introduced just before the rest of the chord to which it belongs is sounded. See Fig. 78 (a).

212. The anticipation is a note that is played just before the rest of the chord it belongs to is struck. See Fig. 78 (a).

 

Fig. 78

Fig. 78

 

213. A pedal point (or organ point) is a tone sustained through a succession of harmonic progressions, to the chords of some of which it usually belongs. The term pedal point originated in organ playing, (where the foot on a pedal can sustain a tone while the hands are playing a succession of harmonies), but as now used it may be applied to any kind of music. The dominant and tonic are the tones most often used in this way. See Fig. 79.[Pg 94]

213. A pedal point (or organ point) is a note held over a series of harmonic changes, to which some of the chords usually belong. The term pedal point comes from organ playing, where the foot can hold down a note on a pedal while the hands play a series of harmonies. Now, it can be used in any type of music. The dominant and tonic notes are the ones most commonly used this way. See Fig. 79.[Pg 94]

 

Fig. 79. Schumann

Fig. 79. Schumann

 

214. When the upper three voices of a four-voice composition are written close together (the soprano and tenor never appearing more than an octave apart), the term close position is applied. But when the upper voices are not written close together, the term open position is applied.

214. When the top three parts of a four-part composition are written close together (with the soprano and tenor no more than an octave apart), it's called close position. But when the upper parts are spaced apart, it's called open position.

215. By transposition is meant playing, singing, or writing a piece of music in some other key than the original. Thus e.g., if a song written in the key of G is too high in range for a soloist, the accompanist sometimes transposes it to a lower key (as F or E), thus causing all tones to sound a second or a third lower than they did when the same song was played in the original key.

215. By transposition, we mean playing, singing, or writing a piece of music in a different key than the original. For example, if a song written in the key of G is too high for a soloist, the accompanist might transpose it to a lower key (like F or E), making all the notes sound a second or a third lower than when the song was played in the original key.


CHAPTER XIX

Other Terms

A battuta—with the beat; in strict rhythm.

A battuta—with the beat; in strict rhythm.

À quatre mains—for four hands.

For four hands.

Accompagnamento—the accompaniment.

Accompaniment.

All'unisono—in unison.

In unison.

Alla breve—2/2 measure.

Cut time—2/2 measure.

The term alla breve is also sometimes used as a tempo indication, to show a rate of speed so great that a half-note has a beat, i.e., only two beats in a measure—hence twice as fast as before.

The term alla breve is also sometimes used as a tempo indication to show a speed so fast that a half note counts as a beat, i.e., only two beats per measure—so it’s twice as fast as before.

Alla capella—usually the same as a capella (see p. 76, Sec. 162) but sometimes used in the same sense as alla breve.

Alla capella—usually the same as a capella (see p. 76, Sec. 162) but sometimes used in the same way as alla breve.

Alla marcia—in march style.

Marching style.

Alla zingara—in gypsy style.

Alla zingara—in gypsy vibe.

Alt—see in alt.

Alt—see in alt.

Alto—the lowest female voice. Range approximately g-e''.

Alto—the lowest female voice. Range approximately G to E''.

The word alto is derived from the Latin word altus, meaning high, the term being formerly applied to the highest male voice, which originally sang (and still does so in many male choirs) the alto part.

The word alto comes from the Latin word altus, which means high. This term was originally used for the highest male voice, which originally sang (and continues to sing in many male choirs) the alto part.

Animato come sopra—in animated style as above.

Play lively like before—in animated style as above.

Antiphony (antiphonal)—the responsive singing of two choirs, usually one at either end of the church, or at either side of the chancel.

Antiphony (antiphonal)—the call-and-response singing of two choirs, typically one at each end of the church, or on either side of the chancel.

Arabesque—an instrumental composition in light, somewhat fantastic style.

Arabesque—a light, somewhat whimsical instrumental piece.

The term arabesque is derived from the word Arabian, and was originally applied to a style of decoration.

The term arabesque comes from the word Arabian and was first used to describe a style of decoration.

Arioso—in the style of an air or song, i.e., a flowing, vocal style.

Arioso—in the style of a melody or song, i.e., a smooth, lyrical style.

Attacca—attack the next division without any pause.

Attacca—launch an attack on the next division without stopping.

Attacca subito—same as attacca.

Attack immediately—same as attack.

Attacca subito il seguente—attack at once that which follows.

Attack subito il seguente—attack immediately what comes next.

Attack—the promptness or firmness with which a phrase is begun.

Attack—the quickness or confidence with which a phrase is started.

Bagpipe—A Scotch instrument on which the tone is produced by a combination of bellows and reeds. Its characteristic effect is the continuous sounding of a low tone (sometimes several tones) while the melody is being played on the higher reeds.

Bagpipe—A Scottish instrument that produces sound through a combination of bellows and reeds. Its distinctive feature is the continuous low tone (sometimes multiple tones) played while the melody is performed on the higher reeds.

Barcarole (or barcarolle)—a boat song. Also applied to a vocal or instrumental composition in the style of the gondolier's boat song.

Barcarole (or barcarolle)—a song sung by boatmen. It’s also used to describe a vocal or instrumental piece that resembles the style of a gondolier's song.

Baritone (or barytone)—the male voice having a range between that of the tenor and that of the bass. Approximate range G-g'.

Baritone (or barytone)—the male voice with a range that sits between the tenor and the bass. Approximate range G-g'.

Bass—the lowest male voice. Approximate range E-e'.

Bass—the lowest male voice. Approximate range E-e'.

Basso—same as bass.

Basso — same as bass.

Berceuse—a cradle song.

Berceuse—a lullaby.

Binary form—a form in two parts.

Binary form—a structure that consists of two sections.

Binary measure—a measure having two beats.[Pg 96]

Binary measure—a measurement with two beats.[Pg 96]

Bis—twice. Used to indicate a repetition. (Rare.)

Bis—twice. Used to show something is repeated. (Rare.)

Brace—the sign used to join several staffs, showing that all tones represented on these staffs are to be performed together. The term is often used also in referring to the music written on staffs so joined; as—"Begin with the upper brace."

Brace—the mark used to connect multiple staffs, indicating that all notes shown on these staffs should be played together. The term is also commonly used to refer to the music written on the connected staffs; for example, "Start with the upper brace."

Broken chord—a chord whose tones are not all sounded simultaneously, as e.g., in an accompaniment group.

Broken chord—a chord where not all the notes are played at the same time, like in an e.g. accompaniment group.

Broken octave—an octave whose tones are sounded one at a time instead of simultaneously.

Broken octave—an octave where the notes are played one at a time instead of all together.

Cacophony—harsh, discordant, unpleasant, especially incorrect combinations of tones. The opposite of euphony.

Cacophony—loud, jarring, and unpleasant sounds, especially wrong combinations of tones. The opposite of euphony.

Cadenza—A brilliant passage, usually in an instrumental composition, introduced just before the close of a movement. The cadenza was formerly improvised by the performer, (thus giving an opportunity of displaying his technical skill), but since Beethoven, composers have usually written their own cadenzas.

Cadenza—A brilliant section, typically found in an instrumental piece, introduced just before the end of a movement. The cadenza used to be improvised by the performer, showcasing their technical skill, but since Beethoven, composers have generally written their own cadenzas.

Cantabile—in a singing style.

Cantabile—in a melodic style.

Cantando—same as cantabile.

Cantando—same as cantabile.

Canto—the highest voice part; i.e., the soprano part.

Canto—the highest vocal part; i.e., the soprano part.

Note the derivation of canto, cantabile, etc., from the Latin word cantus, meaning a song.

Note the derivation of canto, cantabile, etc., from the Latin word cantus, meaning a song.

Carol—a hymn of joyful praise, usually sung in connection with Easter or Christmas festivities. The word carol meant originally a dance, hence the happy character of songs of this type.

Carol—a song of joyful celebration, typically sung during Easter or Christmas festivities. The word carol originally meant a dance, which is why these songs have a happy vibe.

Catch—a round set to humorous words.

Catch—a round filled with funny words.

Chromatic (noun)—a term somewhat loosely applied to any tone not belonging to the key as indicated by the signature. Many teachers are replacing the word chromatic in this sense with the term intermediate tone, this term being applicable whether the foreign tone is actually used for ornamental purposes as a chromatic, or to effect a modulation. Thus e.g., "F is the intermediate tone between F and G in the key of C."

Chromatic (noun)—a term that’s somewhat loosely used to describe any tone that doesn’t fit the key indicated by the signature. Many teachers are now using the term intermediate tone instead of chromatic, as this term applies whether the foreign tone is used for decorative purposes like a chromatic or to create a modulation. So, for example, "F is the intermediate tone between F and G in the key of C."

Clavichord—an instrument with keys, resembling the square piano in appearance. The tone was produced by forcing wedge-shaped pieces of metal against the strings, thus setting them in vibration. The clavichord was one of the immediate predecessors of the piano, much of the music written by Bach being composed for it, although this music is now played on the modern piano.

Clavichord—an instrument with keys that looks like a square piano. The sound was created by pushing wedge-shaped metal pieces against the strings, which made them vibrate. The clavichord was one of the direct predecessors of the piano, and much of Bach's music was written for it, though this music is now played on the modern piano.

Colla voce—with the voice: i.e., play the accompaniment according to the soloist's performance rather than strictly according to the rhythm indicated in the score.

Colla voce—with the voice: i.e., play the accompaniment based on the soloist's performance instead of strictly following the rhythm shown in the score.

Colla parte—same as colla voce.

Colla parte—same as colla voce.

Coloratura—florid passages in singing. Also applied to the style of singing employed in rendering such passages. (See p. 76, Sec. 171.)

Coloratura—ornate sequences in singing. It's also used to describe the singing style used to perform these sequences. (See p. 76, Sec. 171.)

Consonance—A combination of tones agreeable to the ear and requiring no resolution to other tone-combinations in order to give the effect of finality. The major triad C—E—G is an example of a consonant chord.

Consonance—A blend of notes that sounds pleasant and doesn't need to resolve into other combinations to feel complete. The major triad C—E—G is an example of a consonant chord.

Contralto—same as alto.

Contralto—same as alto.

Con variazioni—with variations.

With variations.

Direct—a sign (direct) placed at the end of the last staff on a page, to indicate what the first note on the next page is going to be. This sign is now practically obsolete.[Pg 97]

Direct—a sign (direct) positioned at the end of the last staff on a page, to show what the first note on the next page will be. This sign is now mostly obsolete.[Pg 97]

Dirge—a funeral chant. The dirge is named from the first word of a chant used in the "office for the dead," which begins—Dirige Domine, Deus meus, in conspectu tuo viam meam (Direct, O Lord, My God, my way in Thy sight).

Dirge—a funeral song. The dirge gets its name from the first word of a chant used in the "office for the dead," which begins—Dirige Domine, Deus meus, in conspectu tuo viam meam (Direct, O Lord, My God, my way in Your sight).

Discord—an ugly, unharmonious combination of tones.

Discord—a harsh, jarring mix of sounds.

Dissonance—a harmonic combination of tones giving rise to the feeling of incompleteness or unrest, and therefore requiring resolution to some other combination which has an agreeable or final feeling. (cf. consonance.) The diminished triad C—E—G is an example of a dissonant chord.

Dissonance—a combination of tones that creates a sense of incompleteness or tension, which needs to resolve into another combination that feels pleasing or final. (cf. consonance.) The diminished triad C—E—G is an example of a dissonant chord.

Divisi—divided. An indication showing that the first violins, or the sopranos, or any other body of performers ordinarily sounding in unison are now to divide into two or more parts.

Divisi—divided. This indicates that the first violins, sopranos, or any other group of performers that usually play together are now supposed to split into two or more parts.

Duet—a composition for two performers. (From the It. word due—two.)

Duet—a piece created for two performers. (From the Italian word due—two.)

École—a school or style of composition or performance.

École—a school or approach to composing or performing.

Etude—a study. Also an instrumental composition in the style of a study, but intended for artistic performance.

Etude—a study. It’s also an instrumental piece designed like a study but meant for artistic performance.

Euphony—agreeable tone combinations; the opposite of cacophony. (From the Greek word meaning well-sounding.)

Euphony—pleasant combinations of sounds; the opposite of cacophony. (From the Greek word meaning well-sounding.)

Facile—easy.

Easy.

Fanfare—a trumpet call.

Fanfare—a trumpet signal.

Fantasia—An instrumental composition not based on any regular form.

Fantasia—An instrumental piece that doesn’t follow any standard structure.

Fiasco—a complete failure or breakdown.

Fiasco—total failure or breakdown.

This use of the word fiasco (which means in Italian a flask, or bottle) is said to have reference to the bursting of a bottle, the complete ruin of the bottle being compared with the complete failure of a performance.

This use of the word fiasco (which means a flask or bottle in Italian) is said to refer to a bottle bursting, with the total destruction of the bottle compared to the total failure of a performance.

Gamut—all the tones of a scale.

Gamut—all the notes of a scale.

Glissando—playing a scale on the keyboard by drawing the finger along over the keys, thus depressing them in very rapid succession. The word is derived from the French word glisser—to glide.

Glissando—playing a scale on the keyboard by sliding your finger across the keys, quickly pressing them one after the other. The term comes from the French word glisser—to glide.

Harpsichord—one of the immediate predecessors of the piano.

Harpsichord—one of the direct predecessors of the piano.

Humoresque—a capricious, fantastic composition. (Cf. fantasia.)

Humoresque—a whimsical, imaginative piece. (Cf. fantasia.)

Idyl—a short, romantic piece of music in simple and unaffected style.

Idyl—a brief, romantic piece of music that is straightforward and genuine.

In alt—pitches in the first octave above the treble staff. Thus e.g., "C in alt" is the C represented by the second added line above the treble staff.

In alt—pitches in the first octave above the treble staff. Thus e.g., "C in alt" is the C represented by the second added line above the treble staff.

In altissimo—pitches in the octave above the alt octave.

In altissimo—notes in the octave above the alt octave.

Instrumentation—see orchestration.

Instrumentation—see orchestration.

Interlude—a short movement between two larger movements.

Interlude—a brief section between two larger parts.

Loco—place; i.e., play as written. (See p. 15, Sec. 46.)

Loco—location; i.e., performance as written. (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Lunga trillo—a long trill.

Lunga trillo—a long trill.


CHAPTER XX

Miscellaneous Terms (Continued)

Lyric—a short, song-like poem of simple character. Also applied to instrumental pieces of like character.

Lyric—a brief, song-like poem with a straightforward nature. This term is also used for instrumental pieces of a similar style.

Maggiore—major.

Maggiore—major.

Marcato il canto—the melody well marked; i.e., subdue the accompaniment so that the melody may stand out strongly.

Marcato il canto—the melody clearly defined; i.e., tone down the accompaniment so that the melody can be prominent.

Melos—melody. This word melos is also applied to the peculiar style of vocal solo found in Wagner's music dramas. See recitative (p. 75, Sec. 170).

Melos—melody. This term melos is also used to describe the unique style of vocal solo present in Wagner's music dramas. See recitative (p. 75, Sec. 170).

Mellifluous—pleasing; pleasant sounding.

Mellifluous—sweet-sounding; enjoyable.

Menuetto, menuet—same as minuet. (See p. 68, Sec. 151.)

Menuetto, menuet—the same as minuet. (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

Mezzo soprano—a woman's voice of soprano quality, but of somewhat lower compass than the soprano voice. Range approximately b to g''.

Mezzo soprano—a woman's voice that has soprano qualities but is somewhat lower in range than a soprano. The range is roughly b to g''.

Minore—minor.

Minore—minor.

Nocturne (sometimes spelled nocturn, notturna, nokturne, etc.)—a night piece; a quiet, melodious, somewhat sentimental composition, usually for piano solo.

Nocturne (sometimes spelled nocturn, notturna, nokturne, etc.)—a night piece; a calm, melodic, slightly sentimental composition, typically for solo piano.

Nuance—delicate shading; subtle variations in tempo and dynamics which make the rendition of music more expressive.

Nuance—fine shading; subtle changes in speed and volume that make music performance more expressive.

Obbligato (sometimes incorrectly spelled obligato)—an accessory melody accompanying harmonized music, (usually vocal music).

Obbligato (sometimes misspelled as obligato)—a secondary melody that supports harmonized music, usually in vocal pieces.

The word obbligato (It. bound, or obliged) refers to the fact that this is usually a melody of independent value, so important that it cannot be omitted in a complete performance.

The term obbligato (It. bound, or obliged) refers to the idea that this is typically a melody of significant value, so essential that it cannot be left out in a full performance.

Offertory (sometimes spelled offertoire, or offertorium)—a piece of music played or sung during the taking up of the offering in the church service. The word is often applied by composers to any short, simple piece of music (usually for organ) that is suitable for the above purpose.

Offertory (sometimes spelled offertoire or offertorium)—a piece of music played or sung during the collection of the offering in a church service. The term is often used by composers to refer to any short, simple piece of music (usually for organ) that fits this purpose.

Opus—work; used by composers to designate the order in which their compositions were written, as e.g., Beethoven, Op. 2, No. 1.

Opus—work; used by composers to indicate the sequence in which their compositions were created, such as e.g., Beethoven, Op. 2, No. 1.

Orchestration—the art of writing for the orchestra, this implying an intimate knowledge of the range, quality, and possibilities of all the orchestral instruments.

Orchestration—the skill of composing for the orchestra, which requires a deep understanding of the range, quality, and capabilities of all the orchestral instruments.

Ossia—or else; used most often to call the attention of the performer to a simpler passage that may be substituted for the original one by a player whose skill is not equal to the task he is attempting to perform.

Ossia—or alternatively; used mostly to direct the performer’s attention to an easier section that can replace the original one if a player’s skill doesn’t match the demands of the piece they are trying to play.

Overture—(from overt—open)—an instrumental prelude to an opera or oratorio. The older overtures were independent compositions and bore no particular relation to the work which was to follow, but in modern music (cf. Wagner, Strauss, etc.), the overture introduces the principal themes that are to occur in the work itself, and the introduction thus becomes an integral part of the work as a whole. The word overture is sometimes applied to independent orchestral compositions that have no connection with vocal works, as the Hebrides Overture by Mendelssohn.[Pg 99]

Overture—(from overt—open)—an instrumental introduction to an opera or oratorio. The earlier overtures were standalone pieces and didn’t have any specific connection to the following work, but in modern music (see Wagner, Strauss, etc.), the overture presents the main themes that will appear in the actual piece, making the introduction a key part of the entire work. The term overture is also used for standalone orchestral pieces that aren't linked to vocal works, like the Hebrides Overture by Mendelssohn.[Pg 99]

Pizzicato—plucked. A term found in music for stringed instruments, and indicating that for the moment the bow is not to be used, the tone being secured by plucking the string.

Pizzicato—plucked. This is a term used in music for stringed instruments, indicating that, for the time being, the bow should not be used, and the sound is produced by plucking the string.

Polacca—a Polish dance in three-quarter measure.

Polacca—a Polish dance in 3/4 time.

Polonaise—same as polacca.

Polonaise—same as polacca.

Postlude—(lit. after-play)—an organ composition to be played at the close of a church service.

Postlude—(literally, after-play)—an organ piece performed at the end of a church service.

Prelude—(lit. before-play)—an instrumental composition to be played at the beginning of a church service, or before some larger work (opera, etc.). The term is also applied to independent piano compositions of somewhat indefinite form. (Cf. preludes by Chopin, Rachmaninoff, etc.)

Prelude—(literally, before the play)—is an instrumental piece meant to be played at the start of a church service or before a larger work (like an opera, etc.). The term also refers to standalone piano compositions with a somewhat vague structure. (See preludes by Chopin, Rachmaninoff, etc.)

Prière—a prayer; a term often applied (especially by French composers) to a quiet, devotional composition for organ.

Prière—a prayer; a term often used (especially by French composers) for a calm, devotional piece for organ.

Quintole, quintuplet—a group of five notes to be performed in the time ordinarily given to four notes of the same value. There is only one accent in the group, this occurring of course on the first of the five tones.

Quintole, quintuplet—a set of five notes played in the time typically assigned to four notes of the same value. There's only one accent in the group, which naturally falls on the first of the five tones.

Religioso, religiosamente—in a devotional style.

Religious, in a devotional style.

Requiem—the mass for the dead in the Roman Catholic service. It is so called from its first word requiem which means rest. (See p. 77, Sec. 165.)

Requiem—the mass for the dead in the Roman Catholic service. It's named after its first word requiem, which means rest. (See p. 77, Sec. 165.)

Rhapsody—an irregular instrumental composition of the nature of an improvisation. A term first applied by Liszt to a series of piano pieces based on gypsy themes.

Rhapsody—a free-form instrumental piece resembling an improvisation. The term was first used by Liszt to describe a collection of piano works inspired by gypsy themes.

Ribattuta—a device in instrumental music whereby a two-note phrase is gradually accelerated, even to the extent of becoming a trill. (See Appendix E, p. 150, for an example.)

Ribattuta—a technique in instrumental music where a two-note phrase gradually speeds up, even to the point of turning into a trill. (See Appendix E, p. 150, for an example.)

Ritornello, ritornelle—a short instrumental prelude, interlude, or postlude, in a vocal composition, as e.g., in an operatic aria or chorus.

Ritornello, ritornelle—a brief instrumental introduction, middle section, or ending in a vocal piece, like in an operatic aria or chorus.

Schottische—a dance in two-quarter measure, something like the polka.

Schottische—a dance in 2/4 time, similar to the polka.

Sec, secco—dry, unornamented: applied to a style of opera recitative (see p. 75, Sec. 170), and also to some particular chord in an instrumental composition which is to be sounded and almost instantly dropped.

Sec, secco—dry, unembellished: used to describe a style of opera recitative (see p. 75, Sec. 170), and also refers to a specific chord in an instrumental piece that is played and then almost immediately released.

Score—a term used in two senses:

Score—a term used in two ways:

1. To designate some particular point to which teacher or conductor wishes to call attention; as e.g., "Begin with the lower score, third measure." The word brace is also frequently used in this sense.

1. To point out a specific spot that the teacher or conductor wants to highlight; for example, "Start with the lower score, third measure." The term brace is also often used in this way.

2. To refer to all the parts of a composition that are to be performed simultaneously, when they have been assembled on a single page for use by a chorus or orchestral conductor. The term vocal score usually means all chorus parts together with an accompaniment arranged for piano or organ, while the terms full score and orchestral score refer to a complete assemblage of all parts, each being printed on a separate staff, but all staffs being braced and barred together.

2. This refers to all the parts of a piece that are performed at the same time, when they’ve been put together on a single page for a choir or orchestra conductor to use. The term vocal score usually means all the choir parts along with an accompaniment arranged for piano or organ, while the terms full score and orchestral score refer to a complete collection of all parts, each printed on a separate staff, but all staffs are connected and organized together.

Senza replica, senza repetizione—without repetition; a term used in connection with such indications as D.C., D.S., etc., which often call for the repetition of some large division of a composition, the term senza replica indicating that the smaller repeats included within the larger division are not to be observed the second time.

Senza replica, senza repeat—without repetition; a term used in connection with indications like D.C., D.S., etc., which often require repeating a major section of a composition. The term senza replica indicates that the smaller repeats included within the larger section should not be played again the second time.

Serenade, serenata—an evening song.

Serenade, serenata—a night song.

Sextet—a composition for six voices or instruments.[Pg 100]

Sextet—a piece for six voices or instruments.[Pg 100]

Sextuplet—a group of six notes to be performed in the time ordinarily given to four of the same value. The sextuplet differs from a pair of triplets in having but one accent.

Sextuplet—a group of six notes played in the time usually used for four notes of the same value. The sextuplet is different from a pair of triplets because it has only one accent.

Simile, similiter—the same; indicating that the same general effect is to be continued.

Simile, similiter—the same; indicating that the same general effect will continue.

Solfeggio, solfège—a vocal exercise sung either on simple vowels or on arbitrary syllables containing these simple vowel sounds. Its purpose is to develop tone quality and flexibility. These terms are also often applied to classes in sight-singing which use the sol-fa syllables.

Solfeggio, solfège—a vocal exercise performed using basic vowels or random syllables that include these simple vowel sounds. The aim is to improve tone quality and flexibility. These terms are also frequently used for sight-singing classes that utilize the sol-fa syllables.

Sopra—above.

Above—overhead.

Soprano—the highest female voice. Range approximately b—c'''.

Soprano—the highest female voice. Range approximately B to C'''.

Sostenuto—sustained or connected; the opposite of staccato.

Sostenuto—held or linked; the opposite of staccato.

Sotto—under. E.g., sotto voce—under the voice, i.e., with subdued tone.

Sotto—under. E.g., sotto voce—under the voice, i.e., in a quiet tone.

Solmization—sight-singing by syllable.

Solmization—sight-singing using syllables.

Staccato—detached; the opposite of legato.

Staccato—disconnected; the opposite of legato.

Subito—suddenly.

Suddenly—suddenly.

Tenor—the highest male voice. Range approximately d—c''.

Tenor—the highest male voice. Range is approximately d to c''.

Tenuto—(from teneo, to hold)—a direction signifying that the tones are to be prolonged to the full value indicated by the notes.

Tenuto—(from teneo, to hold)—a term indicating that the notes should be held for their full value as indicated.

Toccata—a brilliant composition for piano or organ, usually characterized by much rapid staccato playing.

Toccata—a flashy piece for piano or organ, typically featuring a lot of quick staccato playing.

Triplet—a group of three tones, to be performed in the time ordinarily given to two of the same value. The first tone of the triplet is always slightly accented.

Triplet—a set of three notes played in the time usually allocated for two notes of the same value. The first note of the triplet is always given a slight accent.

Tutti—(derived from totus, toti, Latin—all)—a direction signifying that all performers are to take part. Also used occasionally to refer to a passage where all performers do take part.

Tutti—(derived from totus, toti, Latin—all)—a term indicating that all performers are to participate. It is also sometimes used to describe a section where all performers are involved.


APPENDIX A

The Evolution of Music Notation

Many conflicting statements have been made regarding the history and development of music writing, and the student who is seeking light on this subject is often at a loss to determine what actually did happen in the rise of our modern system of writing music. We have one writer for example asserting that staff notation was begun by drawing a single red line across the page, this line representing the pitch f (fourth line, bass staff), the neumae (the predecessors of our modern notes) standing either for this pitch f, or for a higher or lower pitch, according to their position on the line, or above or below it. "Another line," continues this writer, "this time of yellow color, was soon added above the red one, and this line was to represent c' (middle C). Soon the colors of these lines were omitted and the letters F and C were placed at the beginning of each of them. From this arose our F and C clefs, which preceded the G clef by some centuries."[37]

Many conflicting statements have been made about the history and development of music notation, and students looking for clarity on this topic often struggle to figure out what actually happened in the evolution of our modern system of writing music. One writer claims, for instance, that staff notation began with a single red line drawn across the page to represent the pitch f (the fourth line of the bass staff), with the neumae (the predecessors of our modern notes) either denoting this pitch f or a higher or lower pitch, depending on their position on the line or above or below it. "Another line," this writer continues, "this time in yellow, was soon added above the red one, representing c' (middle C). Eventually, the colors of these lines were dropped, and the letters F and C were placed at the beginning of each line. This led to the development of our F and C clefs, which came before the G clef by several centuries."[37]

Another writer[38] gives a somewhat different explanation, stating that the staff system with the use of clefs came about through writing a letter (C or F) in the margin of the manuscript and drawing a line from this letter to the neume which was to represent the tone for which this particular letter stood.

Another writer[38] offers a slightly different explanation, saying that the staff system with clefs developed by writing a letter (C or F) in the margin of the manuscript and drawing a line from this letter to the neume that was meant to represent the tone associated with that letter.

A third writer[39] asserts that because the alphabetical notation was not suitable for recording melodies because of its[Pg 102] inconvenience in sight-singing "points were placed at definite distances above the words and above and below one another." "In this system ... everything depended on the accuracy with which the points were interspersed, and the scribes, as a guide to the eye, began to scratch a straight line across the page to indicate the position of one particular scale degree from which all the others could be shown by the relative distances of their points. But this was not found sufficiently definite and the scratched line was therefore colored red and a second line was added, colored yellow, indicating the interval of a fifth above the first."

A third writer[39] argues that the alphabetical notation wasn't effective for writing down melodies due to its[Pg 102] challenges in sight-singing. So, "points were placed at specific distances above the words and stacked above and below each other." "In this system ... everything relied on how accurately the points were spaced, and the scribes, as a reference for the eye, began to draw a straight line across the page to show the position of one particular scale degree, from which all the others could be displayed by the relative distances of their points. However, this wasn't considered clear enough, so the scratched line was colored red, and a second line was added in yellow, showing the interval of a fifth above the first."

It will be noted that all three writers agree that a certain thing happened, but as in the case of the four Gospels in the New Testament, not all the writers agree on details and it is difficult to determine which account is most nearly accurate in detail as well as in general statement. Communication was much slower a thousand years ago than now and ideas about new methods of doing things did not spread rapidly, consequently it is entirely possible that various men or groups of men in various places worked out a system of notation differing somewhat in details of origin and development but alike in final result. The point is that the development of musical knowledge (rise of part-writing, increased interest in instrumental music, etc.), demanded a more exact system of notation than had previously existed, just as the development of science in the nineteenth century necessitated a more accurate scientific nomenclature, and in both cases the need gave rise to the result as we have it to-day.

It’s important to note that all three writers agree that something specific happened, but just like with the four Gospels in the New Testament, they don’t all agree on the details. It’s tough to figure out which account is the most accurate in both specifics and general statements. Communication was much slower a thousand years ago than it is today, and new ideas didn’t spread quickly. Therefore, it’s entirely possible that different individuals or groups in various locations developed a notation system that varied slightly in its origin and evolution, yet produced similar outcomes. The key point is that the growth of musical knowledge (like the rise of part-writing and a greater interest in instrumental music) required a more precise notation system than what was available before. This is similar to how the advancement of science in the nineteenth century demanded a more accurate scientific terminology, and in both cases, the necessity led to the results we see today.

Out of the chaos of conflicting statements regarding the development of music notation, the student may glean an outline-knowledge of three fairly distinct periods or stages, each of these stages being intimately bound up with the development of music itself in that period. These three stages are:[Pg 103]

Out of the confusion of conflicting statements about the evolution of music notation, the student can piece together a basic understanding of three distinct periods or stages. Each of these stages is closely linked to the development of music itself during that time. These three stages are:[Pg 103]

(1) The Greek system, which used the letters of the alphabet for representing fixed pitches.

(1) The Greek system used letters from the alphabet to represent fixed musical pitches.

(2) The period of the neumae.

(2) The time of the neumae.

(3) The period of staff notation.

(3) The time of staff notation.

Of the Greek system little is known beyond the fact that the letters of the alphabet were used to represent pitches. This method was probably accurate enough, but it was cumbersome, and did not afford any means of writing "measured music" nor did it give the eye any opportunity of grasping the general outline of the melody in its progression upward and downward, as staff notation does. The Greek system seems to have been abandoned at some time preceding the fifth century. At any rate it was about this time that certain accent marks began to be written above the text of the Latin hymns of the church, these marks serving to indicate in a general way the progress of the melody. E.g., an upward stroke of the pen indicated a rise of the melody, a downward stroke a fall, etc. In the course of two or three centuries these marks were added to and modified quite considerably, and the system of notation which thus grew up was called "neume notation," the word neume (sometimes spelled neuma, or pneuma) being of Greek origin and meaning a nod or sign.

Of the Greek system, not much is known except that the letters of the alphabet were used to represent musical pitches. This method was probably accurate enough, but it was awkward and didn't allow for writing "measured music," nor did it help visualize the overall shape of a melody as it moved up and down, like staff notation does. The Greek system seems to have been dropped sometime before the fifth century. At least, it was around this time that certain accent marks started to be written above the text of Latin hymns in the church, which helped indicate the general movement of the melody. For example, an upward stroke of the pen signified a rise in the melody, while a downward stroke meant a fall, and so on. Over the course of two or three centuries, these marks were significantly added to and modified, leading to the development of a notation system known as "neume notation." The word neume (sometimes spelled neuma or pneuma) comes from Greek and means a nod or sign.

This system of neumes was in some ways a retrogression from the Greek letter system, for the neumes indicated neither definite pitches nor definite tone-lengths. But it had this advantage over the Greek system, that the position of the signs on the page indicated graphically to the eye the general direction of the melody, as well as giving at least a hint concerning the relative highness or lowness of each individual tone (the so-called diastematic system), and this was a great aid to the eye in singing, just as the relative highness and lowness of notes on the modern staff is of great value in reading music at the present time. Thus although the neumae did not enable one to sing a new melody at sight as our[Pg 104] modern staff notation does, yet they served very well to recall to the eye the general outline of a melody previously learned by ear and therefore enabled the singer (the system was used for vocal music only) to differentiate between that particular melody and the dozens of others which he probably knew. Neume notation was used mostly in connection with the "plain-song melodies" of the Church, and since the words of these chants were sung as they would be pronounced in reading, the deficiency of the neume system in not expressing definite duration values was not felt. But later on with the rise of so-called "measured music" (cf. invention of opera, development of independent instrumental music, etc.), this lack was seen to be one of the chief disadvantages of the system.

This system of neumes was in some ways a step back from the Greek letter system, as the neumes did not specify exact pitches or note lengths. However, it had the advantage over the Greek system because the placement of the signs on the page visually indicated the general direction of the melody and provided a hint about the relative highness or lowness of each individual tone (the so-called diastematic system). This visual aid was helpful for singers, much like how the arrangement of notes on the modern staff is valuable for reading music today. Although neumes didn’t allow someone to sight-read a new melody as our[Pg 104] modern staff notation does, they effectively helped recall the general shape of a melody previously learned by ear, enabling the singer (the system was used only for vocal music) to differentiate that particular melody from the many others they likely knew. Neume notation was primarily associated with the "plain-song melodies" of the Church, and since the words of these chants were sung as they would be pronounced while reading, the absence of specific duration values in the neume system was not an issue. However, with the rise of what is known as "measured music" (see the invention of opera, the development of independent instrumental music, etc.), this limitation became one of the main drawbacks of the system.

The elements of neume-writing as given by Riemann in his Dictionary of Music are:

The elements of neume-writing as given by Riemann in his Dictionary of Music are:

"(1) The signs for a single note: Virga (Virgula) and Punctus (Punctum). (2) The sign for a rising interval: Pes (Podatus). (3) The sign for a falling interval: Clinis (Flexa). (4) Some signs for special manners of performance: Tremula (Bebung), Quilisma (shake), Plica (turn), etc. The others were either synonyms of the above-named or combinations of them...."

"(1) The symbols for a single note: Virga (Virgula) and Punctus (Punctum). (2) The symbol for a rising interval: Pes (Podatus). (3) The symbol for a falling interval: Clinis (Flexa). (4) Some symbols for special ways to perform: Tremula (Bebung), Quilisma (shake), Plica (turn), etc. The others were either synonyms of the ones mentioned above or combinations of them...."

Since music in the middle ages was always copied by hand, it will readily be understood that these neumae were not uniform either in shape or size, and that each writer made use of certain peculiarities of writing, which, although perfectly intelligible to himself, could not readily be interpreted by others (cf. writing shorthand). Here then we observe the greatest weakness of the neume system—its lack of uniformity and its consequent inability accurately to express musical ideas for universal interpretation.

Since music in the Middle Ages was always handwritten, it's easy to see that these neumae varied in both shape and size. Each writer used their own unique writing style, which might have been clear to them but not easily understood by others (like shorthand writing). This highlights the biggest flaw of the neume system—its inconsistency and inability to accurately convey musical ideas for everyone to interpret.

Examples of several neumes are given merely in order to give the beginner a general idea of their appearance.

Examples of several neumes are provided just to give beginners a general idea of what they look like.

Virga virga or virga. Punctus punctus or punctus. Pes pes or pes. Clinis clinis or clinis.

Virga virga or virga. Punctus punctus or punctus. Pes pes or pes. Clinis clinis or clinis.

As music grew more and more complex, and especially as writing in several parts came into use (cf. rise of organum, descant, and counterpoint), it became increasingly difficult to express musical ideas on the basis of the old notation, and numerous attempts were made to invent a more accurate and usable system. Among these one of the most interesting was that in which the words of the text were written in the spaces between long, parallel lines, placing the initial letters of the words tone and semi-tone at the beginning of the line to indicate the scale interval. An example will make this clear.

As music became more complex, especially with the emergence of writing in multiple parts (like organum, descant, and counterpoint), it became harder to convey musical ideas using the old notation. Many efforts were made to create a more precise and practical system. One of the most fascinating approaches involved writing the words of the text in the spaces between long, parallel lines, with the initial letters of the words tone and semi-tone at the start of the line to show the scale interval. An example will clarify this.

 

text notation

text notation

 

This indicated the precise melodic interval but did not give any idea of the rhythm, and the natural accents of the text were the only guide the singer had in this direction, as was the case in neume-notation and in early staff-notation also. Various other attempts to invent a more definite notation were made, but all were sporadic, and it was not until the idea of using the lines (later lines and spaces) to represent definite pitches, and writing notes of various shapes (derived from the neumae) to indicate relative duration-values—it was only when this combination of two elements was devised that any one system began to be universally used.

This showed the exact melodic interval but didn’t provide any information about the rhythm, and the natural accents of the text were the only guide the singer had for that, similar to neume notation and early staff notation. Many other attempts were made to create a clearer notation, but they were all inconsistent, and it wasn’t until the concept of using lines (which later became lines and spaces) to represent specific pitches and writing notes of different shapes (based on the neumes) to indicate relative duration values that a single system began to be widely adopted.

Just how the transition from neume to staff notation was made no one knows: it was not done in a day nor in a year but was the result of a gradual process of evolution and improvement. Nor is it probable that any one man deserves the entire credit for the invention of staff notation, although this feat is commonly attributed to an Italian monk named Guido d'Arezzo (approximate dates 995-1050). To this same monk we are indebted, however, for the invention of the[Pg 106] syllables (UT, RE, MI, etc.) which (in a somewhat modified form) are so widely used for sight-singing purposes. (For a more detailed account of the transition to staff notation, see Grove, op. cit. article notation.) It will now be readily seen that our modern notation is the result of a combination of two preceding methods (the Greek letters, and the neumes) together with a new element—the staff, emphasizing the idea that higher tones are written higher on the staff than lower ones. The development of the neumes into notes of various shapes indicating relative time values and the division of the staff into measures with a definite measure signature at the beginning are natural developments of the earlier primitive idea. In the system of "musica mensurabilis" or measured music which was inaugurated a little later, the virga (which had meanwhile developed into a square-headed neume) was adopted as the longa or long note, and the punctus in two of its forms as breve and semi-breve (short and half-short). The longa is now extinct, but the modern form of the breve is still used as the double-whole-note, and the semi-breve is our modern whole-note.

Just how the transition from neume to staff notation happened is unknown: it didn't occur overnight or in a single year, but was the outcome of a gradual process of evolution and improvement. Moreover, it's unlikely that any one person deserves all the credit for the invention of staff notation, although this achievement is often credited to an Italian monk named Guido d'Arezzo (approximate dates 995-1050). We do owe this monk for the creation of the [Pg 106] syllables (UT, RE, MI, etc.), which (in a modified form) are widely used for sight-singing today. (For a more detailed account of the transition to staff notation, see Grove, op. cit. article notation.) It's now clear that our modern notation is the result of combining two earlier methods (the Greek letters and the neumes) along with a new element—the staff, which highlights that higher tones are written higher on the staff than lower ones. The evolution of neumes into notes of various shapes signifying relative time values and the division of the staff into measures with a specific time signature at the beginning are natural advancements of the earlier basic concept. In the system of "musica mensurabilis" or measured music that emerged a bit later, the virga (which had developed into a square-headed neume) was used as the longa or long note, and the punctus in two of its forms as breve and semi-breve (short and half-short). The longa is now extinct, but the modern version of the breve is still used as the double-whole-note, and the semi-breve is our modern whole-note.

Red-colored notes were sometimes used to indicate changes in value and before long outline notes (called empty notes) came into use, these being easier to make than the solid ones. The transition from square- and diamond-shaped notes to round and oval ones also came about because of the greater facility with which the latter could be written, and for the same reason notes of small denomination were later "tied together" or stroked. This latter usage began about 1700 A.D.

Red notes were sometimes used to show changes in value, and soon outline notes (called empty notes) became popular because they were easier to create than solid ones. The shift from square and diamond-shaped notes to round and oval ones also happened because it was simpler to write the latter. For the same reason, smaller denomination notes were later "tied together" or stroked. This practice started around 1700 A.D.

It is interesting to find that when "measured music" was finally inaugurated there were at first but two measure-signatures, viz.—the circle, standing for three-beat measure (the so-called perfect measure) and the semi-circle (or broken circle) which indicated two-beat measure. Occasionally three-beat measure was indicated by three vertical strokes at the[Pg 107] beginning of the melody, while two-beat measure was shown by two such strokes. Upon the basis of these two varieties of measure, primitive in conception though they may have been, has been built nevertheless the whole system now employed, and in the last analysis all forms of measure now in use will be found to be of either the two-beat or the three-beat variety. The circle has disappeared entirely as a measure-sign, but the broken circle still survives, and from it are derived the familiar signs common time and cut-time, which are sometimes erroneously referred to as being the initial letter of our word common (as used in the expression "common time"). The transition from the older style of measure-signature to the present one seems to have occurred during the century following the invention of opera, i.e., from about 1600 to about 1700 A.D.

It's interesting to note that when "measured music" was first introduced, there were initially only two types of measure signatures: the circle, which represented three-beat measure (known as perfect measure), and the semi-circle (or broken circle), which indicated two-beat measure. Sometimes, three-beat measure was shown by three vertical strokes at the[Pg 107] start of the melody, while two-beat measure was indicated by two strokes. Based on these two basic types of measure, primitive as they may have been, the entire system we use today has been developed, and ultimately all forms of measure currently in use can be categorized as either two-beat or three-beat. The circle has completely disappeared as a measure-sign, but the broken circle remains, and from it come the familiar signs common time and cut-time, which are sometimes incorrectly thought to be the first letter of our word common (as used in the phrase "common time"). The shift from the older style of measure signature to the current one appears to have happened during the century after the invention of opera, specifically from about 1600 to about 1700 A.D.

The rest came into use very soon after "measured music" began to be composed and we soon find rests corresponding with the various denominations of notes in use, viz.:

The rest was quickly adopted after "measured music" started to be created, and we soon see rests that match the different types of notes in use, namely:

 

old rests

old rests

 

The terms applied to these rests vary in different authorities, but it will be noted that the pausa, semi-pausa, and suspirum correspond respectively to the double-whole-rest, whole-rest, and half-rest in use at present.

The terms used for these rests differ among various sources, but it's important to note that the pausa, semi-pausa, and suspirum correspond to the double-whole-rest, whole-rest, and half-rest that we use today.

The bar and double bar may be developments of the maxima rest (as some writers suggest) but are probably also derived from the practice of drawing a line vertically through the various parts of a score to show which notes belonged together, thus facilitating score reading. The bar may occasionally be found as early as 1500, but was not employed universally until 1650 or later.

The bar and double bar might have evolved from the maxima rest (as some authors suggest), but they likely also came from the method of drawing a vertical line through different sections of a score to indicate which notes were grouped together, making it easier to read the score. Bars can be seen as early as 1500, but they weren't used universally until 1650 or later.

The number of lines used in the staff has varied greatly since the time of Guido, there having been all the way from[Pg 108] four to fifteen at various times and in various places, (four being the standard number for a long time). These lines (when there were quite a number in the staff) were often divided into groups of four by red lines, which were not themselves used for notes. These red lines were gradually omitted and the staff divided into sections by a space, as in modern usage. The number of lines in each section was changed to five (in some cases six) for the sake of having a larger available range in each section.

The number of lines used in the staff has changed a lot since Guido's time, ranging from[Pg 108] four to fifteen at different times and places, with four being the standard for a long time. When there were multiple lines in the staff, they were often grouped into groups of four using red lines, which weren't used for notes. Over time, these red lines were removed, and the staff was divided into sections by spaces, like how we do it today. The number of lines in each section was changed to five (and sometimes six) to provide a larger range in each section.

The clefs at the beginning of the staffs are of course simply altered forms of the letters F, C, and G, which were written at first by Guido and others to make the old neume notation more definite.

The clefs at the beginning of the staffs are basically just modified versions of the letters F, C, and G, which were originally written by Guido and others to make the old neume notation clearer.

The staccato sign seems not to have appeared until about the time of Bach, the legato sign being also invented at about the same time. The fermata was first used in imitative part-writing to show where each part was to stop, but with the development of harmonic writing the present practice was inaugurated. Leger lines came into use in the seventeenth century.

The staccato sign doesn't seem to have appeared until around the time of Bach, and the legato sign was also invented around the same period. The fermata was first used in imitative part-writing to indicate where each part should pause, but as harmonic writing developed, the current practice was established. Leger lines were introduced in the seventeenth century.

Sharps and flats were invented because composers found it necessary to use other tones than those that could be represented by the staff degrees in their natural condition. The history of their origin and development is somewhat complicated and cannot be given here, but it should be noted once more that it was the need of expressing more than could be expressed by the older symbols that called forth the newer and more comprehensive method. The use of sharps and flats in key signatures grew up early in the seventeenth century. In the earlier signatures it was customary to duplicate sharps or flats on staff degrees having the same pitch-name, thus: sharps and flats. (The use of the G clef as here shown did not of course exist at that time.)[Pg 109]

Sharps and flats were created because composers needed to use tones beyond what could be shown by the staff notes in their natural state. The history of their origin and development is quite complex and can't be detailed here, but it's important to highlight that the demand to express more than what older symbols allowed led to this newer and more inclusive system. The use of sharps and flats in key signatures emerged early in the seventeenth century. In earlier signatures, it was common to repeat sharps or flats on staff notes that shared the same pitch name, like this: sharps and flats. (The use of the G clef, as illustrated here, did not exist at that time.)[Pg 109]

The double-sharp and double-flat became necessary when "equal temperament" (making possible the use of the complete cycle of keys) was adopted. This was in the time of Bach (1685-1750).

The double-sharp and double-flat became necessary when "equal temperament" (which allowed for the use of the entire cycle of keys) was adopted. This happened during Bach's time (1685-1750).

Signs of expression (relating to tempo and dynamics) date back at least as far as the year 1000 A.D., but the modern terms used for this purpose did not appear until some years after the invention of opera, the date given by C.F.A. Williams in Grove's Dictionary being 1638. These words and signs of expression were at first used only in connection with instrumental music, but were gradually applied to vocal music also.

Signs of expression (related to tempo and dynamics) can be traced back to at least the year 1000 A.D., but the modern terminology for this didn't emerge until a few years after the invention of opera, which C.F.A. Williams lists in Grove's Dictionary as 1638. Initially, these words and signs of expression were only used in instrumental music but were gradually extended to vocal music as well.

Other systems of notation have been invented from time to time in the course of the last two or three centuries, but in most cases they have died with their inventors, and in no case has any such system been accepted with anything even approaching unanimity. The tonic-sol-fa system[40] is used quite[Pg 110] extensively in England for vocal music, but has gained little ground anywhere else and the chances are that the present system of notation, with possibly slight additions and modifications, will remain the standard notation for some time to come in spite of the attacks that are periodically made upon it on the ground of cumbersomeness, difficulty in teaching children, etc. The main characteristics of staff notation may be summed up as follows:

Other notation systems have been created over the past two or three centuries, but most have faded away along with their creators, and none have been widely accepted. The tonic-sol-fa system[40] is quite[Pg 110] popular in England for vocal music, but it hasn't really caught on elsewhere. It’s likely that the current notation system, with maybe a few slight tweaks, will remain the standard for a while, even with the occasional criticisms about its complexity and how difficult it is to teach to kids. The main features of staff notation can be summarized as follows:

1. Pitches represented by lines and spaces of a staff, the higher the line, the higher the pitch represented, signs called clefs at the beginning of each staff making clear the pitch names of the lines and spaces.

1. Pitches are represented by the lines and spaces of a staff; the higher the line, the higher the pitch it represents. Clefs, found at the beginning of each staff, clarify the pitch names of the lines and spaces.

2. Duration values shown by shapes of notes.

2. Duration values represented by shapes of notes.

3. Accents shown by position of notes on the staff with regard to bars, i.e., the strongest accent always falls just after the bar, and the beat relatively least accented is found just before the bar.[Pg 111]

3. Accents indicated by the placement of notes on the staff in relation to bars, i.e., the strongest accent always comes right after the bar, while the beat that is relatively less accented is found just before the bar.[Pg 111]

4. Extent and description of beat-groups shown by measure-signs.

4. The scope and description of beat groups indicated by measure signs.

5. Key shown by key signature placed at the beginning of each staff.

5. The key is indicated by the key signature placed at the beginning of each staff.

6. Rate of speed, dynamic changes, etc., shown by certain Italian words (allegro, andante, etc.), whose meaning is as universally understood as staff notation itself.

6. The rate of speed, dynamic changes, and so on, indicated by certain Italian words (allegro, andante, etc.), which are as universally understood as staff notation itself.


APPENDIX B

Music Instruments

1. Broadly speaking, musical instruments may be divided into two classes, viz.: (1) those that have a keyboard and are therefore capable of sounding several tones simultaneously; (2) those that (as a rule) sound only one tone at a time, as the violin and trumpet. The piano is of course the most familiar example of the first class, and a brief description is therefore given.

1. Generally, musical instruments can be divided into two categories: (1) those with a keyboard that can produce multiple tones at once; (2) those that typically produce only one tone at a time, like the violin and trumpet. The piano is clearly the most recognizable example of the first category, so a brief description is provided.

The piano was invented about two hundred years ago by Cristofori (1651-1731), an Italian. It was an enormous improvement over the types of keyboard instrument that were in use at that time (clavichord, harpsichord, spinet, virginal) and has resulted in an entirely different style of composition. See note on embellishments, p. 26.

The piano was invented around two hundred years ago by Cristofori (1651-1731), an Italian. It was a huge advancement over the keyboard instruments that were popular at the time (clavichord, harpsichord, spinet, virginal) and led to a completely new style of composition. See note on embellishments, p. 26.

2. The most characteristic things about the piano as contrasted with its immediate predecessors are: (1) that on it the loudness and softness of the tone can be regulated by the force with which the keys are struck (hence the name pianoforte meaning literally the soft-loud); (2) the fact that the piano is capable of sustaining tone to a much greater extent than its predecessors. In other words the tone continues sounding for some little time after the key is struck, while on the earlier instruments it stopped almost instantly after being sounded.

2. The most distinctive features of the piano compared to its earlier versions are: (1) that you can control the loudness and softness of the sound by how hard you hit the keys (which is why it's called pianoforte, meaning literally soft-loud); (2) the piano can sustain sound much longer than its predecessors. In other words, the sound keeps going for a bit after you press a key, while on the older instruments, it stopped almost immediately.

The essentials of the piano mechanism are:

The basics of the piano mechanism are:

1. Felt hammers controlled by keys, each hammer striking two or three strings (which are tuned in unison) and immediately rebounding from these strings, allowing them to vibrate as long as the key[Pg 113] is held down. The mechanism that allows the hammers to rebound from the strings and fall into position for another blow is called the escapement.

1. Felt hammers are controlled by keys, with each hammer hitting two or three strings (which are in tune with each other) and quickly bouncing back from these strings, letting them vibrate as long as the key[Pg 113] is pressed down. The mechanism that enables the hammers to bounce back from the strings and fall back into place for another strike is called the escapement.

2. A damper (made of softer felt) pressing against each string and preventing it from vibrating until it is wanted.

2. A damper (made of softer felt) presses against each string and stops it from vibrating until it’s needed.

3. A keyboard action that controls both hammers and dampers, causing the damper to leave the string at the same instant that the hammer strikes it.

3. A keyboard action that controls both hammers and dampers, making the damper lift off the string at the exact moment the hammer hits it.

4. A pedal (damper pedal) controlling all of the dampers, so that at any moment all the strings may be released so as to be free to vibrate.

4. A pedal (damper pedal) that controls all the dampers, allowing all the strings to be released at any moment so they can vibrate freely.

Other interesting details are:

Other interesting details include:

1. The strings are stretched over a thin sheet of wood called the sound-board. This aids greatly in intensifying the tone.

1. The strings are stretched over a thin piece of wood called the soundboard. This significantly helps to enhance the tone.

2. The soft pedal (the one at the left) in an upright piano causes the hammers to move up nearer the strings, and the shorter swing thus afforded causes a less violent blow and consequently a softer tone. In the grand piano this same pedal shifts the mechanism to one side so that the hammers strike only one or two of the strings, this resulting in a softer tone of somewhat modified quality.

2. The soft pedal (the one on the left) in an upright piano moves the hammers closer to the strings, and the shorter distance they have to travel creates a less forceful strike, resulting in a softer sound. In the grand piano, this same pedal shifts the mechanism to the side so that the hammers hit only one or two of the strings, which gives a softer tone with a slightly different quality.

These details regarding the mechanism of the piano can easily be verified by removing the front of any ordinary upright piano and observing what takes place when the keys are struck or the pedals depressed.

These details about how the piano works can easily be checked by taking off the front of any regular upright piano and watching what happens when the keys are pressed or the pedals are pushed down.

3. There are two familiar types of organ in use at the present time, (1) the reed organ, (2) the pipe-organ.

3. There are two well-known types of organ currently in use: (1) the reed organ, and (2) the pipe organ.

The reed organ is very simple in construction, the tone being produced by the vibration of metal reeds (fixed in little cells), through which air is forced (or sucked) from the bellows, the latter being usually worked by the feet of the player.[Pg 114] More power may be secured either by drawing additional stops, thus throwing on more sets of reeds, or by opening the knee swells which either throw on more reeds (sometimes octave couplers) or else open a swell box in which some of the reeds are enclosed, the tone being louder when the box is open than when closed. More tone may also be secured by pumping harder.

The reed organ is quite simple in its design. Sound is created by the vibration of metal reeds fixed in small cells, through which air is pushed (or pulled) from the bellows, which are usually operated by the player’s feet.[Pg 114] You can get more power by pulling additional stops, activating more sets of reeds, or by opening the knee swells that either engage more reeds (sometimes octave couplers) or open a swell box that encloses some of the reeds. The sound is louder when the box is open compared to when it’s closed. You can also achieve a stronger tone by pumping harder.

4. The essential characteristic of the pipe-organ is a number of sets or registers of pipes called stops, each set being capable (usually) of sounding the entire chromatic scale through a range of five or six octaves. Thus for example when the stop melodia is drawn (by pulling out a stop-knob or tilting a tablet), one set of pipes only, sounds when the keyboard is played on: but if the stop flute is drawn with melodia, two pipes speak every time a key is depressed. Thus if an organ has forty speaking stops, all running through the entire keyboard, then each time one key is depressed forty pipes will speak, and if a chord of five tones is played, two hundred pipes will speak. The object of having so many pipes is not merely to make possible a very powerful tone, but, rather, to give greater variety of tone-color.

4. The main feature of the pipe organ is a number of sets or registers of pipes called stops, with each set usually able to play the entire chromatic scale over a range of five or six octaves. For instance, when the stop melodia is activated (by pulling out a stop knob or tilting a tablet), only one set of pipes sounds when the keyboard is played. However, if the stop flute is activated along with melodia, two sets of pipes will sound each time a key is pressed. Therefore, if an organ has forty speaking stops that cover the entire keyboard, then each time one key is pressed, forty pipes will sound, and if a five-note chord is played, two hundred pipes will sound. The goal of having so many pipes isn't just to create a powerful sound, but rather to provide a wider variety of tone colors.

The pipe-organ usually has a pedal keyboard on which the feet of the performer play a bass part, this part often sounding an octave (or more) lower than the notes indicate.

The pipe organ typically has a pedal keyboard that the performer uses to play a bass line, which often sounds an octave (or more) lower than the notes suggest.

An eight-foot stop on the organ produces tones of the same pitches as the piano when corresponding keys are struck: A four-foot stop sounds tones an octave higher and a two-foot stop tones two octaves higher. A sixteen-foot stop sounds tones an octave lower than the piano, and a thirty-two foot stop, tones two octaves lower, while some organs have also a sixty-four foot stop which sounds three octaves lower. This gives the organ an exceedingly wide range, its compass being greater than that of any other single instrument, and comparable in both range of pitches and variety of color only with the modern orchestra.[Pg 115]

An eight-foot stop on the organ produces sounds that match the pitches of the piano when the corresponding keys are pressed: A four-foot stop plays sounds one octave higher, and a two-foot stop plays sounds two octaves higher. A sixteen-foot stop plays sounds an octave lower than the piano, and a thirty-two foot stop plays two octaves lower, while some organs also have a sixty-four foot stop that sounds three octaves lower. This gives the organ a very wide range, its scope being greater than any other single instrument, and comparable in both range of pitches and variety of colors only to the modern orchestra.[Pg 115]

Modern pipe-organs always have a number of combination pedals or pistons (usually both), by means of which the organist is enabled to throw on a number of stops with one movement. The selection and use of suitable stops, couplers, combinations, etc., is called registration.

Modern pipe organs usually have several combination pedals or pistons (often both), allowing the organist to activate multiple stops with a single action. The process of choosing and using appropriate stops, couplers, combinations, and so on, is referred to as registration.

5. The instruments mentioned at the beginning of this appendix as belonging to the second class are more familiar in connection with ensemble playing, being commonly associated with either band or orchestra.

5. The instruments listed at the start of this appendix that are part of the second class are more familiar in relation to ensemble playing, as they are usually linked with either a band or an orchestra.

6. A band is a company of musicians all of whom play upon either wind or percussion instruments, the main body of tone being produced by the brass and wood-wind divisions.

6. A band is a group of musicians who play either wind or percussion instruments, with most of the sound coming from the brass and woodwind sections.

Sousa's band is usually made up in somewhat the following manner: 4 flutes and piccolos, 12 B clarinets, 1 E clarinet, 1 alto clarinet, 1 bass clarinet, 2 oboes, 2 bassoons, 2 sarrusophones, 4 saxophones, 4 cornets, 2 trumpets, 1 soprano saxhorn (fluegelhorn), 4 French horns, 4 trombones, 2 contra-bass tubas, 4 tubas, 1 snare drum, 1 bass drum, 2 kettle drums, cymbals, triangle, bells, castanets, xylophone, etc.

Sousa's band typically consists of the following instruments: 4 flutes and piccolos, 12 B♭ clarinets, 1 E♭ clarinet, 1 alto clarinet, 1 bass clarinet, 2 oboes, 2 bassoons, 2 sarrusophones, 4 saxophones, 4 cornets, 2 trumpets, 1 soprano saxhorn (fluegelhorn), 4 French horns, 4 trombones, 2 contra-bass tubas, 4 tubas, 1 snare drum, 1 bass drum, 2 kettle drums, cymbals, triangle, bells, castanets, xylophone, etc.

7. An orchestra is a company of musicians performing upon stringed instruments as well as upon wind and percussion. It is differentiated from the band by the fact that the main body of tone is produced by the strings.

7. An orchestra is a group of musicians playing string instruments as well as wind and percussion instruments. It differs from a band in that the primary sound is created by the strings.

There are four classes of instruments in the orchestra, viz., strings, wood-wind, brass (wind) and percussion. In addition to these four classes, there is the harp, which although a stringed instrument, does not belong in the same group as the other strings because the manner of producing the tone is altogether different.

There are four types of instruments in the orchestra: strings, woodwinds, brass (winds), and percussion. Besides these four types, there’s the harp, which, although it’s a string instrument, doesn’t fit in the same group as the other strings because the way it produces sound is completely different.

8. In the first group (the strings) are found the first and second violins, viola, violoncello (usually spelled cello), and double-bass. The first and second violins are identical in every way (but play different parts), while the other members of the family merely represent larger examples of the same type of instrument.

8. In the first group (the strings), we have the first and second violins, viola, cello, and double bass. The first and second violins are exactly the same in every way (except they play different parts), while the other instruments in the group are just larger versions of the same type.

9. In the second group (the wood-wind) are found the flute, piccolo, oboe, bassoon, English horn, double-bassoon,[Pg 116] clarinet, and bass clarinet. The English horn, double-bassoon, bass clarinet, and piccolo are not called for in the older compositions, hence are not always present in the orchestra.

9. In the second group (the woodwind), you’ll find the flute, piccolo, oboe, bassoon, English horn, double bassoon,[Pg 116] clarinet, and bass clarinet. The English horn, double bassoon, bass clarinet, and piccolo weren’t used in older compositions, so they’re not always part of the orchestra.

10. In the third group (the brass choir) are found the French horn, (usually referred to as the horn), trumpet (sometimes replaced by the cornet) trombone, and tuba.

10. In the third group (the brass choir), you'll find the French horn (usually called the horn), trumpet (sometimes swapped out for the cornet), trombone, and tuba.

11. The fourth group (percussion) consists of kettle drums, bass drum, cymbals, snare drum, triangle, bells, etc.

11. The fourth group (percussion) includes kettle drums, bass drum, cymbals, snare drum, triangle, bells, and more.

12. In an orchestra of about 100 players the proportion of instruments is as about as follows, although it varies somewhat according to the taste of the conductor, the style of composition to be performed, etc.:

12. In an orchestra of around 100 musicians, the breakdown of instruments is roughly as follows, though it can change a bit based on the conductor's preferences, the style of the music being played, and so on:

18 first violins, 16 second violins, 14 violas, 12 cellos, 10 basses, 1 harp, 3 flutes, 1 piccolo, 3 oboes, 1 English horn, 3 clarinets, 1 bass clarinet, 3 bassoons, 1 contra (or double) bassoon, 4 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, 1 tuba, 3 kettle drums, 1 bass drum, 1 snare drum, 1 each of triangle, cymbals, bells, and other instruments of percussion, several of which are often manipulated by one performer.

18 first violins, 16 second violins, 14 violas, 12 cellos, 10 basses, 1 harp, 3 flutes, 1 piccolo, 3 oboes, 1 English horn, 3 clarinets, 1 bass clarinet, 3 bassoons, 1 contrabassoon, 4 French horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, 1 tuba, 3 kettle drums, 1 bass drum, 1 snare drum, and 1 each of triangle, cymbals, bells, and other percussion instruments, several of which are often played by one performer.

violin13. The cuts and brief descriptions here added will give at least a rudimentary idea of the appearance and possibilities of the instruments most commonly used in bands and orchestras. For fuller descriptions and particulars regarding range, quality, etc., the student is referred to Mason's "The Orchestral Instruments and What They Do," Lavignac's "Music and Musicians," and to the various articles which describe each instrument under its own name in Grove's Dictionary or in any good encyclopaedia. For still fuller details some work on orchestration will have to be consulted.

violin13. The added cuts and brief descriptions here will provide at least a basic understanding of the look and capabilities of the instruments most commonly found in bands and orchestras. For more comprehensive descriptions and specific details about range, quality, etc., students should refer to Mason's "The Orchestral Instruments and What They Do," Lavignac's "Music and Musicians," and the various articles that detail each instrument by name in Grove's Dictionary or any good encyclopedia. For even more detailed information, a book on orchestration will need to be consulted.

14. The violin has four strings, tuned thus violin strings g d' a' e'', these making available a range of about three and one-half octaves (g—c''''). This range[41] may be extended upward somewhat[Pg 117] further by means of harmonics, these being produced by lightly touching the string at certain points (while the bow is moving across it) instead of holding it down against the finger-board. The highest string of the violin (viola and cello also) is often called the chanterelle because it is most often used for playing the melody. The violin ordinarily produces but one tone at a time, but by stopping two strings simultaneously and so drawing the bow as to set both in vibration, two tones may be produced at the same time, while three and four tones can be sounded almost simultaneously.

14. The violin has four strings, tuned like this violin strings g d' a' e'', which allow a range of about three and a half octaves (g—c''''). This range[41] can be extended a bit higher[Pg 117] using harmonics, created by lightly touching the string at certain points (while the bow is drawn across it) instead of pressing it down against the fingerboard. The highest string of the violin (as well as the viola and cello) is commonly called the chanterelle because it's most often used for playing the melody. The violin usually produces one note at a time, but by stopping two strings at once and drawing the bow to make both vibrate, two notes can be played together, while three or four notes can be sounded almost simultaneously.

violaThe mute (or sordino) is a small clamp made of metal, wood, or ivory, which when clipped to the top of the bridge causes the vibrations to be transmitted less freely to the body of the violin, giving rise to a tone modified in quality, and decreased in power.

violaThe mute (or sordino) is a small clamp made of metal, wood, or ivory that, when attached to the top of the bridge, reduces the vibrations transmitted to the body of the violin. This results in a tone that is altered in quality and has less volume.

For certain special effects the player is directed to pluck the string (pizzicato), this method of playing giving rise to a dry, detached tone instead of the smooth, flowing one that is so characteristic of the violin as commonly played.

For certain special effects, the player is instructed to pluck the string (pizzicato), which produces a dry, detached tone rather than the smooth, flowing sound typically associated with the violin when played in a conventional manner.

Violins in the orchestra are divided into firsts and seconds, the first violins being always seated at the left of the audience and the seconds at the right.

Violins in the orchestra are divided into firsts and seconds, with the first violins always seated on the left side of the audience and the seconds on the right.

15. The viola has four strings, also tuned in fifths, thus viola strings c g d' a'. The viola looks exactly like the violin at a little distance, and is really only a larger sized violin, having a range a fifth lower. Its tone is not so incisive as that of the violin, being[Pg 118] rather heavier—"more gloomy," as it is often described. The viola is not so useful as the violin as a solo instrument because it is not capable of producing so many varieties of color, nevertheless it is invaluable for certain effects. In orchestral music it is of course one of the most valuable instruments for filling in the harmony. The viola players are usually seated behind the second violin players in the orchestra.

15. The viola has four strings, which are also tuned in fifths, so it looks like this: viola strings c g d' a'. The viola looks just like a violin from a distance, but it’s basically a larger version of the violin, with a range that's a fifth lower. Its tone isn't as sharp as the violin's, being[Pg 118] a bit heavier—often described as "more somber." The viola isn’t as versatile as the violin for solo performances since it can’t produce as many shades of sound, but it’s essential for certain effects. In orchestral music, it’s one of the key instruments for enriching the harmony. Viola players are typically seated behind the second violin players in the orchestra.

cello16. The violoncello or cello (sometimes called bass viol) has four strings, tuned thus: cello strings C G d a. Its range is about three and one-half octaves (from C to e'' or f''), but in solo work this range is sometimes extended much higher. The cello is much more universally used as a solo instrument than the viola and its tone is capable of a much greater degree of variation. In the orchestra it plays the bass of the string quartet (reinforced by the double-bass), but is also often used for solo passages. Con sordino and pizzicato passages occur as often for the cello as for the violin.

cello16. The violoncello or cello (sometimes called bass viol) has four strings, tuned like this: cello strings C G d a. Its range is about three and a half octaves (from C to e'' or f''), but in solo performances, this range can be extended much higher. The cello is used more widely as a solo instrument than the viola and has a much greater capability for tonal variation. In the orchestra, it plays the bass line in the string quartet (supported by the double-bass), but is also frequently featured in solo sections. Con sordino and pizzicato sections are just as common for the cello as they are for the violin.

double bass17. The double bass differs from the other members of the string family in that it is tuned in fourths instead of in fifths. Its four strings are tuned as follows bass strings EE AA D G the entire range of the instrument being from EE to a. In music written for double-bass the notes are always printed an octave higher than the tones are to sound: that is, when the bass-player sees the note bass c he plays pedal C this being done to avoid leger lines. The tone of the bass is much heavier and[Pg 119] the instrument itself is much more clumsy to handle than the other members of the group, hence it is almost never used as a solo instrument but it is invaluable for reinforcing the bass part in orchestral music. The mute is rarely used on the double-bass, but the pizzicato effect is very common and the bass pizzicato tone is much fuller and richer than that of any other stringed instrument.

double bass17. The double bass stands out from the other string instruments because it’s tuned in fourths rather than fifths. Its four strings are tuned as follows: bass strings EE AA D G covering the full range of the instrument from EE to a. In music written for the double bass, the notes are always printed an octave higher than how they’re actually played; for instance, when the bassist sees the note bass c they play pedal C to avoid using extra ledger lines. The sound of the bass is much deeper, and[Pg 119] the instrument itself is bulkier and harder to manage compared to the other members of the group, which is why it’s rarely used as a solo instrument, but it plays a crucial role in reinforcing the bass line in orchestral music. The mute is seldom used on the double bass, but the pizzicato technique is very common, and the pizzicato sound on the bass is much fuller and richer than that of any other string instrument.

18. The flute has a range of three octaves. flute range c' c'''' It is used in both solo and orchestral playing as well as in bands. The flute was formerly always made of wood, but is at present often made of metal.

18. The flute has a range of three octaves. flute range c' c'''' It is used in both solo performances and orchestras, as well as in bands. In the past, flutes were always made of wood, but nowadays they are often made of metal.

19. The piccolo is a flute playing an octave higher than the one described above. The notes are printed as for the flute, but the player understands that the tone is to sound an octave higher. The piccolo is used widely in band music and quite often in orchestral music also, but since the tone is so brilliant and penetrating and is incapable of any great variation, it is not suitable for solo performance.

19. The piccolo is a flute that plays an octave higher than the one mentioned above. The notes are written just like those for the flute, but the player knows that the sound is meant to be an octave higher. The piccolo is commonly used in band music and often in orchestral music too, but because its tone is so bright and piercing and doesn't allow for much variation, it's not ideal for solo performances.

oboecontrabassoonEnglish hornpiccoloflutebassoon

oboecontrabassoonEnglish hornpiccoloflutebassoon

20. The next four instruments to be described (oboe, bassoon, English horn, and contra bassoon) are often referred to as the oboe family since the principle of tone production and general manipulation is the same in all four. The tone in these instruments is produced by the vibration of two very thin pieces of cane, which are called together a double-reed.

20. The next four instruments to be described (oboe, bassoon, English horn, and contrabassoon) are often referred to as the oboe family since the way they produce sound and are generally played is the same in all four. The sound in these instruments is created by the vibration of two very thin pieces of cane, which together are called a double-reed.

bass clarinetclarinetThe oboe is especially valuable in the orchestra as a solo instrument, and its thin, nasal tones are suggestive of rustic, pastoral simplicity, both oboe and English horn being often used by orchestral composers in passages intended to express the idea of rural out-of-door life. The English horn is also often used in passages where the idea of melancholy and suffering is to be conveyed to the audience. In a military band the oboe corresponds to the first violin of the orchestra.

bass clarinetclarinetThe oboe is particularly valuable in the orchestra as a solo instrument, and its thin, nasal tones suggest a simple, rustic vibe. Both the oboe and the English horn are frequently used by orchestral composers in sections meant to evoke the feeling of rural, outdoor life. The English horn is also often featured in parts where the themes of melancholy and suffering are to be conveyed to the audience. In a military band, the oboe takes on the role similar to that of the first violin in the orchestra.

The bassoon and contra-bassoon are used mostly to provide a bass part for the harmony of the wood-wind group, but they are also sometimes employed (especially the bassoon) to depict comic or grotesque effects.

The bassoon and contra-bassoon are primarily used to provide a bass part for the harmony of the woodwind group, but they are also occasionally used (especially the bassoon) to create comedic or grotesque effects.

21. The next two types of instruments to be described (clarinet and saxophone) are alike in that the tone is produced by the vibration of a single strip of cane (called single reed) which is held against the lower lip of the player. The clarinet and bass clarinet are made of wood and are used in both bands and orchestras, but the saxophone is usually made of metal, and, the tone being more[Pg 122] strident and penetrating, the instrument is ordinarily used only in combination with other wind instruments, i.e., in bands.

21. The next two types of instruments to be described (clarinet and saxophone) are similar in that the sound is created by the vibration of a single strip of cane (called single reed) which is held against the player's lower lip. The clarinet and bass clarinet are made of wood and are used in both bands and orchestras, while the saxophone is usually made of metal, and since the tone is more [Pg 122] strident and penetrating, the instrument is typically used only alongside other wind instruments, i.e., in bands.

Since the fingering of the clarinet is excessively difficult the performer can play in only certain keys on the same instrument, hence to play in different keys clarinets in several keys must be provided, there being usually three in all. The music is written as though it were to be played in the key of C, but the tones produced are actually in other keys. For this reason the clarinet is called a transposing instrument. The range of the clarinet is the greatest possessed by any of the wind instruments, that of the clarinet in C being from e to g'''.

Since the fingering of the clarinet is really tricky, the performer can only play in certain keys on the same instrument. To play in different keys, you need to have clarinets for several keys, usually three in total. The music is written as if it's meant to be played in the key of C, but the actual notes produced are in different keys. Because of this, the clarinet is referred to as a transposing instrument. The range of the clarinet is the widest of all wind instruments, with the clarinet in C spanning from e to g'''.

saxophones

saxophones

sarrusophoneThe sarrusophone is an instrument with a double-reed. It is made of brass and exists in several sizes, the only one ever used in the orchestra being the double-bass sarrusophone, which has approximately the same range as the double-bassoon and is sometimes (but rarely) made use of in the orchestra instead of the latter instrument. The tone of the sarrusophone is something like that of the bassoon.

sarrusophoneThe sarrusophone is a double-reed instrument made of brass and comes in various sizes. The only version typically used in orchestras is the double-bass sarrusophone, which has a range similar to that of the double-bassoon. It is occasionally used in orchestras as a substitute for the latter instrument, though this is quite rare. The tone of the sarrusophone is reminiscent of the bassoon.

French horn22. The French horn (often called valve horn or simply horn) really consists of a long tube (about 16 feet) which is bent into circular form for convenience in handling. Its range is from BB to f''. In the orchestra French horns are used in pairs, two of the players taking the higher tones, and two the lower. The tone is intensely mellow but incapable of any extensive[Pg 124] variation, but in spite of this lack of variety the tone itself is so wonderfully beautiful that the instrument is one of the most useful in the orchestra both in solo passages and to fill in the harmony. The horn (as well as the trumpet and trombone) differs from most of the wood-wind instruments in that its mouthpiece contains no reed, the lips of the player constituting the vibrating body as they are stretched across the mouthpiece and air is forced against them. The horn is used in bands as well as in orchestras.

French horn22. The French horn (often referred to as valve horn or just horn) is basically a long tube (around 16 feet) that's shaped into a circular form for easier handling. Its range goes from BB to f''. In orchestras, French horns are played in pairs, with two players taking the higher notes and two handling the lower ones. The sound is deeply mellow, though it lacks a wide range of variation, yet despite this limitation, the tone is so beautifully rich that it becomes one of the most valuable instruments in the orchestra, both for solo performances and to enhance the harmony. The horn (along with the trumpet and trombone) is different from most woodwind instruments because its mouthpiece doesn’t have a reed; instead, the player’s lips create the vibration as air is blown against them. The horn is played in both bands and orchestras.

23. The range of the trumpet is trumpet range g b'', the typical tone being brilliant and ringing. It is used in both band and orchestra, playing the highest parts assigned to the brass choir. The trumpet is often replaced in both band and orchestra by its less refined cousin the cornet because of the ease with which the latter can be played as compared with the trumpet, and the larger number of players that are available in consequence of this ease of execution.

23. The range of the trumpet is trumpet range g b'', typically producing a bright and resonant sound. It is used in both bands and orchestras, playing the highest parts in the brass section. The trumpet is often substituted in both bands and orchestras by its less refined relative, the cornet, because the cornet is easier to play, making it more accessible and allowing for a larger number of players.

trumpet

trumpet

cornet24. The cornet looks something like the trumpet, but is not so slim and graceful in appearance. Its tube is only four and one-half feet long, as compared with a length of about eight feet in the trumpet, and sixteen feet in the French horn.

cornet24. The cornet resembles a trumpet, but it's not as sleek and elegant. Its tubing is only four and a half feet long, while a trumpet is about eight feet long and a French horn measures sixteen feet.

The range of the cornet in B is from e to b-flat''. The tone is somewhat commonplace as compared with the[Pg 125] trumpet, but because of its great agility in the rendition of trills, repeated tones, etc., it is universally used in all sorts of combinations, even (as noted above) taking the place of the trumpet in many small orchestras.

The range of the cornet in B extends from e to b-flat''. The sound is a bit standard compared to the [Pg 125] trumpet, but due to its excellent agility in playing trills, repeated notes, and more, it's widely used in all kinds of ensembles, even (as mentioned earlier) replacing the trumpet in many smaller orchestras.

trombone25. The pitch sounded by the trombone is altered by lengthening or shortening the tube of which the instrument is constructed, this being possible because the lower part slides into the upper and can be pulled out to increase the total length of the tube through which the air passes. There are usually three trombones in the orchestra, each playing a separate part, and the combination of this trio (with the tuba reinforcing the bass part) is majestic and thrilling, being powerful enough to dominate the entire orchestra in Fortissimo passages. But the trombones are useful in soft passages also, and their tone when playing pianissimo is rich, serene, and sonorous.

trombone25. The pitch produced by the trombone changes by adjusting the length of the instrument's tube; this is possible because the lower part slides into the upper part and can be extended to increase the overall length of the tube through which air flows. Typically, there are three trombones in the orchestra, each playing a different part, and the blend of this trio (with the tuba supporting the bass line) is powerful and exciting, able to overpower the entire orchestra during Fortissimo sections. However, trombones are also effective in softer passages, and their sound when playing pianissimo is rich, calm, and resonant.

tuba26. The bass tuba is a member of the saxhorn family[42] and[Pg 126] supplies the lowest part of the brass choir, as the double-bass does in the string choir. It is used in both orchestra and band, being often supported in the larger bands by a still lower-toned member of the same family—the contra-bass tuba. The range of the tuba is from double pedal G to g'.

tuba26. The bass tuba is part of the saxhorn family[42] and[Pg 126] provides the lowest sound in the brass section, similar to how the double-bass functions in the string section. It is used in both orchestras and bands, often accompanied in larger bands by a deeper-toned instrument from the same family—the contra-bass tuba. The range of the tuba extends from double pedal G to g'.

27. The kettle-drum is the most important member of the percussion family and is always used either in pairs or in threes. The size of these instruments varies somewhat with the make, but when two drums are used the diameter is approximately that given under the illustration. The range of a pair of drums is one octave F f and when but two drums are used the larger one takes the tones from F to about C of this range, and the smaller takes those[Pg 127] from about B to F. The most common usage is to tune one drum to the tonic, and the other to the dominant of the key in which the composition is written. The pitch of the kettle-drum can be varied by increasing or lessening the tension of the head by means of thumb-screws which act on a metal ring.

27. The kettle drum is the most important member of the percussion family and is usually used in pairs or threes. The size of these instruments varies somewhat depending on the manufacturer, but when two drums are used, the diameter is roughly what’s shown in the illustration. A pair of drums has a range of one octave F f and when only two drums are used, the larger one covers tones from F to about C in this range, while the smaller one covers tones from about B to F. The most common practice is to tune one drum to the tonic and the other to the dominant of the key in which the piece is written. The pitch of the kettle drum can be adjusted by tightening or loosening the head tension using thumb screws that press against a metal ring.

bass drumcymbals

bass drumcymbals

kettle drums

kettle drums

The other important members of the percussion family are shown on this and the following page, their use being so obvious as to require no detailed explanation.

The other key members of the percussion family are displayed on this and the next page, and their use is so clear that it doesn't need any detailed explanation.

tambourine

tambourine

bells

bells

side drumtriangle

side drumtriangle

harp28. The harp is one of the oldest of instruments (dating back over 6000 years), but it is only in comparatively recent years that it has been used in the symphony orchestra. Its range is from double pedal C-flat to f-flat''''.

harp28. The harp is one of the oldest musical instruments (dating back over 6000 years), but it’s only in recent years that it has been included in the symphony orchestra. Its range goes from double pedal C-flat to f-flat''''.

The modern double-action harp has forty-six strings, which are tuned in half-steps and whole-steps so as to sound the scale of C major. It has a series of seven pedals around its base, each pedal having two notches below it, into either of which the pedal may be lowered and held fast. The first pedal shortens the F string so that it now sounds F, (giving the key of G); the second one[Pg 130] shortens the C string so that it sounds C (giving the key of D); the third pedal shortens the G string so that it sounds G (giving the key of A); the fourth changes D to D (giving the key of E), and so on until, when all the pedals are fixed in their first notches, the scale of C is sounded instead of C as was the case before any of the pedals were depressed. But if the first pedal is now pushed down into the second notch the original F string is still further shortened and now sounds the pitch F (giving us the key of G), and if all the other pedals are likewise successively lowered to the second notch we get in turn all the sharp keys—D, A, E, B, F and C, the last-named key being obtained as the result of having all the pedals fixed in their second notches, thus making all the tones of the original C scale a whole-step higher so that they now sound the C scale.

The modern double-action harp has forty-six strings, tuned in half-steps and whole-steps to play the scale of C major. It features seven pedals around its base, each with two notches below it, where the pedal can be lowered and held. The first pedal shortens the F string, making it sound F (thus producing the key of G); the second pedal shortens the C string to C (which gives us the key of D); the third pedal shortens the G string to G (resulting in the key of A); the fourth pedal changes D to D (leading to the key of E), and this continues until, when all the pedals are in their first notches, the C scale is played instead of C, as was true before any pedals were pressed. However, if the first pedal is pushed down into the second notch, the original F string is further shortened, now sounding F (giving us the key of G), and if all the other pedals are also lowered to the second notch, we successively get all the sharp keys—D, A, E, B, F, and C. The last key is achieved by having all the pedals in their second notches, raising all tones of the original C scale by a whole step to produce the C scale.

Chords of not more than four tones for each hand may be played simultaneously on the harp, but arpeggio and scale passages are the rule, and are more successful than simultaneous chords. The notation of harp music is essentially like that of piano music.

Chords of no more than four notes for each hand can be played at the same time on the harp, but arpeggios and scale passages are more common and work better than playing chords together. The way harp music is written is basically the same as piano music.


APPENDIX C

Sound Design

Note:—It is usually taken for granted that the student of music is familiar with the significance of such terms as over-tone, equal temperament, etc., and with principles such as that relating to the relation between vibration rates and pitches: the writer has in his own experience found, however, that most students are not at all familiar with such data, and this appendix is therefore added in the hope that a few facts at least regarding the laws of sound may be brought to the attention of some who would otherwise remain in entire ignorance of the subject.

Note:—It's generally assumed that music students know the meaning of terms like over-tone, equal temperament, and concepts related to the connection between vibration rates and pitches. However, in my experience, I've found that many students are not familiar with this information at all. This appendix is included with the hope that it will provide some basic facts about the laws of sound to those who might otherwise stay completely unaware of the topic.

1. Acoustics is the science which deals with sound and the laws of its production and transmission. Since all sound is caused by vibration, acoustics may be defined as the science which treats of the phenomena of sound-producing vibration.

1. Acoustics is the study of sound and the rules governing how it's created and transmitted. Since all sound arises from vibration, acoustics can be defined as the science that explores the phenomena related to sound-producing vibrations.

2. All sound (as stated above) is produced by vibration of some sort: strike a tuning-fork against the top of a table and see the vibrations which cause the tone, or, if the fork is a small one and the vibrations cannot be seen, hold it against the edge of a sheet of paper and hear the blows it strikes; or, watch one of the lowest strings of the piano after striking the key a sharp blow; or, look closely at the heavier strings of the violin (or better still, the cello) and watch them oscillate rapidly to and fro as the bow moves across them.

2. All sound (as mentioned earlier) is created by vibrations of some kind: hit a tuning fork against the top of a table and see the vibrations that produce the tone, or if the fork is small and you can’t see the vibrations, press it against the edge of a sheet of paper and listen to the taps it makes; or, observe one of the lowest piano strings after you strike the key hard; or, take a close look at the thicker strings of the violin (or even better, the cello) and watch them move rapidly back and forth as the bow glides across them.

The vibrating body may be a string, a thin piece of wood, a piece of metal, a membrane (cf. drum), the lips (cf. playing the cornet), the vocal cords, etc. Often it is a column of air whose vibrations give rise to the tone, the reed or other medium merely serving to set the air in vibration.

The vibrating object can be a string, a thin piece of wood, a piece of metal, a membrane (like a drum), the lips (like when playing the cornet), the vocal cords, and so on. Often, it’s a column of air that vibrates to create the sound, with the reed or another medium simply helping to make the air vibrate.

3. Sound is transmitted through the air in somewhat this fashion: the vibrating body (a string for example) strikes the air-particles in its immediate vicinity, and they, being in con[Pg 132]tact with other such air-particles, strike these others, the latter in turn striking yet others, and so on, both a forward and backward movement being set up (oscillation). These particles lie so close together that no movement at all can be detected, and it is only when the disturbance finally reaches the air-particles that are in contact with the ear-drum that any effect is evident.

3. Sound is transmitted through the air like this: a vibrating object (like a string, for instance) hits the nearby air particles, which then bump into other air particles close to them, and this chain reaction continues. This creates both a forward and backward movement (oscillation). The air particles are so closely packed that you can't notice any movement, and only when the disturbance reaches the air particles that touch the eardrum does any effect become noticeable.

This phenomenon of sound-transmission may perhaps be made more clear by the old illustration of a series of eight billiard balls in a row on a table: if the first ball is tapped lightly, striking gently against ball number 2, the latter (as well as numbers 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7) will not apparently move at all, but ball number 8 at the other end will roll away. The air-particles act upon each other in much this same fashion, the difference being that when they are set in motion by a vibrating body a complete vibration backward and forward causes a similar backward and forward movement of the particles (oscillation) instead of simply a forward jerk as in the case of the billiard balls.

This idea of how sound travels can be explained using the old example of eight billiard balls lined up on a table: if you lightly tap the first ball so it hits ball number 2, only ball number 8 at the other end will roll away, while balls 2 through 7 won’t seem to move at all. The air particles interact similarly; however, when they’re set in motion by a vibrating object, they move back and forth in a complete vibration instead of just moving forward like the billiard balls do.

Another way of describing the same process is this: the vibration of some body produces waves in the air (cf. waves in the ocean, which carry water forward but do not themselves move on continuously), these waves spread out spherically (i.e. in all directions) and finally reach the ear, where they set the ear-drum in vibration, thus sending certain sound-stimuli to the nerves of hearing in the inner ear, and thus to the brain.

Another way to describe the same process is this: when something vibrates, it creates waves in the air (similar to waves in the ocean, which move water forward but don’t keep moving on continuously). These waves spread out in all directions and eventually reach the ear, causing the eardrum to vibrate, which then sends specific sound signals to the hearing nerves in the inner ear, and then to the brain.

An important thing to be noted in connection with sound-transmission is that sound will not travel in a vacuum: some kind of a medium is essential for its transmission. This medium may be air, water, a bar of iron or steel, the earth, etc.

An important thing to note about sound transmission is that sound won’t travel in a vacuum: some kind of medium is essential for its transmission. This medium can be air, water, a bar of iron or steel, the earth, etc.

4. The rate at which sound travels through the air is about 1100 feet per second, the rapidity varying somewhat with fluctuations in temperature and humidity. In water the rate is much higher than in air (about four times as great)[Pg 133] while the velocity of sound through other mediums (as e.g., steel) is sometimes as much as sixteen times as great as through air.

4. The rate at which sound travels through the air is about 1,100 feet per second, but it can vary a bit with changes in temperature and humidity. In water, the speed is much higher than in air (about four times faster) [Pg 133] while the velocity of sound in other materials (like e.g., steel) can be up to sixteen times faster than in air.

5. Sound, like light, may be intensified by a suitable reflecting surface directly back of the vibrating body (cf. sounding board); it may also be reflected by some surface at a distance from its source in such a way that at a certain point (the focus) the sound may be very clearly heard, but at other places, even those nearer the source of sound, it can scarcely be heard at all. If there is such a surface in an auditorium (as often occurs) there will be a certain point where everything can be heard very easily, but in the rest of the room it may be very difficult to understand what is being said or sung.

5. Sound, like light, can be amplified by a suitable reflecting surface located right behind the vibrating object (like a sounding board); it can also reflect off a surface that's further away from its source in such a way that at a specific point (the focus), the sound can be heard very clearly, while at other locations, even those closer to the source, it might hardly be heard at all. If there is such a surface in an auditorium (which often happens), there will be a specific spot where everything is easily heard, but in the rest of the room, it may be very hard to understand what is being said or sung.

Echoes are caused by sound-reflection, the distance of the reflecting surface from the vibrating body determining the number of syllables that will be echoed.

Echoes happen when sound bounces off a surface, and the distance between the reflecting surface and the vibrating body affects how many syllables will be echoed.

The acoustics of an auditorium (i.e., its hearing properties) depend upon the position and nature of the reflecting surfaces and also upon the length of time a sound persists after the vibrating body has stopped. If it persists longer than 2-1/4 or 2-1/3 seconds the room will not be suitable for musical performances because of the mixture of persisting tones with following ones, this causing a blurred effect somewhat like that obtained by playing a series of unrelated chords on the piano while the damper-pedal is held down. The duration of the reverberation depends upon the size and height of the room, material of floor and walls, furniture, size of audience, etc.

The acoustics of an auditorium (i.e., its sound properties) depend on the layout and type of reflective surfaces, as well as how long a sound lasts after the vibrating source has stopped. If it lasts longer than 2-1/4 or 2-1/3 seconds, the space won’t be suitable for musical performances because the lingering tones mix with the subsequent ones, creating a blurred effect similar to playing a series of unrelated chords on the piano while holding down the damper pedal. The length of the reverberation depends on the room's size and height, the materials of the floor and walls, the furniture, the audience size, and other factors.

6. Sound may be classified roughly into tones and noises although the line of cleavage is not always sharply drawn. If I throw stones at the side of a barn, sounds are produced, but they are caused by irregular vibrations of an irregularly constructed surface and are referred to as noise. But if I tap the head of a kettle-drum, a regular series of vibrations is set up and the resulting sound is referred to as tone. In general the[Pg 134] material of music consists of tones, but for special effects certain noises are also utilized (cf. castanets, etc.).

6. Sound can be roughly divided into tones and noises, although the distinction isn't always clear-cut. If I throw stones at the side of a barn, it creates sounds, but those are caused by irregular vibrations of an uneven surface and are considered noise. However, if I hit the head of a kettle-drum, it generates a regular series of vibrations and the resulting sound is referred to as tone. Generally, the[Pg 134] material of music is made up of tones, but certain noises are also used for special effects (e.g., castanets, etc.).

7. Musical tones have three properties, viz.:

7. Musical tones have three properties, namely:

1. Pitch.

Proposal.

2. Intensity.

2. Focus.

3. Quality (timbre).

3. Sound quality.

By pitch is meant the highness or lowness of tone. It depends upon rate of vibration. If a body vibrates only 8 or 10 times per second no tone is heard at all: but if it vibrates regularly at the rate of 16 or 18 per second a tone of very low pitch is heard. If it vibrates at the rate of 24 the pitch is higher, at 30 higher still, at 200 yet higher, and when a rate of about 38,000 per second has been reached the pitch is so high that most ears cannot perceive it at all. The highest tone that can ordinarily be heard is the E four octaves higher than the highest E of the piano. The entire range of sound humanly audible is therefore about eleven octaves (rates 16-38,000), but only about eight of these octaves are utilized for musical purposes. The tones of the piano (with a range of 7-1/3 octaves) are produced by vibration rates approximately between 27 and 4224. In the orchestra the range is slightly more extended, the rates being from 33 to 4752.

By pitch, we mean how high or low a tone is. It depends on the vibration rate. If a body vibrates only 8 or 10 times per second, no tone is heard at all. But if it vibrates consistently at 16 or 18 times per second, a very low tone is heard. If it vibrates at 24, the pitch is higher; at 30, it's even higher; at 200, it's yet higher; and when it reaches around 38,000 vibrations per second, the pitch is so high that most people can't hear it at all. The highest tone that can usually be heard is the E four octaves above the highest E on the piano. So, the total range of sounds that humans can hear is about eleven octaves (from rates of 16 to 38,000), but only about eight of those octaves are used for music. The tones from the piano (which has a range of 7-1/3 octaves) are produced by vibration rates roughly between 27 and 4224. In an orchestra, the range is slightly wider, with rates from 33 to 4752.

Certain interesting facts regarding the relation between vibration-rates and pitches have been worked out: it has been discovered for instance that if the number of vibrations is doubled, the pitch of the resulting tone is an octave higher; i.e., if a string vibrating at the rate of 261 per second gives rise to the pitch c', then a string one-half as long and vibrating twice as rapidly (522) will give rise to the pitch c'', i.e., an octave higher than c'. In the same way it has been found that if the rate is multiplied by 5/4 the pitch of the tone will be a major third higher; if multiplied by 3/2, a perfect fifth higher, etc. These laws are often stated thus: the ratio of the octave to the fundamental is as two is to one; that of the major third as five is to[Pg 135] four; that of the perfect fifth as three is to two, and so on through the entire series of pitches embraced within the octave, the ratio being of course the same for all octaves.

Certain interesting facts about the relationship between vibration rates and pitches have been identified: for example, it's been found that if the number of vibrations doubles, the pitch of the resulting tone is an octave higher; i.e., if a string vibrating at 261 times per second produces the pitch c', then a string half as long and vibrating twice as fast (522) will produce the pitch c'', i.e., an octave higher than c'. Similarly, it has been discovered that if the rate is multiplied by 5/4, the pitch of the tone will be a major third higher; if multiplied by 3/2, a perfect fifth higher, and so forth. These principles are often summarized like this: the ratio of the octave to the fundamental is two to one; that of the major third is five to four; that of the perfect fifth is three to two, and this pattern continues through the entire range of pitches within the octave, with the ratio remaining consistent across all octaves.

9. The intensity (loudness or softness) of tones depends upon the amplitude (width) of the vibrations, a louder tone being the result of vibrations of greater amplitude, and vice versa. This may be verified by plucking a long string (on cello or double-bass) and noting that when plucked gently vibrations of small amplitude are set up, while a vigorous pluck results in much wider vibrations, and, consequently, in a louder tone. It should be noted that the pitch of the tone is not affected by the change in amplitude of vibration.

9. The intensity (how loud or soft a sound is) of tones relies on the amplitude (width) of the vibrations. A louder tone comes from vibrations with greater amplitude, and the opposite is true for softer tones. You can see this by plucking a long string (like on a cello or double-bass): when you pluck it gently, it creates small amplitude vibrations, while a strong pluck leads to much larger vibrations, resulting in a louder sound. It's important to note that the pitch of the tone isn't changed by the amplitude of the vibrations.

The intensity of tones varies with the medium conveying them, being usually louder at night because the air is then more elastic. Tone intensity is also affected by sympathetic vibrations set up in other bodies. If two strings of the same length are stretched side by side and one set in vibration so as to produce tone the other will soon begin to vibrate also and the combined tone will be louder than if only one string produced it. This phenomenon is the basis of what is known as resonance (cf. body of violin, resonance cavities of nose and mouth, sounding board of piano, etc.).

The intensity of tones changes depending on the medium carrying them, typically being louder at night because the air is more elastic then. Tone intensity is also influenced by sympathetic vibrations generated in other objects. If two strings of the same length are placed side by side and one is set in motion to produce a tone, the other will soon start to vibrate as well, and the combined sound will be louder than if only one string produced it. This phenomenon is the basis of what we call resonance (cf. body of the violin, resonance cavities of the nose and mouth, sounding board of the piano, etc.).

10. Quality depends upon the shape (or form) of the vibrations which give rise to the tone. A series of simple vibrations will cause a simple (or colorless) tone, while complex vibrations (giving rise to overtones of various kinds and in a variety of proportions) cause more individualistic peculiarities of quality. Quality is affected also by the shape and size of the resonance body. (Cf. last part of sec. 9 above.)

10. Quality is influenced by the shape (or form) of the vibrations that produce the sound. A series of simple vibrations results in a straightforward (or colorless) tone, whereas complex vibrations (which produce various overtones in different proportions) create more unique characteristics of quality. The quality is also impacted by the shape and size of the resonance body. (Cf. last part of sec. 9 above.)

11. Practically every musical tone really consists of a combination of several tones sounding simultaneously, the combined effect upon the ear giving the impression of a single tone. The most important tone of the series is the fundamental, which dominates the combination and gives the pitch,[Pg 136] but this fundamental is practically always combined with a greater or less number of faint and elusive attending tones called overtones or harmonics. The first of these overtones is the octave above the fundamental; the second is the fifth above this octave; the third, two octaves above the fundamental, and so on through the series as shown in the figure below. The presence of these overtones is accounted for by the fact that the string (or other vibrating body) does not merely vibrate in its entirety but has in addition to the principal oscillation a number of sectional movements also. Thus it is easily proved that a string vibrates in halves, thirds, etc., in addition to the principal vibration of the entire string, and it is the vibration of these halves, thirds, etc., which gives rise to the harmonics, or upper partials as they are often called. The figure shows Great C and its first eight overtones. A similar series might be worked out from any other fundamental.

11. Almost every musical tone is actually a mix of several tones playing at the same time, and the overall effect on the ear creates the impression of one single tone. The most important tone in this mix is the fundamental, which dominates and sets the pitch,[Pg 136] but this fundamental is almost always combined with a varying number of soft and subtle accompanying tones called overtones or harmonics. The first of these overtones is the octave above the fundamental; the second is the fifth above that octave; the third is two octaves above the fundamental, and so on through the series as shown in the figure below. The reason these overtones exist is that the string (or other vibrating object) doesn’t just vibrate as a whole but also has several sectional movements in addition to the main oscillation. This means that a string vibrates in halves, thirds, and so on, alongside the main vibration of the full string, and it's the vibrations of these halves, thirds, etc., that create the harmonics, or upper partials as they are sometimes called. The figure shows Great C and its first eight overtones. A similar series can be derived from any other fundamental.

 

Great C

Great C

 

It will be recalled that in the section (10) dealing with quality the statement was made that quality depends upon the shape of the vibrations; it should now be noted that it is the form of these vibrations that determines the nature and proportion of the overtones and hence the quality. Thus e.g., a tone that has too large a proportion of the fourth upper partial (i.e., the third of the chord) will be reedy and somewhat unpleasant. This is the case with many voices that are referred to as nasal. Too great a proportion of overtones is what causes certain pianos to sound "tin-panny." The tone pro[Pg 137]duced by a good tuning-fork is almost entirely free from overtones: it has therefore no distinctive quality and is said to be a simple tone. The characteristic tone of the oboe on the other hand has many overtones and is therefore highly individualistic: this enables us to recognize the tone of the instrument even though we cannot see the player. Such a tone is said to be complex.

It should be recalled that in the section (10) about quality, it was stated that quality depends on the shape of the vibrations. It's important to note now that the form of these vibrations determines the type and amount of overtones, and thus the quality. For instance, a tone that has too high a proportion of the fourth upper partial (i.e., the third of the chord) will sound reedy and somewhat unpleasant. This is often the case with voices referred to as nasal. An excessive amount of overtones is what makes some pianos sound "tin-panny." The tone produced by a good tuning fork is almost completely free from overtones; it lacks distinctive quality and is referred to as a simple tone. In contrast, the characteristic tone of the oboe has many overtones and is therefore very unique: this allows us to recognize the instrument's tone even when we can’t see the player. Such a tone is called complex.

12. The mathematical ratio referred to on page 134, if strictly carried out in tuning a keyboard instrument would cause the half-steps to vary slightly in size, and playing in certain keys (especially those having a number of sharps or flats in the signature) would therefore sound out of tune. There would be many other disadvantages in such a system, notably the inability to modulate freely to other keys, and since modulation is one of the predominant and most striking characteristics of modern music, this would constitute a serious barrier to advances in composition. To obviate these disadvantages a system of equal temperament was invented and has been in universal use since the time of Bach (1685-1750) who was the first prominent composer to use it extensively. Equal temperament means simply dividing the octave into twelve equal parts, thus causing all scales (as played on keyboard instruments at least) to sound exactly alike.

12. The mathematical ratio mentioned on page 134, if applied strictly in tuning a keyboard instrument, would cause the half-steps to be slightly different in size, making certain keys (especially those with several sharps or flats in the signature) sound out of tune. There would be many other downsides to such a system, particularly the inability to easily switch to other keys, and since modulation is one of the main and most striking features of modern music, this would create a significant obstacle to progress in composition. To avoid these issues, a system of equal temperament was developed and has been widely used since the time of Bach (1685-1750), who was the first major composer to use it extensively. Equal temperament simply means dividing the octave into twelve equal parts, which makes all scales (at least when played on keyboard instruments) sound the same.

To show the practicability of equal temperament Bach wrote a series of 48 preludes and fugues, two in each major and two in each minor key. He called the collection "The Well-tempered Clavichord."

To demonstrate the practicality of equal temperament, Bach created a series of 48 preludes and fugues, two in every major key and two in every minor key. He titled the collection "The Well-tempered Clavichord."

13. Various standards of pitch have existed at different times in the last two centuries, and even now there is no absolute uniformity although conditions are much better than they were even twenty-five years ago. Scientists use what is known as the "scientific standard" (sometimes called the "philosophic standard"), viz., 256 double vibrations for "middle C." This pitch is not in actual use for musical purposes, but is retained for theoretical purposes because of its[Pg 138] convenience of computation (being a power of 2). In 1885 a conference of musicians at Vienna ratified the pitch giving Middle C 261 vibrations, this having been adopted by the French as their official pitch some 26 years before. In 1891 a convention of piano manufacturers at Philadelphia adopted this same pitch for the United States, and it has been in practically universal use ever since. This pitch (giving Middle C 261 vibrations) is known as "International Pitch."

13. Different standards of pitch have been used at various times over the past two centuries, and even today there's still no absolute uniformity, although things are much better than they were even twenty-five years ago. Scientists use what's called the "scientific standard" (sometimes referred to as the "philosophic standard"), which is 256 double vibrations for "middle C." This pitch isn't used for practical musical purposes, but it’s kept for theoretical reasons because it’s[Pg 138]easy to compute (being a power of 2). In 1885, a conference of musicians in Vienna approved the pitch that sets Middle C at 261 vibrations, which had been adopted by the French as their official pitch about 26 years earlier. In 1891, a gathering of piano manufacturers in Philadelphia accepted this same pitch for the United States, and it has been almost universally used ever since. This pitch (which gives Middle C 261 vibrations) is known as "International Pitch."

Concert pitch is slightly higher than International, the difference between the two varying somewhat, but being almost always less than one-half step. This higher pitch is still often used by bands and sometimes by orchestras to give greater brilliancy to the wind instruments.

Concert pitch is a bit higher than International, with the difference between the two varying somewhat, but it’s usually less than a half step. This higher pitch is still often used by bands and sometimes by orchestras to make the wind instruments sound more brilliant.

References

References

Lavignac—Music and Musicians, pp. 1-66.

Lavignac—Music and Musicians, pp. 1-66.

Broadhouse—The Student's Helmholz.

Broadhouse—The Student's Helmholtz.

Helmholtz—Sensations of Tone.

Helmholtz—The Sensations of Sound.

Hamilton—Sound and its Relation to Music.

Hamilton—Sound and its Relationship to Music.

Note:—For a simple and illuminating treatment of the subject from the standpoint of the music student, the books by Lavignac and Hamilton are especially recommended.

Note:—For a clear and insightful discussion of the topic from the perspective of a music student, the books by Lavignac and Hamilton are highly recommended.


APPENDIX D

Terminology Update

A recent writer[43] on vocal terminology makes the following statement as an introduction to certain remarks advocating a more definite use of terms relating to tone production by the human voice:—"The correct use of words is the most potent factor in the development of the thinker." If this statement has any basis of fact whatsoever to support it then it must be evident to the merest novice in musical work that the popular use of many common terms by musicians is keeping a good many people from clear and logical thought in a field that needs accurate thinkers very badly! However this may be, it must be patent to all that our present terminology is in many respects neither correct nor logical, and the movement inaugurated by the Music Section of the National Education Association some years ago to secure greater uniformity in the use and definition of certain expressions should therefore not only command the respect and commendation, but the active support of all progressive teachers of music.

A recent writer[43] on vocal terminology makes the following statement as an introduction to some comments promoting a clearer use of terms related to how the human voice produces sound:—"Using words correctly is the most powerful factor in developing a thinker." If this statement is even somewhat true, then it's clear to even a beginner in music that the common use of many basic terms by musicians is preventing a lot of people from thinking clearly and logically in a field that desperately needs precise thinkers! Regardless, it's obvious to everyone that our current terminology is often neither correct nor logical, and the effort started by the Music Section of the National Education Association a few years ago to achieve more consistency in the use and definition of certain terms should not only earn the respect and praise but also the active support of all forward-thinking music educators.

Let it be noted at the outset that such reforms as are advocated by the committee will never come into general use while the rank and file of teachers throughout the country merely approve the reports so carefully compiled and submitted each year: these reforms will become effective only as individual teachers make up their minds that the end to be attained is worth the trouble of being careful to use only correct[Pg 140] terminology every day for a month, or three months, or a year—whatever length of time may be necessary in order to get the new habits fixed in mind and muscle.

Let it be clear from the start that the reforms suggested by the committee won't become widely accepted as long as average teachers across the country just approve the reports that are put together and presented each year. These reforms will only take effect when individual teachers decide that the goal is worth the effort of consistently using the correct[Pg 140] terminology every day for a month, three months, or even a year—however long it takes to establish these new habits in their thinking and actions.

The Terminology Committee was appointed by the Department of Music of the N.E.A. in 1906 and made its first report at Los Angeles in 1907. Since then the indefatigable chairman of the committee (Mr. Chas. I. Rice, of Worcester, Mass.) has contributed generously of both time and strength, and has by his annual reports to the Department set many of us to thinking along certain new lines, and has caused some of us at any rate to adopt in our own teaching certain changes of terminology which have enabled us to make our work more effective.

The Terminology Committee was established by the Department of Music of the N.E.A. in 1906 and delivered its first report in Los Angeles in 1907. Since then, the tireless chairman of the committee, Mr. Chas. I. Rice from Worcester, Mass., has generously given his time and effort. His annual reports to the Department have inspired many of us to think in new ways, leading some of us to adopt changes in terminology in our own teaching that have made our work more effective.

In his first report Mr. Rice says:

In his first report, Mr. Rice states:

"Any one who has observed the teaching of school music in any considerable number of places in this country cannot fail to have remarked the great diversity of statement employed by different teachers regarding the facts which we are engaged in teaching, and the equal diversity of terminology used in teaching the symbols by which musicians seek to record these facts. To the teacher of exact sciences our picturesque use of the same term to describe two or more entirely different things never ceases to be a marvel.... Thoughtful men and women will become impressed with the untruthfulness of certain statements and little by little change their practice. Others will follow, influenced by example. The revolutionists will deride us for not moving faster while the conservatives will be suspicious of any change."

"Anyone who has observed music education in various places across the country can't help but notice the huge variety of explanations used by different teachers about the facts we're trying to teach, along with the equally varied terminology employed to teach the symbols musicians use to record these facts. For teachers of exact sciences, our colorful use of the same term to describe two or more completely different things is always surprising.... Thoughtful individuals will become aware of the inaccuracies in certain statements and gradually adjust their methods. Others will follow, influenced by example. The revolutionaries will mock us for not progressing faster, while the conservatives will be wary of any change."

At this meeting in Los Angeles a list of thirteen points was recommended by the committee and adopted by the Music Department. These points are given in the N.E.A. Volume of Proceedings for 1907, p. 875.

At this meeting in Los Angeles, the committee recommended a list of thirteen points that were adopted by the Music Department. These points can be found in the N.E.A. Volume of Proceedings for 1907, p. 875.

Since 1907 the committee (consisting of Chas. I. Rice, P.C. Hayden, W.B. Kinnear, Leo R. Lewis, and Constance[Pg 141] Barlow-Smith) have each year selected a number of topics for discussion, and have submitted valuable reports recommending the adoption of certain reforms. Some of the points recommended have usually been rejected by the Department, but many of them have been adopted and the reports of the committee have set many teachers thinking and have made us all more careful in the use and definition of common terms. A complete list of all points adopted by the Department since 1907 has been made by Mr. Rice for School Music, and this list is here reprinted from the January, 1913, number of that magazine.

Since 1907, the committee (made up of Chas. I. Rice, P.C. Hayden, W.B. Kinnear, Leo R. Lewis, and Constance[Pg 141] Barlow-Smith) has each year chosen several topics for discussion and has submitted valuable reports recommending certain reforms. Some of the recommended points have typically been rejected by the Department, but many have been accepted, and the committee's reports have prompted many teachers to reflect and have made us all more careful in how we use and define common terms. Mr. Rice has compiled a complete list of all points adopted by the Department since 1907 for School Music, and this list is reprinted here from the January 1913 issue of that magazine.

Terminology Adoptions, 1907-1910

Terminology Adoptions, 1907-1910

1. Tone: Specific name for a musical sound of definite pitch. Use neither sound, a general term, nor note, a term of notation.

1. Tone: A specific name for a musical sound with a definite pitch. Do not use sound, which is a general term, nor note, which refers to notation.

2. Interval: The pitch relation between two tones. Not properly applicable to a single tone or scale degree. Example: "Sing the fifth tone of the scale." Not "sing the fifth interval of the scale."

2. Interval: The relationship in pitch between two tones. It doesn't really apply to a single tone or scale degree. For example: "Sing the fifth tone of the scale." Not "sing the fifth interval of the scale."

3. Key: Tones in relation to a tonic. Example: In the key of G. Not in the scale of G. Scales, major and minor are composed of a definite selection from the many tones of the key, and all scales extend through at least one octave of pitch. The chromatic scale utilizes all the tones of a key within the octave.

3. Key: Tones related to a tonic. Example: In the key of G. Not in the scale of G. Scales, both major and minor, are made up of a specific selection from the various tones of the key, and all scales cover at least one octave of pitch. The chromatic scale includes all the tones of a key within the octave.

4. Natural: Not a suitable compound to use in naming pitches. Pitch names are either simple: B, or compound: B sharp, B double-sharp, B flat or B double-flat, and there is no pitch named "B natural." Example: Pitch B, not "B natural."

4. Natural: Not a suitable term to use when naming pitches. Pitch names are either simple: B, or compound: B sharp, B double sharp, B flat, or B double flat, and there is no pitch called "B natural." Example: Pitch B, not "B natural."

Note:—L.R.L. thinks that B natural should be the name when the notation suggests it.

Note:—L.R.L. believes that B natural should be used as the name when the notation implies it.

5. Step, Half-step: Terms of interval measurement. Avoid tone, semi-tone or half-tone. Major second and minor second are interval names. Example: How large are the following intervals? (1) Major second, (2) minor second, (3) augmented prime. Answer: (1) a step, (2) a half-step, (3) a half-step.

5. Step, Half-step: Terms for measuring intervals. Avoid tone, semi-tone, or half-tone. Major second and minor second are names for intervals. Example: What are the sizes of the following intervals? (1) Major second, (2) minor second, (3) augmented prime. Answer: (1) a step, (2) a half-step, (3) a half-step.

6. Chromatic: A tone of the key which is not a member of its diatonic scale. (N.B.) An accidental (a notation sign) is not a chromatic sign unless it makes a staff-degree represent a chromatic tone.[Pg 142]

6. Chromatic: A tone in the key that isn't part of its diatonic scale. (N.B.) An accidental (a notation sign) isn’t a chromatic sign unless it makes a staff degree represent a chromatic tone.[Pg 142]

7. Major; Minor: Major and Minor keys having the same signature should be called relative major and minor. Major and minor keys having the same tonic, but different signatures, should be called tonic major and minor. Not "parallel" major or minor in either case.

7. Major; Minor: Major and minor keys that have the same signature should be referred to as relative major and minor. Major and minor keys that share the same tonic but have different signatures should be called tonic major and minor. They should not be referred to as "parallel" major or minor in either case.

8. Staff: Five horizontal lines and their spaces. Staff lines are named (numbered) upward in order, first to fifth. Spaces: Space below, first-second-third-fourth-space, and space above[44]. (Six in all.) Additional short lines and their short spaces numbered outward both ways from the main staff, viz: line below, second space below. The boundary of the staff is always a space.

8. Staff: Five horizontal lines and the spaces between them. The staff lines are named (or numbered) from the bottom to the top, first to fifth. Spaces: Space below, first-second-third-fourth-space, and space above[44]. (Six in total.) There are also extra short lines and their short spaces numbered outward in both directions from the main staff, such as: line below and second space below. The boundary of the staff is always defined by a space.

9. G Clef, F Clef, C Clef: These clefs when placed upon the staff, give its degrees their first, or primary pitch meaning. Each makes the degree it occupies represent a pitch of its respective name. Example: The G clef makes the second line represent the pitch G. Avoid "fixes G on." The staff with clef in position represents only pitches having simple or one-word names, A, B, C, etc.

9. G Clef, F Clef, C Clef: When these clefs are placed on the staff, they assign their first or primary pitch meanings to the lines. Each clef causes the line it occupies to indicate a pitch of its respective name. For example, the G clef makes the second line represent the pitch G. Avoid saying "fixes G on." The staff with the clef in place only represents pitches that have simple or one-word names, like A, B, C, etc.

10. Sharps, Flats: Given a staff with clef in position as in example above, sharps and flats make staff degrees upon which they are placed represent pitches a half-step higher or lower. These pitches have compound or two-word names. Example: The second line stands for the pitch G (simple name). Sharp the second line and it will stand for the pitch G sharp. (Compound name.) The third line stands for the pitch B. (Simple name.) Flat it, and the line will stand for the pitch B flat. (Compound name.) N.B. These signs do not "raise" or "lower" notes, tones, pitches, letters or staff degrees.

10. Sharps, Flats: When you have a staff with the clef in the position shown in the example above, sharps and flats make the staff degrees they’re placed on represent pitches that are a half-step higher or lower. These pitches have compound or two-word names. For example, the second line represents the pitch G (simple name). If you add a sharp to the second line, it represents the pitch G sharp (compound name). The third line represents the pitch B (simple name). If you flat it, the line represents the pitch B flat (compound name). N.B. These signs do not "raise" or "lower" notes, tones, pitches, letters, or staff degrees.

11. Double-sharp, Double-flat: Given a staff with three or more degrees sharped in the signature, double-sharps are used (subject to the rules governing composition) to make certain of these degrees, already sharped, represent pitches one half-step higher yet. Similarly, when three or more degrees are flatted in the signature, double-flats are used to make certain degrees already flatted, represent pitches one half-step lower yet. Examples: To represent sharp 2 in the key of B major, double-sharp the C degree, or (equally good) double-sharp the third space (G clef). To represent flat 6 in the key of D flat major, double-flat the B degree, or (equally good) double flat the third line (G clef). Do not say: "Put a double-sharp on 6" or "put a double-sharp on C," or "indicate" a higher or lower pitch "on" a sharped or flatted degree.

11. Double-sharp, Double-flat: When there are three or more sharps in the signature, double-sharps are used (following the rules of composition) to indicate that certain already sharped degrees represent pitches that are one half-step higher. Similarly, if there are three or more flats in the signature, double-flats are used to indicate that certain already flatted degrees represent pitches that are one half-step lower. Examples: To indicate sharp 2 in the key of B major, double-sharp the C degree, or you can also double-sharp the third space (G clef). To indicate flat 6 in the key of D flat major, double-flat the B degree, or you can also double-flat the third line (G clef). Do not say: "Put a double-sharp on 6" or "put a double-sharp on C," or "indicate" a higher or lower pitch "on" a sharped or flatted degree.

12. Signature: Sharps or flats used as signatures affect the staff de[Pg 143]grees they occupy and all octaves of the same. Example: With signature of four sharps, the first one affects the fifth line and the first space; the second, the third space; the third, the space above and the second line; the fourth, the fourth line and the space below. Do not say: "F and C are sharped," "ti is sharped," "B is flatted," "fa is flatted." "Sharpened" or "flattened" are undesirable.

12. Signature: Sharps or flats used as signatures impact the staff de[Pg 143]grees they occupy and all octaves of the same. For example: With a signature of four sharps, the first one affects the fifth line and the first space; the second affects the third space; the third affects the space above and the second line; the fourth affects the fourth line and the space below. Do not say: "F and C are sharped," "ti is sharped," "B is flatted," "fa is flatted." "Sharpened" or "flattened" are not recommended.

13. Brace: The two or more staffs containing parts to be sounded together; also the vertical line or bracket connecting such staffs. Not "line" or "score." "Staff" is better than "line" for a single staff, and "score" is used meaning the book containing an entire work, as "vocal score," "orchestral score," "full score."

13. Brace: The two or more staves that hold notes to be played together; also, the vertical line or bracket that connects those staves. Not "line" or "score." "Staff" is preferable to "line" for a single staff, and "score" refers to the book containing a whole piece, such as "vocal score," "orchestral score," or "full score."

14. Notes: Notes are characters designed to represent relative duration. When placed on staff-degrees they indicate pitch. (Note the difference between "represent" and "indicate.") "Sing what the note calls for" means, sing a tone of the pitch represented by the staff degree occupied by the note-head. The answer to the question: "What is that note?" would be "half-note," "eighth-note" according to the denomination of the note in question, whether it was on or off the staff.

14. Notes: Notes are symbols created to show how long something lasts. When they are placed on the lines or spaces of the staff, they indicate the pitch. (Keep in mind the difference between "represent" and "indicate.") "Sing what the note calls for" means to sing a tone that matches the pitch shown by the position of the note head on the staff. The answer to the question: "What is that note?" would be "half note," "eighth note," depending on what kind of note it is, whether it's on or off the staff.

15. Measure-sign: 4-4, 2-4, 6-8, are measure-signs. Avoid "time signatures," "meter-signatures," "the fraction," "time-marks." Example: What is the measure-sign? (C) Ans. A broken circle. What is its meaning? Ans. Four-quarter measure. (Not four-four time, four-four rhythm, four-four meter.)

15. Measure-sign: 4-4, 2-4, 6-8, are measure-signs. Avoid "time signatures," "meter-signatures," "the fraction," "time-marks." Example: What is the measure-sign? (C) Ans. A broken circle. What is its meaning? Ans. Four-quarter measure. (Not four-four time, four-four rhythm, four-four meter.)

16. Note Placing: Place a quarter note on the fourth line. Not "put a quarter note on D."

16. Note Placing: Put a quarter note on the fourth line. Not "put a quarter note on D."

17. Beat-Pulse: A tone or rest occurs on a certain beat or pulse of a measure. Not on a certain count.

17. Beat-Pulse: A sound or silence happens on a specific beat or pulse of a measure. Not on a specific count.

18. Signature Terminology: The right hand sharp in the signature is on the staff degree that represents seven of the major scale. Not "always on 7 or ti."

18. Signature Terminology: The sharp mark on the right side of the signature indicates the note on the staff that corresponds to seven of the major scale. Not "always on 7 or ti."

19. Signature Terminology: The right hand flat in the signature is on the staff degree that represents four of the major scale. Not "always on fa."

19. Signature Terminology: The flat symbol for the right hand in the signature is placed on the staff note that represents the fourth degree of the major scale. Not "always on fa."

20. Rote, Note, Syllable: Singing by rote means that the singer sings something learned by ear without regard to notes. Singing by note means that the singer is guided to the correct pitch by visible notes. Singing by syllable means that the singer sings the tones of a song or part to the sol-fa syllables instead of to words, neutral vowels or the hum. "Sing by note" is not correct if the direction means simply to sing the[Pg 144] sol-fa syllables, whether in sight reading, rote singing, or memory work. "Sing by syllable" would be correct in each case.

20. Rote, Note, Syllable: Singing by rote means the singer performs something learned by ear without paying attention to the notes. Singing by note means the singer is guided to the right pitch using visible notes. Singing by syllable means the singer uses the sol-fa syllables to sing the tones of a song or part instead of using words, neutral vowels, or humming. "Sing by note" is inaccurate if it simply means to sing the[Pg 144] sol-fa syllables, whether in sight reading, rote singing, or memorization. "Sing by syllable" would be the correct term in all cases.

Adoptions of the 1911 Meeting at San Francisco

Adoptions from the 1911 Meeting in San Francisco

Arabic numerals, either 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, or 12, placed on the staff directly after the signature and above the third line, show the number of beats in a measure.

Arabic numerals, whether 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, or 12, positioned on the staff right after the signature and above the third line, indicate the number of beats in a measure.

A note, either a quarter or a dotted quarter, placed in parenthesis under the numeral, represents the length of one beat and is called the beat-note.

A note, either a quarter note or a dotted quarter note, placed in parentheses under the numeral, represents the length of one beat and is called the beat note.

The numeral and the beat-note thus grouped constitute the measure-sign.

The number and the beat-note grouped together make up the measure-sign.

Illustrative statements covering proper terminology: the tune "America" is written in three-quarter measure. The chorus: "How lovely are the Messengers" is written in two-dotted quarter measure.

Illustrative statements covering proper terminology: the tune "America" is written in 3/4 time. The chorus: "How lovely are the Messengers" is written in 2 dotted quarter time.

The above forms of statement were adopted at Denver in 1909, and are recommended for general use when speaking of music written with the conventional measure-signs, etc.

The statements above were adopted in Denver in 1909 and are suggested for general use when discussing music written with standard measure signs, etc.

In place of: "two-two time, three-eight time, four-four time," say as above: "This piece is written in two-half measure, three-eighth measure, four-quarter measure."

In place of: "two-two time, three-eight time, four-four time," say as above: "This piece is written in two-half measure, three-eighth measure, four-quarter measure."

Minor Scales

Minor Scales

Primitive Minor (ascending)

Basic Minor (ascending)

The minor scale form having minor sixth and minor seventh above tonic to be called Primitive Minor.

The minor scale has a minor sixth and minor seventh above the tonic, which is referred to as Primitive Minor.

Illustrative examples. A minor: a, b, c, d, e, f, g, a; C minor: c, d, e flat, f, g, a flat, b flat, c.

Illustrative examples. A minor: a, b, c, d, e, f, g, a; C minor: c, d, e flat, f, g, a flat, b flat, c.

Transcriber's Note: Above, supplied b flat missing from original.

Transcriber's Note: Above, b flat that was missing from the original has been added.

Primitive Minor (descending)

Basic Minor (descending)

Same pitches in reverse order.

Same pitches in reverse order.

Harmonic Minor (ascending)

Harmonic Minor (ascending)

The minor scale form having minor sixth and major seventh above tonic to be called Harmonic Minor.

The minor scale that has a minor sixth and a major seventh above the tonic is called the Harmonic Minor.

Illustrative examples. A minor: a, b, c, d, e, f, g sharp, a; C minor: c, d, e flat, f, g, a flat, b, c.

Illustrative examples. A minor: A, B, C, D, E, F, G#, A; C minor: C, D, E♭, F, G, A♭, B, C.

Harmonic Minor (descending)

Harmonic Minor (descending)

Same pitches in reverse order.[Pg 145]

Same pitches in reverse order.

Melodic Minor (ascending)

Melodic Minor scale (ascending)

The minor scale form having major sixth and major seventh above tonic to be called Melodic Minor.

The minor scale that has a major sixth and a major seventh above the tonic is called the Melodic Minor.

Illustrative examples. A minor: a, b, c, d, e, f sharp, g sharp, a; C minor: c, d, e flat, f, g, a, b, c.

Illustrative examples. A minor: A, B, C, D, E, F#, G#; C minor: C, D, E♭, F, G, A, B, C.

Melodic Minor (descending)

Melodic Minor (descending)

Same as the Primitive.

Same as the Basics.

Adoptions of the 1912 Meeting at Chicago

Decisions from the 1912 Chicago Meeting

Pulse and Beat

Pulse & Beat

The Committee finds that the words: Pulse and Beat are in general use as synonymous terms, meaning one of the succession of throbs or impulses of which we are conscious when listening to music. Each of these pulses or beats has an exact point of beginning, a duration, and an exact point of ending, the latter coincident with the beginning of the next pulse or beat. When thus used, both words are terms of ear.

The Committee finds that the terms "Pulse" and "Beat" are commonly used interchangeably, referring to the series of throbs or impulses we notice when listening to music. Each of these pulses or beats has a specific starting point, a duration, and a clear endpoint, which aligns with the start of the following pulse or beat. When used in this way, both words relate to auditory perception.

Beat

Track

One of these words, Beat, is also in universal use, meaning one of a series of physical motions by means of which a conductor holds his group of performers to a uniform movement.

One of these words, Beat, is also commonly used, meaning one of a series of physical movements that a conductor uses to keep their group of performers in sync.

When thus used it becomes a term of eye.

When used this way, it becomes a term related to vision.

The conductor's baton, if it is to be authoritative, cannot wander about through the whole duration of the pulse but must move quickly to a point of comparative repose, remaining until just before the arrival of the next pulse when it again makes a rapid swing, finishing coincidently with the initial tone (or silence) of the new pulse.

The conductor's baton, to be effective, can’t just drift around throughout the whole pulse but needs to quickly settle at a point of stability, staying there until just before the next pulse, when it swiftly swings again, landing right as the first tone (or silence) of the new pulse begins.

Thus it is practically the end of the conductor's beat that marks the beginning of the pulse.

Thus, it's basically the end of the conductor's beat that signals the start of the pulse.

The Committee is of opinion that Beat might preferably be used as indicating the outward sign.

The Committee believes that "Beat" might be better used to indicate the outward sign.

Beat-Note

Beat Note

This term "beat-note" is already in use in another important connection (see Terminology Report, 1911) and the Committee recommends that those using the above terms shall say: "This note is an on-the-beat note; this one is an after-the-beat note; this one a before-the-beat note."[Pg 146]

This term "beat-note" is already being used in another important context (see Terminology Report, 1911), and the Committee recommends that those using the above terms should say: "This note is an on-the-beat note; this one is an after-the-beat note; this one is a before-the-beat note."[Pg 146]

Definitions

Definitions

Matters of Ear

Ear Issues

Pulse: The unit of movement in music, one of a series of regularly recurring throbs or impulses.

Pulse: The fundamental beat in music, one of a series of regularly repeating thumps or rhythms.

Measure: A group of pulses.

Measure: A set of beats.

Pulse-Group: Two or more tones grouped within the pulse.

Pulse-Group: Two or more tones combined within the pulse.

Matters of Eye

Eye Matters

Beat: One of a series of conventional movements made by the conductor. This might include any unconventional motion which served to mark the movement of the music, whether made by conductor, performer or auditor.

Beat: One of a series of standard movements made by the conductor. This could include any unusual gesture that helped indicate the flow of the music, whether made by the conductor, performer, or listener.

Beat-Note: A note of the denomination indicated by the measure-sign as the unit of note-value in a given measure.

Beat-Note: A note indicated by the measure-sign as the unit of note value in a specific measure.

Example

Example

Given the following measure-signs: 2-4, 2-2, 2-8, quarter, half, or eighth notes, respectively, are beat-notes.

Given the following time signatures: 2/4, 2/2, 2/8, quarter, half, or eighth notes, respectively, are the beat notes.

Beat-Group: A group of notes or notes and rests, of smaller denomination than the beat-note which represents a full beat from beginning to end and is equal in value to the beat-note. (A beat-group may begin with a rest.)

Beat-Group: A set of notes or notes and rests that are shorter than the beat-note, which represents a complete beat from start to finish and holds the same value as the beat-note. (A beat-group can start with a rest.)

On-the-Beat Note (or rest): Any note (or rest) ranging in value from a full beat down, which calls for musical action (or inaction) synchronously with the conductor's beat.

On-the-Beat Note (or rest): Any note (or rest) that lasts for a full beat, indicating musical action (or inaction) that corresponds directly with the conductor's beat.

After-the-Beat Note: Any note in a beat-group which indicates that a tone is to be sounded after the beginning, and before or at the middle of the pulse.

After-the-Beat Note: Any note in a beat group that signals a tone should be played after the start, and before or at the middle of the pulse.

Before-the-Beat Note: Any note in a beat-group which indicates that a tone is to be sounded after the middle of the pulse.

Before-the-Beat Note: Any note in a beat group that shows a tone is to be played after the middle of the pulse.

To illustrate terminology and to differentiate between Pulse and Beat as terms, respectively of ear and eye, the following is submitted:

To explain the terminology and to distinguish between Pulse and Beat as terms related to hearing and sight, the following is provided:

Whenever a brief tone involves the musical idea of syncopation, it may be regarded as an after-the-pulse tone and the note that calls for it as an after-the-beat note; when it involves the idea of anticipation or preparation it may be regarded as a before-the-pulse tone, and the note that calls for it, as a before-the-beat note.[Pg 147]

Whenever a short tone includes the musical concept of syncopation, it can be seen as an after-the-pulse tone, and the note that leads to it as an after-the-beat note; when it encompasses the idea of anticipation or preparation, it can be viewed as a before-the-pulse tone, and the note that leads to it as a before-the-beat note.[Pg 147]

Measure and Meter

Measure and Meter

"What is the measure-sign?"

"What is the measurement sign?"

"What is the meter-signature?"

"What is the time signature?"

These two words are used synonymously, and one of them is unnecessary. The Committee recommends that Measure be retained and used. Meter has its use in connection with hymns.

These two words are used interchangeably, and one of them isn’t needed. The Committee suggests keeping and using Measure. Meter has its purpose when it comes to hymns.


The author does not find it possible at present to agree with all the recommendations made in the above report, but the summary is printed in full for the sake of completeness.

The author currently cannot agree with all the recommendations made in the report above, but the summary is included in full for the sake of completeness.

The Music Teacher's National Association has also interested itself mildly in the subject of terminology reform, and at its meeting in Washington, D.C., in 1908, Professor Waldo S. Pratt gave his address as president of the Association on the subject "System and Precision in Musical Speech." This address interested the members of the Association to such an extent that Professor Pratt was asked to act as a committee whose purpose it should be to look into the matter of reforms necessary in music terminology and report at a later session. In 1910 Professor Pratt read a report in which he advocated the idea of making some changes in music nomenclature, but took the ground that the subject is too comprehensive to be mastered in the short time that can be given to it by a committee, and that it is therefore impossible to recommend specific changes. He also took occasion to remark that one difficulty in the whole matter of terminology is that many terms and expressions are used colloquially and that such use although usually not scientific, is often not distinctly harmful and is not of sufficient importance to cause undue excitement on the part of reformers. Quoting from the report at this point:—"A great deal of confusion is more apparent than real between note and tone, between step and degree, between key and tonality. No practical harm is done by speaking of the first note of a piece when really first tone would be more[Pg 148] accurate. To say that a piece is written in the key of B is more convenient than to say that it is written in the tonality of which B is the tonic. The truth is that some of the niceties of expression upon which insistence is occasionally laid are merely fussy, not because they have not some sort of reason, but because they fail to take into account the practical difference between colloquial or off-hand speech and the diction of a scientific treatise. This is said without forgetting that colloquialism always needs watching and that some people form the habit of being careless or positively uncouth as if it were a mark of high artistic genius."

The Music Teacher's National Association has also shown some interest in terminology reform. At its meeting in Washington, D.C., in 1908, Professor Waldo S. Pratt delivered his presidential address titled "System and Precision in Musical Speech." This talk caught the attention of the Association's members to the extent that they asked Professor Pratt to lead a committee focused on identifying necessary reforms in music terminology and reporting back at a later session. In 1910, Professor Pratt presented a report advocating for changes in music nomenclature, but he argued that the topic is too broad to fully address in the limited time available to a committee, making it impossible to recommend specific changes. He noted that a significant challenge in terminology is that many terms and phrases are used colloquially, and while this usage may not be scientifically precise, it often isn't harmful enough to warrant excessive concern from reform advocates. Quoting from the report:—"A lot of confusion is more apparent than real, such as between note and tone, between step and degree, between key and tonality. No practical harm comes from referring to the first note of a piece when first tone would be more[Pg 148] accurate. It's more convenient to say a piece is written in the key of B than to say it's composed in the tonality where B is the tonic. The reality is that some of the finer points of expression that people sometimes insist upon are just pedantic. This isn't to say they lack reasoning; rather, they don't consider the practical differences between casual or informal speech and the language used in a scientific paper. This is mentioned without forgetting that colloquialism requires attention, and some individuals develop a tendency to be careless or downright rude, as if it signaled high artistic talent."

Professor Pratt's report is thus seen to be philosophic rather than constructive, and terminology reform will undoubtedly make more immediate progress through the efforts of the N.E.A. Committee with its specific recommendations (even though these are sometimes admittedly fussy) than through the policy of the M.T.N.A. of waiting for some one to get time to take up the subject in a scholarly way. Nevertheless the philosophic view is sometimes badly needed, especially when the spirit of reform becomes too rabid and attaches too great importance to trifles. A judicious intermingling of the two committees in a series of joint meetings would undoubtedly result in mutual helpfulness, and possibly also in a more tangible and convincing statement of principles than has yet been formulated by either.

Professor Pratt's report is seen as more philosophical than practical, and the N.E.A. Committee’s specific recommendations will likely lead to faster changes in terminology reform (even if they can be a bit fussy) compared to the M.T.N.A.'s approach of waiting for someone to find time to explore the topic in a scholarly manner. However, a philosophical perspective is often crucial, especially when the push for reform gets too extreme and places too much emphasis on minor details. A thoughtful collaboration between the two committees through a series of joint meetings would likely lead to mutual benefits and could result in a more concrete and persuasive statement of principles than either has produced so far.


APPENDIX E

Sonata Op. 31, No. 3 by Beethoven

Analysis by Arthur E. Heacox,
Oberlin Conservatory of Music

Analysis by Arthur E. Heacox,
Oberlin Conservatory of Music

 

Transcriber's Note: The original book contains only the first movement of the sonata. Click on the "Enlarge" link below each page image to view a larger version of that page. To listen to the music, click here.

Transcriber's Note: The original book includes just the first movement of the sonata. Click on the "Enlarge" link below each page image to see a bigger version of that page. To listen to the music, click here.

 

First Subject 17 measures, E major, as follows: 8 meas. presentation, one meas. link, 8 meas. repetition oct. higher. Rhythmic elements are A, B, C, all presented in first 8 meas.

First Subject 17 measures, E major, as follows: 8 measures for the presentation, 1 measure for the link, and 8 measures for the repetition an octave higher. The rhythmic elements are A, B, and C, all presented in the first 8 measures.

Sonata p. 1

Sonata p. 1

Sonata p. 2

Sonata p. 2

Sonata p. 3

Sonata p. 3

Sonata p. 4

Sonata p. 4

Sonata p. 5

Sonata p. 5

Sonata p. 6

Sonata p. 6

Sonata p. 7

Sonata p. 7

Sonata p. 8

Sonata p. 8

Sonata p. 9

Sonata p. 9

Sonata p. 10

Sonata p. 10


INDEX

 

eh = a as in face; ah = a as in far; ch = ch as in chair; final eh = e as in met.

eh = a as in face; ah = a as in far; ch = ch as in chair; final eh = e as in met.

 

A (ah), 95

A battuta (ah-baht-too'-tah), 95

A capella (cah-pel'-lah), 76

A capriccio (cah-pritch'-eo), 54

Accelerando (aht-cheh-leh-rahn'-do), 54

Accented tones, 20

Accent marks, 20

Accent in measures, 44

Acciaccatura (aht-cheea-cah-too'-ra), 25, 26

Accidentals, 9

Accompagnamento (ahc-com-pahn-yah-men'-to), 95

Acoustics (ah-kow'-stics), def., 131
of auditoriums, 133

Adagietto (ah-dah-jee-et'-to), 50

Adagio (ah-dah'-jee-o), 50

À deux mains (doo-mahng), 42

Ad libitum, 54

Affrettando (ahf-fret-tahn'-do), 54

Agitato (ah-jee-tah'-to), 55

Agréments (ah-greh-mahng), 22

À la or alla (ahl'-lah), 42

Alla breve (breh'-veh), 95

Alla marcia (mar'-chee-ah), 95

Allargando (ahl-lahr-gahn'-do), 53

Alla zingara (tseen-gah'-rah), 95

Allegretto (ahl-leh-gret'-to), 51

Allegrissimo, 52

Allegro (ahl-leh'-gro), 50

Allegro agitato (ah-jee-tah'-to), 52

Allegro appassionata (-ah'-tah), 52

Allegro assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 52

Allegro commodo (kom-mo'-do), 52

Allegro con brio (bree'-o), 52

Allegro con fuoco (foo-o'-ko), 53

Allegro con moto (mo'-to), 53

Allegro con spirito (spee'-ree-to), 53

Allegro di bravura (dee brah-voo'-rah), 53

Allegro di molto (mohl'-to), 53

Allegro furioso (foo-ree-o'-so), 53

Allegro giusto (jew-sto), 53

Allegro ma grazioso (mah grah-tsi-o'-so), 53

Allegro (ma) non tanto (tahn'-to), 53

Allegro (ma) non troppo (trop'-po), 53

Allegro moderato (mod-e-rah'-to), 53

Allegro quasi andante (quah-see ahn-dahn'-teh), 53

Allegro vivace (vee-vah'-cheh), 53

Allemande (al-mahnd), 71

All'unisono (oo-nee-so'-no), 95

All'ottava (ot-tah'-vah), 15

Alt (ahlt), 95

Alto (ahl-to), 95

A mezza voce (met'-zah-vo'-cheh), 42

Amore (ah-mo'-reh), 42, 59

Andante (ahn-dahn'-teh), 50

Andante affettuoso (ahf-fet-too-o'-so), 52

Andante amabile (ah-mah'-bee-leh), 52

Andante cantabile (cahn-tah'-bee-leh), 52

Andante con moto (mo'-to), 52

Andante grazioso (grah-tsi-o'-so), 52

Andante maestoso (mah-es-to'-so), 52

Andante (ma) non troppo (mah non trop'-po), 52

Andante pastorale (pahs-to-rah'-leh), 52

[Pg 160]Andante quasi allegro (quah-see ahl-leh'-gro), 52

Andante sostenuto (sos-teh-noo'-to), 52

Animando (ah-nee-mahn'-do), 55

Animato (ah-nee-mah'-to), 55

Animato come sopra (co-meh so'-prah), 55

Andantino (ahn-dahn-tee'-no), 50

Antecedent, 67

Anthem, 76

Anticipation, 93

Antiphony (an-tif'-o-ny), 95

Antithesis (an-tith'-), 67

A piacere (pee-ah-cheh'-reh), 54

Appoggiatura (ap-pod-jea-too'-rah), def., 25

À quatre mains (kahtr-mahng), 95

Arabesque, 95

Aria (ah'-ree-ah), 79

Arioso (ah-ree-o'-so), 95

Arpeggiando (ar-ped-jee-ahn'-do), 21

Arpeggiato (-ah'-to), 21

Arpeggiento (-en'-to), 21

Arpeggio (ar-ped'-jee-o), 21

Art-ballad, 80

Assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 42

A tempo, 54

A tempo primo (pree'-mo), 54

A tempo rubato (roo-bah'-to), 54

Attacca (aht-tah'-kah), 95

Attacca subito (soo'-bee-to), 95

Attacca subito il seguente (eel seg-wen'-teh), 95

Attack, 95


Bagpipe, 95

Ballad, 80

Band, 115

Bar, def. and use, 12
double, 12

Barcarole (bar'-cah-rohl), 95

Baritone, 95

Bass, 95

Bass clarinet, 121

Basso (bahs'-so), 95

Bassoon, 121

Bass staff, 6

Bass tuba, 125

Bass viol, 118

Ben (behn), 42

Ben marcato (mahr-kah'-to), 42

Berceuse (behr-soos'), 95

Binary form, 95

Binary measure, 95

Bis (bees), 96

Bolero (bo-leh'-ro), 71

Bourrée (boo-reh'), 71

Brace, 96

Brass instruments, 116

Brillante (breel-ahn'-teh), 55

Broken chord, 96

Broken octave, 96


Cacophony (kak-of'-o-ny), 96

Cadence, 89

Cadenza, 96

Calando (kah-lahn'-do), 59

Cancel, 3, 8

Cantabile (kahn-tah'-bee-leh), 96

Cantando (kakn-tahn'-do), 96

Canto (kahn'-to), 96

Cantus firmus, 64

Canon, 64

Cantata (kahn-tah'-tah), 77

Carol, 96

Catch, 96

C clef 3, 6

Cello (chel'-lo), 118

Chaconne (shah-con'), 71

Chamber music, 72

Chanterelle (shong-tah-rel'), 117

Chinese scale, 27

Choral, 76

Chords def. and lands, 87
inversions of, 88
common, 87
seventh, 89
dominant seventh, 92

Chromatic, 96

Chromatic scale, 38

Clarinet, 121

Classes of instruments in orchestra, 115

Clavichord, 96

Clefs, 3, 5

Close position, 94

Coda, 70

Coi (co'-ee), 42

Col, 42

[Pg 161]Colla, 42

Colla parte (par'-teh), 96

Colla voce (vo'-cheh), 96

Colle, 42

Collo, 42

Coloratura singing, 79, 96

Coll'ottava (ot-tah'-vah), 15

Combination pedals, 115

Come (koh'-meh), 42

Come primo (pree'-mo), 42

Common chords, 87

Compound measure, 45

Compound duple measure, 45

Con, 42

Con alcuna licenza (ahl-koo'-nah lee-chen'-tsah), 59

Con amore (ah-mo'-reh), 42, 59

Con anima (ah'-nee-mah), 55

Con bravura (brah-voo'-rah), 59

Con celerita (che-leh'-ree-tah), 59

Concerto (con-cher'-to), 72

Concert pitch, 138

Con delicato (deh-lee-cah'-to), 59

Con energico (en-er-jee'-ko), 59

Con espressione (es-pres-see-o'-neh), 59

Con forza (fort'-za), 60

Con fuoco (foo-o'-ko), 60

Con grand' espressione (grahnd' es-pres-see-o'-neh), 60

Con grazia (grahts-yah), 60

Con melinconia (or malinconia) (-leen-ko'-ne-eh), 60

Con moto, 55

Con passione (pas-se-o'-neh), 60

Consequent, 67

Consonance, 96

Con spirito (spe'-ree-to), 60

Con tenerezza (teh-neh-ret'-za), 60

Continuous form, 80

Contra, 42

Contra bass tuba, 126

Contra octave, 16

Contralto, 96

Con variazione (vah-ri-ah-tsi-o'-neh), 96

Cornet, 124

Counterpoint, def., 64, 62, 82

Courante (koo-rahnt'), 71

Crescendo (kre-shen'-do), 57

Crescendo al fortissimo, 58

Crescendo ed affrettando (ahf-fret-tahn'-do), 58

Crescendo ed animando poco a poco (ah-ni-mahn'-do), 58

Crescendo e diminuendo (eh de-me-noo-en'-do), 58

Crescendo molto (mohl'-to), 58

Crescendo poco a poco, 58

Crescendo poco a poco sin al fine (seen ahl fee'-neh), 58

Crescendo poi diminuendo (po'-ee dee-mee-noo-en'-do), 58

Crescendo subito (soo'-bee-to), 58

Cross-stroke, 1, 2

Csardas (tsar'-dahs), 71


Da (dah), 42

Da capo (kah'-po), 13

Dal segno (sehn'-yo), 13

Dances, 71

Dash over note, 17, 20

Decrescendo (deh-kreh-shen'-do), 58

Decrescendo al pianissimo (ahl pee-ahn-is'-si-mo), 58

Degrees of staff, 5

Delicato (deh-lee-kah'-to), 60

Descriptive music, 74

Di (dee), 42

Diatonic condition, 7

Diatonic scale, 28

Di bravura (brah-voo'-rah), 42

Diminuendo (dee-mee-noo-en'-do), 58

Di molto (mohl'-to), 42

Direct, 96

Dirge, 97

Discord, 97

Dissonance (dis'), 97

Divisi (di-ve'-ze), 97

Dolce (dohl'-cheh), 60

Dolce e cantabile (eh kahn-tah'-bee-leh), 60

Dolcissimo (dohl-chis'-see-mo), 60

Dolente (do-len'-teh), 60

Dominant, 36

Dominant Seventh, 92

Doloroso (do-lo-ro'-so), 60

[Pg 162]Doppio (dop'-pee-o), 42

Doppio movimento (mo-vi-men'-to), 55

Dot—where placed, 3
uses of, 17
with slur or tie, 20
with dash, 20

Double bar, 12

Double bass, 118

Double bassoon, 121

Double flat, 3, 7

Double mordent, 23

Double sharp, 3, 7

Doublet, 20

Duet, 97

Duple measure, 46

Dynamics, 56


E (eh), 42

École (eh'-kole), 97

Ed, 42

Eight-foot stop, 114

Elements of music, 82

Embellishments, 22

English names for notes, 11

English horn, 121

Enharmonic, def., 10

Enharmonic scale, 32

Enharmonic tie, 18

Ensemble (ong-sombl), 42

Equal temperament, 137

E poi la coda (eh-po'-ee), 14

Espressivo (ehs-pres-see'-vo), 60

Et, 42

Etto, 42

Etude, 97

Euphony (yu'-fo-ny), 97

Even measure, 46


Facile (fah-chee'-leh), 97

Fanfare (fahn'-fehr), 97

Fantasia (fahn-tah-ze'-ah), 97

F Clef, 3, 5, 6

Fermata (fehr-mah'-ta), 14, 15

Fiasco (fe-ahs'-ko), 97

Figured bass, 89

Fine (fee'-neh), 13

Five-lined octave, 16

Flat, 3, 7

Flute, 119

Folk-song, 81

Form, def., 62
binary, 95

Forte (for'-teh), 56

Forte piano (pee-ah'-no), 56

Forte possibile (pos-see'-bee-leh), 43

Fortissimo, 56

Fortissimo possibile (pos-see-bee-leh), 56

Fortisissimo, 56

Forzando (for-tsahn'-do), 57

Forzato (for-tsah'-to), 57

Four-foot stop, 114

Four-lined octave, 16

Free imitation, 64

French horn, 123

French pitch designations, 6

Fugue, 66

Fundamental, 135


Gamut (gam'-ut), 97

Gavotte (gah-vot'), 71

G Clef, 3, 5, 6

General pause, 15

German pitch designation, 6

Gigue (zheeg), 71

Giocoso (jee-o-ko'-so), 60

Giojoso (jee-o-yo'-so), 60

Glee, 81

Glissando (glis-sahn'-do), 97

Graces, 22

Grandioso (grahn-dee-o'-so), 60

Grand sonata, 74

Grave (grah'-veh), 50

Grazioso (grah-tsi-o'-so), 60

Great octave, 16

Great staff, 5

Grosse pause (gros-seh pah-oo'-za) or (gros-seh pow-zeh), 15

Gruppetto (groo-pet'-to), 22


Habanera (hah-bah-neh'-rah), 71

Half-step, 83

Harmonic minor scale, 33

Harmonics, 136

Harmonics on violin, 117

[Pg 163]Harmony, 82

Harp, 129

Harpsichord, 97

Head of note, 1

Hold, 15

Homophonic style, 63

Hook, 1

Humoresque (hoo-mo-resk'), 97

Hymn to St. John, 37


Idyl, 97

Il (eel), 42

Il basso (bahs'-so), 42

Il più (pee'-oo), 42

Il più forte possibile (pos-see'-bee-leh), 42

Imitation, 64

Imperfect trill, 23

In alt (in ahlt), 97

In altissimo (ahl-tis'-si-mo), 97

Ino (ee'-no), 42

Instrumentation, 97

Instruments, classification of, 112

Intensity of tones, 135

Interlude, 97

Intermediate tones, 38
see "Chromatic," p. 96

International pitch, 138

Interval, def., 83
enharmonic, 10
harmonic, 83
melodic, 83
names of, 83

Inversion, in thematic development, 69

Inversions of chords, 88

Inverted mordent, 23

Inverted turn, 25

Issimo, 42


Kettle-drum, 126

Key, def., 28
signature, 8
enharmonic keys, 10
key-tone, 27, 28
how different from scale, 28


L, 42

La (lah), 42

Lacrimando (lah-kri-mahn'-do), 60

Lacrimoso (lah-kri-mo'-so), 60

Largamente (lar-gah-men'-teh), 42

Largando (lar-gahn'-do), 53

Larghetto (lar-get'-to), 50

Largo, 50

Largo assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 52

Largo di molto (de mohl'-to), 52

Largo ma non troppo (mah non trop'-po), 52

Largo un poco (oon po'-co), 52

Le (leh), 42

Leading tone, 33, 36

Legato (leh-gah'-to), 18, 60

Leger lines, 5

Leggierissimo (led-jah-ris'-si-mo), 60

Leggiero (led-jee'-ro), 60

Lentando (len-tahn'-do), 52

Lentemente (len-tah-men'-teh), 52

Lentissimamente (-men'-teh), 52

Lentissamente (-men'-teh), 52

Lento, 50

Lento a capriccio (ah-cah-preet'-chee-o), 52

Lento assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 52

Lento di molto (de mohl'-to), 52

Libretto (lee-bret'-to), 78

Lied (leed), 80

L'istesso tempo (lis-tes'-so), 42, 55

Loco, 15, 97

Long appoggiatura (ap-pod-jea-too'-rah), 25

Lower tetrachord, 29

Lunga pausa (loong-ah pow'-zeh) or (loon-gah pah-oo'-za), 15

Lunga trillo, 97

Lusingando (loos-in-gahn'-do), 60

Lyric, 98


Madrigal (mad'-ri-gal), 81

Maesta (mah'-es-tah), 60

Maestoso (mah-es-to'-so), 60

Maggiore (mahd-jo'-reh), 98

Main droite (mahng droa), 20

Main gauche (mahng gowsh), 20

Major key, 8

Major scale, def., 29
positions, 30
origin of name, 33

Mancando (mahn-kahn'-do), 59

Mano destra (mah'-no dehs'-trah), 20

[Pg 164]Mano sinistra (si-nees'-trah), 20

Marcato il canto (mar-kah'-to eel kahn'-to), 98

Martellando (mar-tel-lahn'-do), 59

Martellato (mar-tel-lah'-to), 59

Marziale (mart-se-ah'-leh), 59

Mass, 77

Mazurka (mah-zoor'-ka), 71

Measure, def., 44
how differs from "bar," 12
how differs from "rhythm," 44
syncopation in, 44
simple and compound, 45
duple or even, 46
triple or perfect, 46
quadruple, 46
sextuple, 46
compound duple, 46
signature, 48
binary, 95

Mediant, 36

Mellifluous (mel-lif'-loo-us), 98

Melodic minor scales, 34

Melody, 82

Melos (meh'-los), 98

Meno (meh'-no), 42

Meno mosso (mos'-so), 53

Mente (men'-teh), 42

Menuet (meh-noo-eh'), 98

Menuetto (meh-noo-et'-to), 98

Messa di voce (mes'-sa dee vo'-cheh), 21

Mesto (mehs'-to), 60

Metronome, 49

Mezza (med'-zah), 42

Mezzo (med'-zo), 42

Mezzo forte (for'-teh), 42, 56

Mezzo piano (pe-ah'-no), 56

Mezzo soprano (so-prah'-no), 98

Mezzo voce (vo'-cheh), 60

Minor key, 8

Minore (me-no'-reh), 98

Minor scale, def., 33
positions, 34

Minuet, 71

Misterioso (mis-teh-ri-o'-so), 60

Moderato (mod-e-rah'-to), 51

Modulation, def., 92
enharmonic, 10

Molto (mohl'-to), 42

Molto crescendo (kre-shen'-do), 42

Monophonic style, 63, 67

Mordent, 22, 23

Morendo (mo-ren'-do), 59

Moriente (mo-ri-en'-teh), 59

Motet (mo-tet'), 76

Movable C Clef, 6

Mute, 117


Natural, 3, 8

Natural condition of staff-degrees, 8

Nel, 42

Nel battere (baht-teh'-reh), 42

Nella, 42

Neumae (neoo'-mee), 104

Nocturne, 98

Non (non), 42

Non tanto (tahn'-to), 42

Non tanto allegro (ahl-leh'-gro), 53

Non troppo allegro (trop'-po), 53

Notation, history of music, 101

Notes, def., 10
kinds of, 11
English names for, 11
dotted, 17
staccato, 17
irregular note-groups, 19
parts of, 1
how made, 1

Nuance (noo-angs), 98


Obbligato (ob-blee-gah'-to), 98

Oboe (o'-bo), 121

Octave, def., 36

Octaves, names of, 16

Offertory, 98

One-lined octave, 16

Open position, 94

Opera, 78

Opus, 98

Oratorio, 77

Orchestra, 115

Orchestration, 98

Organ, reed, 113
pipe, 114
[Pg 165]point, 98

Original minor scale, 33

Origin of scale, 28

Ossia (os'-see-ah), 42, 98

Ossia più facile (pe-oo' fah-chee'-leh), 42

Overtones, 136

Overture, 98


Parlando (par-lahn'-do), 60

Part song, 81

Pastorale (pas-to-rah'-leh), 60

Pedal point, 93

Pentatonic scale, 27

Per (pehr), 42

Percussion instruments, 116

Perdendo (pehr-den'-do), 59

Perdendosi (pehr-den-do'-see), 59

Perfect measure, 46

Perfect trill, 23

Per il violino (eel ve-o-le'-no), 42

Period, 67

Pesante (peh-sahn'-teh), 55

Peu (peuh), 42

Phrase, 67

Phrase mark, 18

Pianissimo (pee-ahn-is'-si-mo), 56

Pianissimo possibile (pos-see'-bee'-leh), 56

Pianisissimo (pee-ahn-is-is'-si-mo), 56

Piano (pee-ah'-no), 56

Piano assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 56

Piano, description of, 112

Piccolo (pik'-ko-lo), 119

Pipe organ, 114

Pitch, def., 134
pitch names, 6
standards of, 137
concert pitch, 138
international pitch, 138

Più (pe-oo'), 42

Più allegro (ahl-leh'-gro), 54

Più forte (for'-teh), 42

Più lento, 53

Più mosso (mos'-so), 54

Più tosto (tos'-to), 54

Pizzicato (pits-e-kah'-to), 99, 117

Pochetto (po-ket'-to), see ino, 42

Poco, 43

Poco a poco animando (ah-nee-mahn'-do), 54

Poi (po' ee), 42

Polacca (po-lahk'-kah), 99

Polka, 69

Polonaise (pol-o-nez'), 71, 99

Polyphonic style, 64

Pomposo (pom-po'-so), 60

Portamento (por'-tah-men'-to), 20

Position, open and close, 94

Possibile (pos-see'-bee-leh), 43

Postlude, 99

Prall trill, 22

Precipitoso (preh-che-pi-to'-so), 60

Prelude, 99

Prestissimo (pres-tis'-see-mo), 51

Prestissimo possibile (pos-see'-bee-leh), 51

Presto, 51

Presto assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 53

Presto (ma) non troppo (mah non trop'-po), 53

Prière (pre-ehr'), 99

Primary forms, 68

Primitive minor scale, 33

Program music, 74

Pure music, 74

Pure scale, 40


Quadruple measure, 46

Quality, 136

Quartet, 72

Quasi (quah'-see), 43

Quintole (kwin'-to-leh), 99

Quintolet, 20

Quintuplet, 20, 99


Raised sixth, 34

Rallentando (rahl-len-tahn'-do), 53

Rapidamente (rah-pid-a-men'-teh), 55

Rate of speed, of sound, 132

Recitative (res-i-tah-teev'), 78

Recitativo (reh-chee-ta-tee'-vo), 60

Reed organ, 113

Relative minor, 8, 35

Religioso (reh-lee-jo'-so), 99

Repetition and contrast, 62, 70

[Pg 166]Requiem (re'-kwi-em), 99

Rests, def., 10
rules for making, 2
kinds of, 11
peculiar use of, 11
several measures of, 14

Retardation, 93

Rhapsody, 99

Rhythm, def., 82
element of music, 82
how differs from "measure," 44
correct use of word, 48

Rhythmic augmentation, 69

Rhythmic diminution, 69

Rhythmic figures, 44

Ribattuta (re-baht-too'-tah), 99

Rigaudon (rig'-o-don), 71

Rinforzando (rin-for-tsahn'-do), 57

Rinforzato (rin-for-tsah'-to), 57

Risoluto (ree-so-loo'-to), 60

Ritardando (ree-tar-dahn'-do), 53

Ritenente (ree-ten-en'-teh), 53

Ritenuto (ree-ten-oo'-to), 53

Ritornelle (ree-tor-nell'), 99

Ritornello (ree-tor-nel'-lo), 99

Rondo, 70, 71

Rules:
For writing music, 1, 2
For turning stems, 1, 2
For altered staff degrees, 10
For embellishments, 22-26
For repeats, 13, 14
For writing chromatic scale, 38


Sans (sahng), 43

Sans pedales (peh-da-leh), 43

Sarabande (sar-ah-bahn'-deh), 71

Sarrusophone (sar-reoos-o-fohn'), 123

Saxhorn, p. 125 (footnote)

Saxophone, 121

Scales, def., 27
origin, 28
how different from keys, 28
positions of:
major, 30
minor, 34
chromatic, 38
tones of, called, 5, 36, 37
Chinese, 27
Scotch, 27

Scherzando (skehr-tsahn'-do), 60

Scherzo (skehr'-tso), 71, 72

Scherzoso (skehr-tzo'-so), 60

School-round, 66

Schottische (shot'-tish), 99

Score, 99

Scotch scale, 27

Sec (sek), 99

Secco (sek'-ko), 99

Section, 67

Segue (sehg'-weh), 14

Semplice (sem-plee'-cheh), 60

Sempre (sem'-preh), 43

Sempre forte (for'-teh), 43

Sempre lento malinconico assai (mah-leen-ko'-ni-ko ahs-sah'-ee), 55

Sempre marcatissimo (mar-kah-tis'-si-mo), 60

Sentimento (sen-tee-men'-to), 60

Senza (sen-tza), 42

Senza accompagnamento (ahc-com-pahn-yah-men'-toh), 42

Senza repetizione (reh-peh-titz-e-o'-neh), 14, 99

Senza replica (reh'-ple-kah), 99

Septimole, 20

Septolet, 20

Sequence, 91

Serenade, 99

Serenata (seh-re-nah'-tah), 99

Seventh chord, 89

Sextet, 99

Sextolet, 20

Sextuple measure, 46

Sextuplet, 20, 100

Sforzando (sfortz-ahn'-do), 57

Sforzato (sfortz-ah'-to), 57

Shake, 22

Sharp, 3, 7

Short appoggiatura (ap-pod-jea-too-rah), 25

Simile (see'-mee-leh), 14, 100

Similiter (see-mil'-i-ter), 100

Simple measure, 45

[Pg 167]Simple tone, 137

Sin (seen), 43

Sin al fine (ahl-fee'-neh), 14

Sino (see'-no), 43

Sixteen-foot stop, 114

Sixty-four-foot stop, 114

Slentando (slen-tahn'-do), 53

Slur, 18

Small octave, 16

Smorzando (smor-tzahn'-do), 59

Solenne (so-len'-neh), 59

Solfège (sul-fezh'), 100

Solfeggio (sol-fed'-jo), 100

Solmization, 100

Solo, 43

Sonata (so-nah'-tah), 71

Sonata allegro (ahl-leh'-gro), 73

Sonata form, 73

Sonatina (so-na-tee'-nah), 74

Song form, 68

Sopra (so'-prah), 100

Soprano (so-prah'-no), 100

Sordino (sor-dee'-no), 117

Sostenuto (sos-teh-noo'-to), 100

Sotto (sot'-to), 100

Sotto voce (vo'-cheh), 59

Sound, App. C, 131
Production of, 131
Transmission of, 131
Rate of travel of, 131
Intensification of, 133
Reflection of, 133
Classification of, 133

Spiritoso (spee-ree-to'-so), 60

Staccatissimo (stahk-kah-tis'-si-mo), 17

Staccato (stahk-kah'-to), 17, 20, 100

Staff, 5

Staff degrees, 5

Standards of pitch, 137

Stems, 1

Step, half and whole, 83

Strepitoso (streh-pee-to'-so), 61

Stretto (stret'-to), 54

Strict imitation, 64

Stringed instruments, 115

Stringendo (strin-jen'-do), 54

Stroking notes, 2

Strophe form (stro'-feh), 80

Styles, kinds of, 63
how differ from forms, 62

Sub, 43

Sub-dominant, 36

Subject, 64

Subito (soo-bee'-to), 100

Sub-mediant, 36

Sub-octave, 16

Suite (sweet), 70

Super-dominant, 36

Super-tonic, 36

Suspension, 92

Swell-box, 114

Syllables for sight-singing, 37

Symphonic poem, 75

Symphony, def., 73

Syncopation, 44


Tail of note, 1

Takt pausa (tahkt pow'-zeh or pah-oo'-za), 11

Tanto (tahn'-to), 43

Tarantella (tah-rahn-tel'-lah), 71

Tempered scales, 137

Tempo, 48-50

Tempo commodo (ko-mo'-do), 55

Tempo di marcia (de mar'-chee-ah), 55

Tempo di menuetto (meh-noo-et'-to), 55

Tempo di valso (vahl'-so), 55

Tempo giusto (jew-sto), 54

Tempo ordinario (or-dee-nah'-ree-o), 55

Tempo primo (pree'-mo), 54

Tempo rubato (roo-bah'-to), 54

Tenor, 100

Tenuto (teh-noo'-to), 55, 100

Terminology Reforms, App. D, p. 139

Tetrachords in scales, 29

Thematic development, 69

Theme, 69

Theme and variations, 69

Thesis, 67

Thirty-two-foot stop, 114

Thorough-bass, 89

Three-lined octave, 16

Through-composed form, 80

Tie, 18

[Pg 168]Timbre (tambr), 82

Time, wrong uses of word, 48

Toccata (tok-kah'-tah), 100

Tonality scale, 27, 28, 38

Tone, how represented, 10
ornamental tone, 22
key-tone, 27
of resolution, 93

Tone-poem, 75

Tonic, 36

Tonic minor, 36

Tranquillo (trahn-quil'-lo), 61

Transposition, 94

Tre (treh), 43

Treble staff, 6

Tre corde (kor'-deh), 43, 59

Très (treh), 43

Très lentement (lahng-te-mahng), 52

Très vivement (ve'-veh-mahng), 42

Triad, def., 87, 88

Trill, 22

Trio, 72

Triple measure, 46

Triplet, 19, 100

Tristamente (tris-tah-men'-teh), 61

Trombone, 125

Troppo (trop'-po), 43

Trumpet, 124

Tuba, 125

Turn, 24, 25

Tutte le corde (toot'-teh leh kor'-deh), 59

Tutti (toot'-tee), 100

Two-foot stop, 114

Two-lined octave, 16


Un (oon), 43

Una (oo'-nah), 43

Una corda, 43, 59

Uno (oo'-no), 43

Un peu (oon peuh), 43

Un peu crescendo (kre-shen'-do), 43

Un poco animate (ah-ni-mah-'to), 54

Untempered scale, 40

Upper partials, 136

Upper tetrachord, 29


Veloce (veh-lo'-cheh), 55

Viola (vee-o'-lah), 117

Violin, 117

Violoncello (vee-o-lohn-chel'-lo), 118

Vivo (vee'-vo), 51

Vivace (vee-vah'-cheh), 51

Vivacissimo (vee-vah-chis'-see-mo), 51

Vocal music, 76

Volante (vo-lahn'-teh), 55


Waltz, 68

Whole-step, 83

Whole-step scale, 28, 40

Wood-wind instruments, 115

A (ah), 95

A battuta (ah-baht-too'-tah), 95

A capella (cah-pel'-lah), 76

A capriccio (cah-pritch'-eo), 54

Accelerando (aht-cheh-leh-rahn'-do), 54

Accented tones, 20

Accent marks, 20

Accent in measures, 44

Acciaccatura (aht-cheea-cah-too'-ra), 25, 26

Accidentals, 9

Accompagnamento (ahc-com-pahn-yah-men'-to), 95

Acoustics (ah-kow'-stics), def., 131
of auditoriums, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Adagietto (ah-dah-jee-et'-to), 50

Adagio (ah-dah'-jee-o), 50

À deux mains (doo-mahng), 42

Ad libitum, 54

Affrettando (ahf-fret-tahn'-do), 54

Agitato (ah-jee-tah'-to), 55

Agréments (ah-greh-mahng), 22

À la or alla (ahl'-lah), 42

Alla breve (breh'-veh), 95

Alla marcia (mar'-chee-ah), 95

Allargando (ahl-lahr-gahn'-do), 53

Alla zingara (tseen-gah'-rah), 95

Allegretto (ahl-leh-gret'-to), 51

Allegrissimo, 52

Allegro (ahl-leh'-gro), 50

Allegro agitato (ah-jee-tah'-to), 52

Allegro appassionata (-ah'-tah), 52

Allegro assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 52

Allegro commodo (kom-mo'-do), 52

Allegro con brio (bree'-o), 52

Allegro con fuoco (foo-o'-ko), 53

Allegro con moto (mo'-to), 53

Allegro con spirito (spee'-ree-to), 53

Allegro di bravura (dee brah-voo'-rah), 53

Allegro di molto (mohl'-to), 53

Allegro furioso (foo-ree-o'-so), 53

Allegro giusto (jew-sto), 53

Allegro ma grazioso (mah grah-tsi-o'-so), 53

Allegro (ma) non tanto (tahn'-to), 53

Allegro (ma) non troppo (trop'-po), 53

Allegro moderato (mod-e-rah'-to), 53

Allegro quasi andante (quah-see ahn-dahn'-teh), 53

Allegro vivace (vee-vah'-cheh), 53

Allemande (al-mahnd), 71

All'unisono (oo-nee-so'-no), 95

All'ottava (ot-tah'-vah), 15

Alt (ahlt), 95

Alto (ahl-to), 95

A mezza voce (met'-zah-vo'-cheh), 42

Amore (ah-mo'-reh), 42, 59

Andante (ahn-dahn'-teh), 50

Andante affettuoso (ahf-fet-too-o'-so), 52

Andante amabile (ah-mah'-bee-leh), 52

Andante cantabile (cahn-tah'-bee-leh), 52

Andante con moto (mo'-to), 52

Andante grazioso (grah-tsi-o'-so), 52

Andante maestoso (mah-es-to'-so), 52

Andante (ma) non troppo (mah non trop'-po), 52

Andante pastorale (pahs-to-rah'-leh), 52

[Pg 160]Andante quasi allegro (quah-see ahl-leh'-gro), 52

Andante sostenuto (sos-teh-noo'-to), 52

Animando (ah-nee-mahn'-do), 55

Animato (ah-nee-mah'-to), 55

Animato come sopra (co-meh so'-prah), 55

Andantino (ahn-dahn-tee'-no), 50

Antecedent, 67

Anthem, 76

Anticipation, 93

Antiphony (an-tif'-o-ny), 95

Antithesis (an-tith'-), 67

A piacere (pee-ah-cheh'-reh), 54

Appoggiatura (ap-pod-jea-too'-rah), def., 25

À quatre mains (kahtr-mahng), 95

Arabesque, 95

Aria (ah'-ree-ah), 79

Arioso (ah-ree-o'-so), 95

Arpeggiando (ar-ped-jee-ahn'-do), 21

Arpeggiato (-ah'-to), 21

Arpeggiento (-en'-to), 21

Arpeggio (ar-ped'-jee-o), 21

Art-ballad, 80

Assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 42

A tempo, 54

A tempo primo (pree'-mo), 54

A tempo rubato (roo-bah'-to), 54

Attacca (aht-tah'-kah), 95

Attacca subito (soo'-bee-to), 95

Attacca subito il seguente (eel seg-wen'-teh), 95

Attack, 95


Bagpipe, 95

Ballad, 80

Band, 115

Bar, def. and use, 12
double, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Barcarole (bar'-cah-rohl), 95

Baritone, 95

Bass, 95

Bass clarinet, 121

Basso (bahs'-so), 95

Bassoon, 121

Bass staff, 6

Bass tuba, 125

Bass viol, 118

Ben (behn), 42

Ben marcato (mahr-kah'-to), 42

Berceuse (behr-soos'), 95

Binary form, 95

Binary measure, 95

Bis (bees), 96

Bolero (bo-leh'-ro), 71

Bourrée (boo-reh'), 71

Brace, 96

Brass instruments, 116

Brillante (breel-ahn'-teh), 55

Broken chord, 96

Broken octave, 96


Cacophony (kak-of'-o-ny), 96

Cadence, 89

Cadenza, 96

Calando (kah-lahn'-do), 59

Cancel, 3, 8

Cantabile (kahn-tah'-bee-leh), 96

Cantando (kakn-tahn'-do), 96

Canto (kahn'-to), 96

Cantus firmus, 64

Canon, 64

Cantata (kahn-tah'-tah), 77

Carol, 96

Catch, 96

C clef 3, 6

Cello (chel'-lo), 118

Chaconne (shah-con'), 71

Chamber music, 72

Chanterelle (shong-tah-rel'), 117

Chinese scale, 27

Choral, 76

Chords def. and lands, 87
inversions of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
common, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
seventh, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
dominant seventh, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chromatic, 96

Chromatic scale, 38

Clarinet, 121

Classes of instruments in orchestra, 115

Clavichord, 96

Clefs, 3, 5

Close position, 94

Coda, 70

Coi (co'-ee), 42

Col, 42

[Pg 161]Colla, 42

Colla parte (par'-teh), 96

Colla voce (vo'-cheh), 96

Colle, 42

Collo, 42

Coloratura singing, 79, 96

Coll'ottava (ot-tah'-vah), 15

Combination pedals, 115

Come (koh'-meh), 42

Come primo (pree'-mo), 42

Common chords, 87

Compound measure, 45

Compound duple measure, 45

Con, 42

Con alcuna licenza (ahl-koo'-nah lee-chen'-tsah), 59

Con amore (ah-mo'-reh), 42, 59

Con anima (ah'-nee-mah), 55

Con bravura (brah-voo'-rah), 59

Con celerita (che-leh'-ree-tah), 59

Concerto (con-cher'-to), 72

Concert pitch, 138

Con delicato (deh-lee-cah'-to), 59

Con energico (en-er-jee'-ko), 59

Con espressione (es-pres-see-o'-neh), 59

Con forza (fort'-za), 60

Con fuoco (foo-o'-ko), 60

Con grand' espressione (grahnd' es-pres-see-o'-neh), 60

Con grazia (grahts-yah), 60

Con melinconia (or malinconia) (-leen-ko'-ne-eh), 60

Con moto, 55

Con passione (pas-se-o'-neh), 60

Consequent, 67

Consonance, 96

Con spirito (spe'-ree-to), 60

Con tenerezza (teh-neh-ret'-za), 60

Continuous form, 80

Contra, 42

Contra bass tuba, 126

Contra octave, 16

Contralto, 96

Con variazione (vah-ri-ah-tsi-o'-neh), 96

Cornet, 124

Counterpoint, def., 64, 62, 82

Courante (koo-rahnt'), 71

Crescendo (kre-shen'-do), 57

Crescendo al fortissimo, 58

Crescendo ed affrettando (ahf-fret-tahn'-do), 58

Crescendo ed animando poco a poco (ah-ni-mahn'-do), 58

Crescendo e diminuendo (eh de-me-noo-en'-do), 58

Crescendo molto (mohl'-to), 58

Crescendo poco a poco, 58

Crescendo poco a poco sin al fine (seen ahl fee'-neh), 58

Crescendo poi diminuendo (po'-ee dee-mee-noo-en'-do), 58

Crescendo subito (soo'-bee-to), 58

Cross-stroke, 1, 2

Csardas (tsar'-dahs), 71


Da (dah), 42

Da capo (kah'-po), 13

Dal segno (sehn'-yo), 13

Dances, 71

Dash over note, 17, 20

Decrescendo (deh-kreh-shen'-do), 58

Decrescendo al pianissimo (ahl pee-ahn-is'-si-mo), 58

Degrees of staff, 5

Delicato (deh-lee-kah'-to), 60

Descriptive music, 74

Di (dee), 42

Diatonic condition, 7

Diatonic scale, 28

Di bravura (brah-voo'-rah), 42

Diminuendo (dee-mee-noo-en'-do), 58

Di molto (mohl'-to), 42

Direct, 96

Dirge, 97

Discord, 97

Dissonance (dis'), 97

Divisi (di-ve'-ze), 97

Dolce (dohl'-cheh), 60

Dolce e cantabile (eh kahn-tah'-bee-leh), 60

Dolcissimo (dohl-chis'-see-mo), 60

Dolente (do-len'-teh), 60

Dominant, 36

Dominant Seventh, 92

Doloroso (do-lo-ro'-so), 60

[Pg 162]Doppio (dop'-pee-o), 42

Doppio movimento (mo-vi-men'-to), 55

Dot—where placed, 3
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
with a slur or tie, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
with dash, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Double bar, 12

Double bass, 118

Double bassoon, 121

Double flat, 3, 7

Double mordent, 23

Double sharp, 3, 7

Doublet, 20

Duet, 97

Duple measure, 46

Dynamics, 56


E (eh), 42

École (eh'-kole), 97

Ed, 42

Eight-foot stop, 114

Elements of music, 82

Embellishments, 22

English names for notes, 11

English horn, 121

Enharmonic, def., 10

Enharmonic scale, 32

Enharmonic tie, 18

Ensemble (ong-sombl), 42

Equal temperament, 137

E poi la coda (eh-po'-ee), 14

Espressivo (ehs-pres-see'-vo), 60

Et, 42

Etto, 42

Etude, 97

Euphony (yu'-fo-ny), 97

Even measure, 46


Facile (fah-chee'-leh), 97

Fanfare (fahn'-fehr), 97

Fantasia (fahn-tah-ze'-ah), 97

F Clef, 3, 5, 6

Fermata (fehr-mah'-ta), 14, 15

Fiasco (fe-ahs'-ko), 97

Figured bass, 89

Fine (fee'-neh), 13

Five-lined octave, 16

Flat, 3, 7

Flute, 119

Folk-song, 81

Form, def., 62
binary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Forte (for'-teh), 56

Forte piano (pee-ah'-no), 56

Forte possibile (pos-see'-bee-leh), 43

Fortissimo, 56

Fortissimo possibile (pos-see-bee-leh), 56

Fortisissimo, 56

Forzando (for-tsahn'-do), 57

Forzato (for-tsah'-to), 57

Four-foot stop, 114

Four-lined octave, 16

Free imitation, 64

French horn, 123

French pitch designations, 6

Fugue, 66

Fundamental, 135


Gamut (gam'-ut), 97

Gavotte (gah-vot'), 71

G Clef, 3, 5, 6

General pause, 15

German pitch designation, 6

Gigue (zheeg), 71

Giocoso (jee-o-ko'-so), 60

Giojoso (jee-o-yo'-so), 60

Glee, 81

Glissando (glis-sahn'-do), 97

Graces, 22

Grandioso (grahn-dee-o'-so), 60

Grand sonata, 74

Grave (grah'-veh), 50

Grazioso (grah-tsi-o'-so), 60

Great octave, 16

Great staff, 5

Grosse pause (gros-seh pah-oo'-za) or (gros-seh pow-zeh), 15

Gruppetto (groo-pet'-to), 22


Habanera (hah-bah-neh'-rah), 71

Half-step, 83

Harmonic minor scale, 33

Harmonics, 136

Harmonics on violin, 117

[Pg 163]Harmony, 82

Harp, 129

Harpsichord, 97

Head of note, 1

Hold, 15

Homophonic style, 63

Hook, 1

Humoresque (hoo-mo-resk'), 97

Hymn to St. John, 37


Idyl, 97

Il (eel), 42

Il basso (bahs'-so), 42

Il più (pee'-oo), 42

Il più forte possibile (pos-see'-bee-leh), 42

Imitation, 64

Imperfect trill, 23

In alt (in ahlt), 97

In altissimo (ahl-tis'-si-mo), 97

Ino (ee'-no), 42

Instrumentation, 97

Instruments, classification of, 112

Intensity of tones, 135

Interlude, 97

Intermediate tones, 38
see "Chromatic," p. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

International pitch, 138

Interval, def., 83
enharmonic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
harmonic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
melodic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
names of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Inversion, in thematic development, 69

Inversions of chords, 88

Inverted mordent, 23

Inverted turn, 25

Issimo, 42


Kettle-drum, 126

Key, def., 28
signature, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
enharmonic keys, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
keytone, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
how different from scale, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__


L, 42

La (lah), 42

Lacrimando (lah-kri-mahn'-do), 60

Lacrimoso (lah-kri-mo'-so), 60

Largamente (lar-gah-men'-teh), 42

Largando (lar-gahn'-do), 53

Larghetto (lar-get'-to), 50

Largo, 50

Largo assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 52

Largo di molto (de mohl'-to), 52

Largo ma non troppo (mah non trop'-po), 52

Largo un poco (oon po'-co), 52

Le (leh), 42

Leading tone, 33, 36

Legato (leh-gah'-to), 18, 60

Leger lines, 5

Leggierissimo (led-jah-ris'-si-mo), 60

Leggiero (led-jee'-ro), 60

Lentando (len-tahn'-do), 52

Lentemente (len-tah-men'-teh), 52

Lentissimamente (-men'-teh), 52

Lentissamente (-men'-teh), 52

Lento, 50

Lento a capriccio (ah-cah-preet'-chee-o), 52

Lento assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 52

Lento di molto (de mohl'-to), 52

Libretto (lee-bret'-to), 78

Lied (leed), 80

L'istesso tempo (lis-tes'-so), 42, 55

Loco, 15, 97

Long appoggiatura (ap-pod-jea-too'-rah), 25

Lower tetrachord, 29

Lunga pausa (loong-ah pow'-zeh) or (loon-gah pah-oo'-za), 15

Lunga trillo, 97

Lusingando (loos-in-gahn'-do), 60

Lyric, 98


Madrigal (mad'-ri-gal), 81

Maesta (mah'-es-tah), 60

Maestoso (mah-es-to'-so), 60

Maggiore (mahd-jo'-reh), 98

Main droite (mahng droa), 20

Main gauche (mahng gowsh), 20

Major key, 8

Major scale, def., 29
positions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
name origin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mancando (mahn-kahn'-do), 59

Mano destra (mah'-no dehs'-trah), 20

[Pg 164]Mano sinistra (si-nees'-trah), 20

Marcato il canto (mar-kah'-to eel kahn'-to), 98

Martellando (mar-tel-lahn'-do), 59

Martellato (mar-tel-lah'-to), 59

Marziale (mart-se-ah'-leh), 59

Mass, 77

Mazurka (mah-zoor'-ka), 71

Measure, def., 44
how it differs from "bar," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how it differs from "rhythm," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syncopation in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
simple and compound, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
duplex or even, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
triple or perfect, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
quadruple, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
sextuple, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
compound duple, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
signature, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
binary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mediant, 36

Mellifluous (mel-lif'-loo-us), 98

Melodic minor scales, 34

Melody, 82

Melos (meh'-los), 98

Meno (meh'-no), 42

Meno mosso (mos'-so), 53

Mente (men'-teh), 42

Menuet (meh-noo-eh'), 98

Menuetto (meh-noo-et'-to), 98

Messa di voce (mes'-sa dee vo'-cheh), 21

Mesto (mehs'-to), 60

Metronome, 49

Mezza (med'-zah), 42

Mezzo (med'-zo), 42

Mezzo forte (for'-teh), 42, 56

Mezzo piano (pe-ah'-no), 56

Mezzo soprano (so-prah'-no), 98

Mezzo voce (vo'-cheh), 60

Minor key, 8

Minore (me-no'-reh), 98

Minor scale, def., 33
positions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Minuet, 71

Misterioso (mis-teh-ri-o'-so), 60

Moderato (mod-e-rah'-to), 51

Modulation, def., 92
enharmonic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Molto (mohl'-to), 42

Molto crescendo (kre-shen'-do), 42

Monophonic style, 63, 67

Mordent, 22, 23

Morendo (mo-ren'-do), 59

Moriente (mo-ri-en'-teh), 59

Motet (mo-tet'), 76

Movable C Clef, 6

Mute, 117


Natural, 3, 8

Natural condition of staff-degrees, 8

Nel, 42

Nel battere (baht-teh'-reh), 42

Nella, 42

Neumae (neoo'-mee), 104

Nocturne, 98

Non (non), 42

Non tanto (tahn'-to), 42

Non tanto allegro (ahl-leh'-gro), 53

Non troppo allegro (trop'-po), 53

Notation, history of music, 101

Notes, def., 10
types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
English names for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
dotted, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
staccato, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
irregular note clusters, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
parts of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to make, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nuance (noo-angs), 98


Obbligato (ob-blee-gah'-to), 98

Oboe (o'-bo), 121

Octave, def., 36

Octaves, names of, 16

Offertory, 98

One-lined octave, 16

Open position, 94

Opera, 78

Opus, 98

Oratorio, 77

Orchestra, 115

Orchestration, 98

Organ, reed, 113
pipe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
[Pg 165]point, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Original minor scale, 33

Origin of scale, 28

Ossia (os'-see-ah), 42, 98

Ossia più facile (pe-oo' fah-chee'-leh), 42

Overtones, 136

Overture, 98


Parlando (par-lahn'-do), 60

Part song, 81

Pastorale (pas-to-rah'-leh), 60

Pedal point, 93

Pentatonic scale, 27

Per (pehr), 42

Percussion instruments, 116

Perdendo (pehr-den'-do), 59

Perdendosi (pehr-den-do'-see), 59

Perfect measure, 46

Perfect trill, 23

Per il violino (eel ve-o-le'-no), 42

Period, 67

Pesante (peh-sahn'-teh), 55

Peu (peuh), 42

Phrase, 67

Phrase mark, 18

Pianissimo (pee-ahn-is'-si-mo), 56

Pianissimo possibile (pos-see'-bee'-leh), 56

Pianisissimo (pee-ahn-is-is'-si-mo), 56

Piano (pee-ah'-no), 56

Piano assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 56

Piano, description of, 112

Piccolo (pik'-ko-lo), 119

Pipe organ, 114

Pitch, def., 134
Suggest names, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
standards of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
concert pitch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
global proposal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Più (pe-oo'), 42

Più allegro (ahl-leh'-gro), 54

Più forte (for'-teh), 42

Più lento, 53

Più mosso (mos'-so), 54

Più tosto (tos'-to), 54

Pizzicato (pits-e-kah'-to), 99, 117

Pochetto (po-ket'-to), see ino, 42

Poco, 43

Poco a poco animando (ah-nee-mahn'-do), 54

Poi (po' ee), 42

Polacca (po-lahk'-kah), 99

Polka, 69

Polonaise (pol-o-nez'), 71, 99

Polyphonic style, 64

Pomposo (pom-po'-so), 60

Portamento (por'-tah-men'-to), 20

Position, open and close, 94

Possibile (pos-see'-bee-leh), 43

Postlude, 99

Prall trill, 22

Precipitoso (preh-che-pi-to'-so), 60

Prelude, 99

Prestissimo (pres-tis'-see-mo), 51

Prestissimo possibile (pos-see'-bee-leh), 51

Presto, 51

Presto assai (ahs-sah'-ee), 53

Presto (ma) non troppo (mah non trop'-po), 53

Prière (pre-ehr'), 99

Primary forms, 68

Primitive minor scale, 33

Program music, 74

Pure music, 74

Pure scale, 40


Quadruple measure, 46

Quality, 136

Quartet, 72

Quasi (quah'-see), 43

Quintole (kwin'-to-leh), 99

Quintolet, 20

Quintuplet, 20, 99


Raised sixth, 34

Rallentando (rahl-len-tahn'-do), 53

Rapidamente (rah-pid-a-men'-te), 55

Rate of speed, of sound, 132

Recitative (res-i-tah-teev'), 78

Recitativo (reh-chee-ta-tee'-vo), 60

Reed organ, 113

Relative minor, 8, 35

Religioso (reh-lee-jo'-so), 99

Repetition and contrast, 62, 70

[Pg 166]Requiem (re'-kwi-em), 99

Rests, def., 10
rules for making, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
strange use of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
multiple measures of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Retardation, 93

Rhapsody, 99

Rhythm, def., 82
music element, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how differs from "measure," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
correct use of word, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rhythmic augmentation, 69

Rhythmic diminution, 69

Rhythmic figures, 44

Ribattuta (re-baht-too'-tah), 99

Rigaudon (rig'-o-don), 71

Rinforzando (rin-for-tsahn'-do), 57

Rinforzato (rin-for-tsah'-to), 57

Risoluto (ree-so-loo'-to), 60

Ritardando (ree-tar-dahn'-do), 53

Ritenente (ree-ten-en'-teh), 53

Ritenuto (ree-ten-oo'-to), 53

Ritornelle (ree-tor-nell'), 99

Ritornello (ree-tor-nel'-lo), 99

Rondo, 70, 71

Rules:
For creating music, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
For turning stems, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
For changed staff qualifications, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
For embellishments, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-26
Understood. Please provide the text for me to modernize.
For writing a chromatic scale, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__


Sans (sahng), 43

Sans pedales (peh-da-leh), 43

Sarabande (sar-ah-bahn'-deh), 71

Sarrusophone (sar-reoos-o-fohn'), 123

Saxhorn, p. 125 (footnote)

Saxophone, 121

Scales, def., 27
origin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how different from keys, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
positions of:
major, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
minor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
colorful, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
tones of, called, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__


FOOTNOTES

[1] It should be noted at the outset that this statement regarding the down-turned stem on the left side of the note-head, and also a number of similar principles here cited, refer more specifically to music as it appears on the printed page. In the case of hand-copied music the down-turned stem appears on the right side of the note, thus quarter note. This is done because of greater facility in writing, and for the same reason other slight modifications of the notation here recommended may sometimes be encountered. In dealing with children it is best usually to follow as closely as possible the principles according to which printed music is notated, in order to avoid those non-satisfying and often embarrassing explanations of differences which will otherwise be unavoidable.

[1] It's important to note from the start that this comment about the down-turned stem on the left side of the note-head, as well as several similar principles mentioned here, specifically relates to music as it appears on the printed page. In hand-copied music, the down-turned stem actually appears on the right side of the note, thus quarter note. This is done for easier writing, and for the same reason, you might sometimes see other minor changes to the notation recommended here. When teaching children, it's usually best to stick closely to the principles used in notating printed music to avoid those unsatisfying and often awkward explanations of differences that would otherwise be hard to prevent.

[2] An exception to this rule occurs in the case of notes of unequal value stroked together, when the hook appears on the left side, thus unequal beamed notes.

[2] An exception to this rule happens when notes of different values are grouped together and the hook is on the left side, like this unequal beamed notes.

[3] It is to be hoped that the figure for the double-flat suggested by Mattheson (who also suggested the St. Andrew's cross (St. Andrew's cross) for the double-sharp) may some time be readopted. This figure was the Greek letter B, made thus, β, and its use would make our notation one degree more uniform than it is at present.

[3] Hopefully, the symbol for the double-flat suggested by Mattheson (who also recommended the St. Andrew's cross (St. Andrew's cross) for the double-sharp) will be adopted again someday. This symbol was the Greek letter B, represented as β, and using it would make our notation a bit more consistent than it is today.

[4] The word leger is derived from the French word LÉGER, meaning light, and this use of the word refers to the fact that the leger lines, being added by hand, are lighter—i.e., less solid in color—than the printed lines of the staff itself.

[4] The word leger comes from the French word LÉGER, which means light, and this usage refers to the fact that the leger lines, added by hand, are lighter—i.e., less solid in color—than the printed lines of the staff itself.

[5] The word clef is derived from CLAVIS—a key—the reference being to the fact that the clef unlocks or makes clear the meaning of the staff, as a key to a puzzle enables us to solve the puzzle.

[5] The word clef comes from CLAVIS—meaning key—because the clef unlocks or clarifies the meaning of the staff, just like a key helps us solve a puzzle.

[6] The Germans use the same pitch designations as we do with two exceptions, viz., our B is called by them H, and our B is called B. The scale of C therefore reads: C, D, E, F, G, A, H, C; the scale of F reads F, G, A, B, C, D, E, F. The signatures are in all cases written exactly as we write them.

[6] The Germans use the same pitch names as we do, with two exceptions: their B is called H, and their B♭ is simply called B. So, the C scale is: C, D, E, F, G, A, H, C; and the F scale is: F, G, A, B, C, D, E, F. The signatures are written exactly as we write them.

In France and Italy where the "fixed DO" system is in vogue, pitches are usually referred to by the syllable names; e.g., C is referred to as DO (or UT), D as RE, etc.

In France and Italy, where the "fixed DO" system is popular, notes are typically referred to by their syllable names; e.g., C is called DO (or UT), D is RE, and so on.

[7] The expression "diatonic condition" as here used refers to the staff after the signature has been placed upon it, in other words after the staff has been prepared to represent the pitches of the diatonic scale.

[7] The term "diatonic condition" used here refers to the musical staff once the key signature has been added, meaning after the staff has been set up to show the notes of the diatonic scale.

[8] It has already been noted (p. 6, Note) that in the German scale our b-flat is called b, and our b is called H. From this difference in terminology has grown up the custom of using the H (now made ) to show that any staff-degree is in natural condition, i.e., not sharped or flatted.

[8] It has already been mentioned (p. 6, Note) that in the German scale, our B-flat is referred to as B, and our B is referred to as H. This difference in terminology has led to the practice of using H (now represented as ) to indicate that any note on the staff is in natural state, i.e., not sharp or flat.

[9] The word sin is a contraction of the Italian word sino, meaning "as far as" or "until"; in the term given above (Sec. 39) it is really superfluous as the word al includes in itself both preposition and article, meaning "to the."

[9] The word sin comes from the Italian word sino, meaning "as far as" or "until"; in the term mentioned above (Sec. 39), it's actually unnecessary since the word al already combines both the preposition and the article, meaning "to the."

[10] For definition of enharmonic see p. 10, Sec. 27.

[10] For the definition of enharmonic, see p. 10, Sec. 27.

[11] Elson—Dictionary of Music, article mordent.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Elson—Dictionary of Music, article mordent.

[12] In organ music the acciaccatura is still taken to mean that the embellishing tone and the melody tone are to be sounded together, the former being then instantly released, while the latter is held to its full time-value.

[12] In organ music, the acciaccatura still means that the grace note and the main melody note are played together, with the grace note being released immediately while the melody note is sustained for its full duration.

[13] If strictly logical terminology is to be insisted upon the whole-tone scale should be called the "whole-step" scale.

[13] If we want to be really precise with our terminology, the whole-tone scale should actually be called the "whole-step" scale.

[14] The word tetrachord means literally "four strings" and refers to the primitive instrument, the four strings of which were so tuned that the lowest and the highest tones produced were a perfect fourth apart. With the Greeks the tetrachord was the unit of analysis as the octave is with us to-day, and all Greek scales are capable of division into two tetrachords, the arrangement of the intervals between the tones in each tetrachord differentiating one scale from another, but the tetrachords themselves always consisting of groups of four tones, the highest being a perfect fourth above the lowest.

[14] The word tetrachord literally means "four strings" and refers to a primitive instrument tuned so that the lowest and highest tones produced a perfect fourth apart. For the Greeks, the tetrachord was the basic unit of analysis, similar to how we use the octave today. All Greek scales can be divided into two tetrachords, with the arrangement of intervals between the tones in each tetrachord distinguishing one scale from another. However, the tetrachords themselves always consist of groups of four tones, with the highest tone being a perfect fourth above the lowest.

[15] The step-and-a-half (augmented second) is "unmelodic" because it is the same size as a minor third and the mind finds it difficult to take in as a second (notes representing it being on adjacent staff-degrees) an interval of the same size as a third.

[15] The step-and-a-half (augmented second) is "unmelodic" because it's the same size as a minor third, and the mind struggles to perceive it as a second (with notes representing it on adjacent staff positions) when it's the same size as a third.

[16] These syllables are said to have been derived originally from the initial syllables of the "Hymn to Saint John," the music of which was a typical Gregorian chant. The application of these syllables to the scale tones will be made clear by reference to this hymn as given below. It will be observed that this hymn provided syllables only for the six tones of the hexachord then recognized; when the octave scale was adopted (early in the sixteenth century) the initial letters of the last line (s and i) were combined into a syllable for the seventh tone.

[16] These syllables are believed to have originally come from the first syllables of the "Hymn to Saint John," which was set to a typical Gregorian chant. The connection between these syllables and the scale tones will be clarified by looking at this hymn provided below. You'll notice that this hymn only had syllables for the six tones of the hexachord that were recognized at the time; when the octave scale was adopted in the early sixteenth century, the first letters of the last line (s and i) were combined to create a syllable for the seventh tone.

Hymn to St. John

Hymn to St. John

[17] A considerable number of teachers (particularly those who did not learn to sing by syllable in childhood) object to calling the tonic of the minor scale la, insisting that both major and minor tonic should be called do. According to this plan the syllables used in singing the harmonic minor scale would be: DO, RE, ME, FA, SOL, LE, TI, DO.

[17] Many teachers (especially those who didn't learn to sing using syllables as kids) argue against naming the tonic of the minor scale la, claiming that both major and minor tonics should be referred to as do. Following this approach, the syllables for singing the harmonic minor scale would be: DO, RE, ME, FA, SOL, LE, TI, DO.

There is no particular basis for this theory, for although all scales must of course begin with the key-tone or tonic, this tonic may be referred to by any syllable which will serve as a basis for an association process enabling one to feel the force of the tone as a closing point—a home tone. Thus in the Dorian mode the tonic would be RE, in the Phrygian, MI, etc.

There isn’t any specific foundation for this theory, since while all scales must start with the key tone or tonic, this tonic can be represented by any syllable that serves as a basis for an association process, allowing one to sense the strength of the tone as a closing point—a home tone. For example, in the Dorian mode, the tonic would be RE, in the Phrygian, MI, and so on.

[18] The student should differentiate between the so-called "tonality" scales like the major and minor, the tones of which are actually used as a basis for "key-feeling" with the familiar experience of coming home to the tonic after a melodic or harmonic excursion, and on the other hand the purely artificial and mechanical construction of the chromatic scale.

[18] The student should recognize the difference between the so-called "tonality" scales like major and minor, which are actually used as the foundation for the "key-feeling" that comes from the familiar experience of returning to the tonic after a melodic or harmonic journey, and, on the other hand, the purely artificial and mechanical creation of the chromatic scale.

[19] Many other enharmonic notations are possible, altho the "five pairs of tones" above referred to are the most common. Thus E and F are enharmonically the same, as are also C and B, C and B[double-sharp], etc.

[19] There are many other possible enharmonic notations, although the "five pairs of tones" mentioned above are the most common. For example, E and F are enharmonically the same, just like C and B, C and B[double-sharp], and so on.

[20] The word chromatic means literally colored and was first applied to the intermediate tones because by using them the singer could get smoother and more diversely-shaded progressions, i.e., could get more color than by using only the diatonic tones. Composers were not long discovering the peculiar value of these additional tones and soon found that these same tones were exceedingly valuable also in modulating, hence the two uses of intermediate tones at the present time—first, to embellish a melody; second, to modulate to another key.

[20] The word chromatic literally means colored and was first used to describe intermediate tones because by incorporating them, singers could create smoother and more varied musical progressions, i.e., they could achieve more color compared to just using diatonic tones. Composers quickly recognized the unique value of these additional tones and soon realized that they were also extremely useful for modulation, thus leading to the two current uses of intermediate tones—first, to enhance a melody; second, to transition to another key.

[21] Stanford—Musical Composition (1911) p. 17.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Stanford—Music Composition (1911) p. 17.

[22] Recent tests in Germany seem to prove conclusively that the tempered scale is the scale ordinarily employed by both vocalists and players on stringed instruments, and that the ideal of and agitation for a pure (i.e., untempered) scale in vocal and in string music is somewhat of a myth.

[22] Recent tests in Germany appear to conclusively show that the tempered scale is the one commonly used by both singers and string players, and that the pursuit of a pure (i.e., untempered) scale in vocal and string music is somewhat of a myth.

[23] Pearse—Rudiments of Musical Knowledge, p. 37.

[23] Pearse—Basics of Music Theory, p. 37.

[24] For explanation of terminology, see p. 48, Sec. 106.

[24] For an explanation of the terminology, check out p. 48, Sec. 106.

[25] To test the accuracy of a metronome, set the weight at 60 and see if it beats seconds. If it gives more than 62 or 63 or less than 57 or 58 clicks per minute it will not be of much service in giving correct tempi and should be taken to a jeweller to be regulated.

[25] To check the accuracy of a metronome, set the dial to 60 and see if it ticks once every second. If it ticks more than 62 or 63 times per minute, or less than 57 or 58 times per minute, it won’t be very helpful for keeping accurate tempos and should be taken to a jeweler to be adjusted.

[26] Largo, larghetto, etc., are derivatives of the Latin word largus, meaning large, broad.

[26] Largo, larghetto, etc., come from the Latin word largus, which means large or broad.

[27] Adagio means literally at ease.

Adagio means at ease.

[28] There has been some difference of opinion as to which of these two terms indicates the more rapid tempo: an analysis tells us that if allegro means quick, and if etto is the diminutive ending, then allegretto means a little quick—i.e., slower than allegro. These two terms are, however, so closely allied in meaning that a dispute over the matter is a mere waste of breath.

[28] There’s been some debate about which of these two terms suggests a faster pace: an analysis shows that if allegro means fast, and etto is a diminutive suffix, then allegretto means a little fast—i.e., slower than allegro. However, these two terms are so closely related in meaning that arguing over it is just a waste of time.

[29] Bussler—Elements of Notation and Harmony, p. 76.

[29] Bussler—Elements of Notation and Harmony, p. 76.

[30] Both moriente and morendo mean literally—dying.

Both moriente and morendo literally mean dying.

[31] From smorzare (It.)—to extinguish.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ From smorzare (It.)—to put out.

[32] Polyphonic music flourished from 1000 A.D. to about 1750 A.D., the culmination of the polyphonic period being reached in the music of Johann Sebastian Bach (1685-1750). Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, and the later writers have used the monophonic style more than the polyphonic, although a combination of the two is often found, as e.g., in the later works of Beethoven.

[32] Polyphonic music thrived from 1000 A.D. to around 1750 A.D., reaching its peak in the works of Johann Sebastian Bach (1685-1750). Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, and later composers favored the monophonic style over the polyphonic, although a mix of both is often seen, as, for example, in Beethoven's later works.

[33] There is a very pronounced disagreement among theorists as to what terms are to be used in referring to certain forms and parts of forms and it seems impossible to make a compromise that will satisfy even a reasonable number. In order to make the material in this chapter consistent with itself therefore it has been thought best by the author to follow the terminology of some single recognized work on form, and the general plan of monophonic form here given is therefore that of the volume called Musical Form, by Bussler-Cornell.

[33] There is a significant disagreement among theorists about what terms should be used when talking about certain forms and parts of forms, and it seems impossible to reach a compromise that would satisfy even a reasonable number of people. To keep the material in this chapter consistent, the author has decided to stick to the terminology used in a single recognized work on form. Therefore, the general plan for monophonic form presented here is based on the book Musical Form by Bussler-Cornell.

[34] A liturgy is a prescribed form or method of conducting a religious service, and the parts sung in such a service (as e.g., the holy communion, baptism, etc.), are referred to as the musical liturgy.

[34] A liturgy is a set way of running a religious service, and the sections that are sung during this service (like e.g., holy communion, baptism, etc.) are called the musical liturgy.

[35] It should be understood that this statement refers to the service called "the high mass" only, there being no music at all in connection with the so-called "low mass."

[35] It should be clear that this statement is about the service known as "the high mass" only, as there is no music associated with the so-called "low mass."

[36] Many theorists (including Durand in his monumental "Treatise on Harmony") consider the V—I cadence to be the only one which may legitimately be called perfect, but the majority of writers seem to take the view that either authentic or plagal cadence may be either perfect or imperfect, depending upon the soprano tone, as noted above.

[36] Many theorists (including Durand in his monumental "Treatise on Harmony") believe that the V—I cadence is the only one that can truly be called perfect, but most writers seem to think that both the authentic and plagal cadences can be either perfect or imperfect, depending on the soprano tone, as mentioned earlier.

[37] Elson—Music Dictionary, article, "Notation."

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Elson—Music Dictionary, article, "Notation."

[38] Goddard—The Rise of Music, p. 177.

[38] Goddard—The Rise of Music, p. 177.

[39] Williams in Grove's Dictionary, article, "Notation."

[39] Williams in Grove's Dictionary, article, "Notation."

[40] The tonic-sol-fa system represents an attempt to invent a simpler notation to be used by beginners, (especially in the lower grades of the public schools) and by singers in choral societies who have never learned to interpret staff notation and who therefore find some simpler scheme of notation necessary if they are to read music at all.

[40] The tonic-sol-fa system is an effort to create an easier notation for beginners, especially in the early grades of public schools, and for singers in choral groups who haven't learned to read sheet music. This simpler notation is essential for them to be able to read music at all.

In this system the syllables do, re, mi, etc., (in phonetic spelling) are used, the tone being arrived at in each case, first by means of a firmly established sense of tonality, and second by associating each diatonic tone with some universally felt emotional feeling: thus do is referred to as the strong tone, mi as the calm one, and la as the sad tone, great emphasis being placed upon do as the center of the major tonality, and upon la as the center of the minor. The system is thus seen to have one advantage over staff notation, viz.: that in presenting it the teacher is compelled to begin with a presentation of actual tones, while in many cases the teacher of staff notation begins by presenting facts regarding the staff and other symbols before the pupil knows anything about tone and rhythm as such.

In this system, the syllables do, re, mi, etc. (in phonetic spelling) are used, with the tone established in each case first by a well-defined sense of tonality and second by linking each diatonic tone to a universally recognized emotional quality. For example, do is considered the strong tone, mi the calm tone, and la the sad tone, emphasizing do as the center of the major tonality and la as the center of the minor. This system has one key advantage over staff notation: it requires that the teacher starts with an introduction of actual tones, whereas in many cases, a staff notation teacher may start by explaining facts about the staff and other symbols before the student understands tone and rhythm itself.

The symbol for each diatonic tone is the initial letter of the syllable (i.e., d for do, r for re, etc.), the key being indicated by a letter at the beginning of the composition. The duration-value of tones is indicated by a system of bars, dots, and spaces, the bar being used to indicate the strongest pulse of each measure (as in staff notation) the beats being shown by the mark: a dash indicating the continuation of the same tone through another beat. If a beat has two tones this is indicated by writing the two initial letters representing them with a . between them. A modulation is indicated by giving the new key letter and by printing the syllable-initials from the standpoint of both the old and the new do-position. The figure ' above and to the right of the letter indicates the tone in the octave above, while the same figure below and to the right indicates the octave below. A blank space indicates a rest. The tune of My Country, 'Tis of Thee, as printed in tonic sol-fa notation below will make these points clear.

The symbol for each diatonic tone is the first letter of the syllable (e.g., d for do, r for re, etc.), with the key indicated by a letter at the start of the piece. The duration of tones is shown using a system of bars, dots, and spaces, where the bar indicates the strongest pulse of each measure (similar to staff notation) and the beats are represented by a dash that shows the continuation of the same tone through another beat. If a beat has two tones, this is indicated by writing the two initial letters for them with a . in between. A modulation is indicated by providing the new key letter and printing the syllable initials from the perspective of both the old and new do-position. The figure ' above and to the right of the letter shows the tone in the octave above, while the same figure below and to the right indicates the octave below. A blank space denotes a rest. The tune of My Country, 'Tis of Thee, as shown in tonic sol-fa notation below will clarify these points.

Key F

Key F

| d :d :r | t1 :-.d :r | m :m :f | m :-.r :d | r :d :t1 | d :— :— |
| s :s :s | s :-.f :m | f :f :f | f :-.m :r | m :f.m :r.d | m :-.f :s |
| l.f :m :r | d :— :— |

| d :d :r | t1 :-.d :r | m :m :f | m :-.r :d | r :d :t1 | d :— :— |
| s :s :s | s :-.f :m | f :f :f | f :-.m :r | m :f.m :r.d | m :-.f :s |
| l.f :m :r | d :— :— |

The advantages of the system are (1) the strong sense of key-feeling aroused and the ease with which modulations are felt; and (2) the fact that it is necessary to learn to sing in but one key, thus making sight-singing a much simpler matter, and transposition the easiest process imaginable. But these are advantages from the standpoint of the vocalist (producing but one tone at a time) only, and do not apply to instrumental music. The scheme will therefore probably be always restricted to vocal music and will hardly come into very extensive use even in this field, for the teacher of music is finding it perfectly possible to improve methods of presentation to such an extent that learning to sing from the staff becomes a very simple matter even to the young child. And even though this were not true, the tonic-sol-fa will always be hampered by the fact that since all letters are printed in a straight horizontal line the ear does not have the assistance of the eye in appreciating the rise and fall of melody, as is the case in staff notation.

The benefits of the system are (1) the strong sense of feeling the key and how easily modulations are perceived; and (2) the fact that you only need to learn to sing in one key, which makes sight-singing much easier and transposing the simplest thing imaginable. However, these advantages only apply from the vocalist's perspective (who produces just one note at a time) and don’t extend to instrumental music. Therefore, this approach will likely remain limited to vocal music and probably won’t be widely adopted even in that area, as music teachers are discovering effective ways to present material that make learning to sing from the staff straightforward, even for young children. And even if that weren't the case, the tonic-sol-fa method will always struggle because all the letters are printed in a straight line, meaning the ear doesn’t get the visual help from the eyes to appreciate the rise and fall of melody, which is possible with staff notation.

[41] The ranges noted in connection with these descriptions of instruments are ordinarily the practical orchestral or band ranges rather than those which are possible in solo performance.

[41] The ranges mentioned in these descriptions of instruments are typically the practical orchestral or band ranges, not the ranges that can be achieved in solo performances.

[42] The saxhorn was invented about 1840 by Adolphe Sax, a Frenchman. The saxophone is the invention of the same man.

[42] The saxhorn was created around 1840 by Adolphe Sax, a Frenchman. The saxophone also came from the same person.

[43] Floyd S. Muckey—"Vocal Terminology," The Musician, May, 1912, p. 337.

[43] Floyd S. Muckey—"Vocal Terminology," The Musician, May, 1912, p. 337.

[44] Note:—Not "space below the staff" or "space above the staff."

[44] Note:—Not "space below the staff" or "space above the staff."

 

 



Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!